1. IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 | Hi, this is Brian Wood.
| | 00:02 | I'm going to be hosting the InDesign CS2
Beyond the Basics title here at Lynda.com.
| | 00:06 | We're going to be talking a lot about different things.
| | 00:09 | Things like tables of contents, books.
| | 00:11 | All the things you want to learn more about, basically.
| | 00:13 | So welcome, and join me inside.
| | 00:15 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Grid and Guide ManagementQuick and accurate guide placement| 00:00 | In this first movie we're going to be talking about guides, guide
positioning, guide creation; just a lot of different things that we can do
| | 00:06 | that are a little bit easier for us to be able
to use. I guess you could call them shortcuts.
| | 00:10 | Now, a lot of times while we're going through
this title I'm going to be utilizing exercise files,
| | 00:14 | and they're available with the Premium subscription,
and also on the CD-ROM, if you purchase that.
| | 00:19 | If you're a monthly or annual subscriber and if you don't have
access to these files, you can learn by watching and use your own,
| | 00:24 | but if you'd like to follow along my steps exactly and you want to
actually use the files that I'm utilizing, I'd suggest actually upgrading
| | 00:31 | to the Premium subscription, or purchasing the CD-ROM.
| | 00:35 | Right now I've just opened a blank page; we're going to utilize some guides.
| | 00:38 | So to start with, come up to the rulers, I'm going to
drag a guide out, show you a few things here.
| | 00:42 | As I drag guides out - click and hold out, drag out onto the
page - two types of guides we have: Page guide, Spread guide.
| | 00:49 | If I'm on the page and I want to generate a spread
guide - let's say I'm zoomed in really tight -
| | 00:53 | if I hold the Command key down Mac, Control
key Windows, I've generated a spread guide.
| | 00:58 | Let go of the mouse, let go of my key, I've got a spread guide.
| | 01:02 | Now a lot of times what's going to happen here is this: you're going to
want to position these guides somewhere directly on the page exactly
| | 01:07 | on a ruler measurement - let's say at about four inches for instance.
| | 01:10 | I'm going to drag another guide out; click and drag out.
| | 01:13 | As I drag it down you can see it's a page guide.
| | 01:16 | If I want to hit the actual measurements on the ruler, if I hold my
Shift key down, it will actually snap to the ruler on the side for me.
| | 01:21 | Looking up at the Control palette, upper left on
your screen, you will see it says four inches.
| | 01:26 | Letting go of my mouse first, then the key, I've
got a guide at four inches from the top of the page.
| | 01:31 | Now, a nice little feature I like to see is being able to Lock Guides.
| | 01:35 | Lock Guides we can do from the View menu, but you
can also lock individual guides if you'd like.
| | 01:41 | Let's say I come back up to this spread guide up here.
| | 01:43 | If I click on the guide to select it, right-click on the guide, right-
clicking directly over the guide, that's the key, I will see Lock Position.
| | 01:51 | This allows me to lock the position, by clicking on that, of any guide.
| | 01:56 | Now, if you don't have a two-button mouse on a Mac, basically
what I can do is, if I go up to Object with that guide selected,
| | 02:03 | I should be able to see Lock Position sitting
right up here, that will allow you to do that.
| | 02:06 | You will also note the shortcut, Command-L Mac, Control-L on Windows.
| | 02:11 | So that's a nice easy way to lock a guide for us.
| | 02:14 | That way, if I go out to it, I cannot select
it, I can't move it, it is locked.
| | 02:16 | But the other guides on the page still can move.
| | 02:20 | Something else a lot of people like to do is they like to either select all
of their guides, or they like to actually create a center guide position.
| | 02:27 | First of all, let's talk about selecting all of our guides.
| | 02:29 | An easy way to do that, holding down Command-Option
on Mac, Control-Alt on Windows, and hitting the G key,
| | 02:37 | that allows me to select all of the guides I have
on my page, which is a nice easy way to do that.
| | 02:42 | So if I'd like to delete them all, I could do
that, as long as they're all unlocked, for myself.
| | 02:46 | I'm going to click to deselect.
| | 02:48 | One other thing I'd like to show you here is being able
to create a vertical or horizontal guide from the rulers.
| | 02:53 | Say for instance I'd like to create a guide at two inches, a
vertical guide at two inches from the left edge of the page.
| | 02:59 | If you double-click on a ruler you'll actually create a guide that
is a spread guide, now it's a vertical spread guide in this case.
| | 03:08 | Take a look at it. If I click on it here to select it, I can see
it's not exactly at two inches looking at the Control palette.
| | 03:13 | To easily do that, I'm going to delete the guide by hitting Delete.
To easily set a guide and snap it to the rulers by double_clicking,
| | 03:19 | hold the Shift key down first, then double-
click right on the increment you want.
| | 03:24 | That will snap it to the guide itself, that way
guaranteeing you're at two inches across from the left edge.
| | 03:31 | Now, something else I'd like to do is this.
| | 03:33 | We're going to go ahead and create a vertical and horizontal
guide that's centered directly in the middle of the page.
| | 03:39 | To do that, I'm going to come up to my actual zero point location here,
| | 03:43 | and we're actually going to see that this is
the way I can change my zero point.
| | 03:47 | On the Mac if I hold down my Command key, click and drag out, that will be
Control key on Windows, if I click and drag out, what we're going to be
| | 03:54 | able to do is this: we're not going to change our zero
zero point, but I'm going to actually be able
| | 03:57 | to set guides on the page, horizontal and vertical at once.
| | 04:01 | Holding down the Shift key as well, coming, that will actually allow
me to snap to my rulers, I can see up here actually on this map
| | 04:08 | at 4.25 inches across, 5.5 inches down,
if I let go of my mouse, let go of the keys,
| | 04:14 | I actually have center guides, horizontal and vertical, for myself.
| | 04:18 | So it's a nice easy way to be able to do something like that. That way
you can hit the dead center on the page for yourself pretty easily.
| | 04:23 | And if I want those to be locked, I can select them by dragging
across, coming right across it, right-click, Lock Position,
| | 04:30 | learning that shortcut Command-L Mac, Control-L Windows, or if you don't
have a two-button mouse, coming under Object>Lock Position for ourselves.
| | 04:38 | Nice easy way to do that.
| | 04:41 | There are a lot of things we can do with guides, and these are just
a few of those, that make it a little bit easier for ourselves.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Create Guides command| 00:00 | Guides can be used for all sorts of things.
| | 00:02 | One of the things that we can use them for is
to create some sort of grid pattern on the page.
| | 00:06 | For instance, say I'm going to develop a business card, and I need to lay
it out on a page and actually put several copies of the business card,
| | 00:14 | you know, four copies, six copies, however it's going to be printed basically.
| | 00:17 | To do that, we could set guides on the page for
ourselves, and that would be pretty easy, not too bad.
| | 00:22 | We'd have to figure out, you know, distances between things, but
InDesign has a nice feature for us to be able to do that automatically.
| | 00:29 | Take a look under the Layout menu up top.
| | 00:31 | What we're going to do is we're going to open up something called Create Guides.
| | 00:35 | Create Guides allows us to go through and
generate guides on a page using rows and columns,
| | 00:40 | and even creating things like a centering
guide like we saw in the last movie.
| | 00:45 | One of the things I'd like to do here is this.
| | 00:47 | Let's say we're going to create something like guides for a
business card setup, take a look, we can see Rows and Columns.
| | 00:55 | This is going to set guides on the page in vertical and horizontal positions.
| | 00:58 | First of all, turn on Preview.
| | 01:00 | Almost every dialog in InDesign has something like that.
| | 01:03 | Come to Rows, what we're going to do is, we're going to immediately
come to 1 on Rows, come over to Columns and come to 1.
| | 01:09 | Now the interesting thing about this is it actually going to set up
rows of guides for us. This is how we can actually set up guides
| | 01:15 | around the edges of the page, which is kind of interesting.
| | 01:19 | What I want to do is, we're going to get out
here and put several business cards out here.
| | 01:22 | So let's do this: we're going to set up 3
rows on the page and 2 columns for ourselves.
| | 01:28 | If you look on the page - let me move the dialog
out of the box by grabbing by the bar here -
| | 01:32 | look on the page, you can see the guides basically showing up.
| | 01:35 | Like I said, this is great for being able to create grid patterns
that allow you to actually place images in certain places, you know,
| | 01:42 | text boxes next to them, etcetera, so that
you have a nice grid out there for yourselves.
| | 01:47 | Now, under the Rows and Columns we have
the ability to set the Gutters as well.
| | 01:51 | If I was going to set business cards, I could figure out the width
of things out here, and actually set gutter dimensions out here
| | 01:56 | to actually match things like the bleed on
the business card, if you look out here.
| | 02:00 | So the Gutter's going to be the distance between the
two guides vertically and horizontally as well.
| | 02:06 | One great feature we have here as well is if you take a look on the page,
| | 02:09 | you're going to notice that the guides are
starting from the page edge out here.
| | 02:13 | One of the things that we want to be able to
do is start guides from the margins as well.
| | 02:17 | If you look under Options down here in the Create Guides dialog box
you're going to see Fit Guides to Margins or Page.
| | 02:23 | Click Margins, take a look, it's setting guides on the margins
themselves. That way the area we're talking about here is
| | 02:30 | within the margin and up to the gutter basically of the guide here.
| | 02:34 | Now this is a, like I said, this is a great way for you to be able
to, if you had something like a either table of contents or a document
| | 02:41 | that had you know, people's pictures that you need to put in
columns and rows, this is a nice easy way to do something like this.
| | 02:47 | Another feature we can do in here is if you look at, down here in
the Create Gguides dialog box I can see Remove Existing Ruler Guides.
| | 02:53 | To clear guides on a page sometimes this can be an easier method.
| | 02:56 | By clicking that, any guides that are on the page before you started
this will immediately remove from the page, which is really kind of nice.
| | 03:03 | I do that sometimes when I need to just get
rid of all my guides, if they're locked or not.
| | 03:07 | Now just one other thing inside of here.
| | 03:09 | If you're trying to create a centering guide for yourself, let's say we
want to create a guide that's vertical as well as horizontal direct center
| | 03:15 | on the page here, if I come in here, if I tell myself to be 2 Columns
and 2 Rows, if I set the Gutter here to 0, and if I take a look,
| | 03:24 | you notice how I can use my arrows in any one of these?
| | 03:26 | An easy way to do this is, if you click on the tag next to the actual
field, like Gutter right here, I can utilize my arrow keys as well,
| | 03:33 | I'm using my up and down arrow keys on my keyboard to change the value.
| | 03:37 | By setting 2 Columns and 2 Rows with 0 Gutter, if I click
OK out here I can see that I've got a centering guide on the page.
| | 03:45 | It's also a nice easy way to do something like
that, to be able to center objects on the page.
| | 03:49 | So utilizing guides there's a lot of things we
can do, in utilizing the Create Guides feature,
| | 03:53 | we can actually create grades of guides for ourselves pretty easily.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with document-based baseline grids| 00:00 | Now we're going to go thru how to work with baseline grids with documents.
| | 00:05 | I've opened up from the exercise files inside of the Chapter 2
folder, I've opened up the "brochure_baseline.indd" document.
| | 00:12 | Now, the exercise files once again that I'm using throughout the
tutorial are available with the Premium subscription and on the CD-ROM.
| | 00:19 | If you're a monthly or annual subscriber and you don't have access
to these, I mean you can follow along and use your own files,
| | 00:24 | but if you really want to follow along and utilize, you know, step
by step exactly the files that I'm using I'd recommend you upgrade
| | 00:30 | to the Premium subscription because that actually gets
you access to the files, or purchase the CD-ROM itself.
| | 00:37 | So, let's get started with the baselines out here.
| | 00:39 | I wanted to discuss a little bit about baselines
and talk about what happens here and what they are.
| | 00:44 | So, I'm going to zoom in over here using Command-
Spacebar, Control-Spacebar on Windows.
| | 00:48 | Take a look on the left hand side.
| | 00:49 | I'm on page 2 right now of the document.
| | 00:51 | I'm going to draw a guide from the horizontal ruler up top.
| | 00:54 | Click, and drag out.
| | 00:56 | And, if I take a look, what I'm going to be able to see, is across
the two columns here the text is not perfectly lined up.
| | 01:02 | You know, a lot of times that's fine.
| | 01:04 | You know, a lot of publications you're working on that's great.
| | 01:06 | But, if you're doing something like a newspaper,
magazine, that sort of thing where that does matter,
| | 01:11 | then for you to line those up is going to be kind
of a pain unless you use the baseline grids.
| | 01:15 | All of your text sits on baselines kind of like this,
and InDesign comes with a grid that sits behind.
| | 01:21 | It's kind of like college-ruled paper.
| | 01:23 | To see that, we're going to go up to View, come down to
Grids and Guides and you will see Show Baseline Grid.
| | 01:30 | So, let's open that up there.
| | 01:32 | Take a look, it's going to take your eyes a second to kind of adjust here.
| | 01:34 | You might get a little nauseous, but that's fine.
| | 01:35 | It's par for the course.
| | 01:36 | What I'm going to do is delete that guide that I had on here.
| | 01:39 | So, I'm going to click on that and delete that.
| | 01:40 | I don't need that anymore.
| | 01:42 | This grid is kind of like college-ruled paper and what
it's meant for you to do is to snap your text to it.
| | 01:48 | To do that I'm going to come to my Type tool, and once again if you're on
your black arrow, if you double-click on top of text you come directly
| | 01:55 | to your Type tool, which is kind of a nice little feature.
| | 01:58 | With your Type tool inside of there, your
cursor in there, come to your Paragraph Formats
| | 02:02 | in the Control palette, or the Paragraph palette itself, it doesn't matter.
| | 02:06 | Come all the way to the right over here in the Control palette.
| | 02:08 | Take a look.
| | 02:09 | You've got two buttons, Do not align, and Align to baseline grid.
| | 02:13 | Watch what happens when I click Align to baseline grid.
| | 02:15 | If you take a look, you're basically just spreading the text out.
| | 02:20 | Here's what's happening.
| | 02:22 | Typically we're going to be doing space afters, we're going to be
doing leading, all sorts of things to get our text to look good.
| | 02:28 | If I snap text to the baseline grid the baseline
grid has a set distance between the lines here.
| | 02:33 | The distance should equal the leading value of your text;
the leading value being the distance between the lines.
| | 02:40 | ,
If it doesn't, if these lines are too close together it's going to
basically push the text to the next line itself and snap it to that grid.
| | 02:47 | So, that's a problem we've got.
| | 02:49 | So, what we need to do is this...
| | 02:51 | With all of our text we're going to get it to line up, but I want
it to look good too, which is kind of a problem right now.
| | 02:56 | So, what we have to do is we can actually set the grid
itself to basically change the space between the lines here.
| | 03:02 | So, the first step we want to do is this: Put your
cursor in your text, make sure it's in there,
| | 03:06 | come to your Character Formats or the Character palette, doesn't matter.
| | 03:11 | Take a look at your leading value right now.
| | 03:13 | That should be the distance between the baseline grid.
| | 03:15 | That's what we're going to set it at.
| | 03:16 | So, I've got 14.4 point right here.
| | 03:19 | I'm going to select that right there.
| | 03:20 | If you take a look I can click on the actual icon on the left here.
| | 03:23 | I'm going to copy that value.
| | 03:24 | So, I'm going to go to Edit>Copy, Command-C, Control-C.
We're going to go set our baseline grid now, to work.
| | 03:31 | To do that we're going to come to Preferences.
| | 03:33 | On the Mac, come to InDesign, on the Windows come to Edit, come down to
Preferences, and if you take a look in here, we're actually going to see Grids.
| | 03:44 | Come to Grids, you're going to open up your Preferences pane here.
| | 03:48 | Now, if you take a look we're going to be able to see
that we have Baseline Grids setting inside of here.
| | 03:52 | There's a lot of things you can do to this.
| | 03:53 | You can change the colors of these lines sitting out here.
| | 03:56 | You can tell it where to start relative to the top of the page.
| | 03:59 | Right here it says Relative To: Top of Page.
| | 04:01 | You can also tell it to go within your margin guides.
| | 04:05 | Increment Every should equal your leading value.
| | 04:09 | Now, if you take a look, this leading value right here is in inches.
| | 04:12 | Does anyone know the conversion from 14.4 points to inches?
| | 04:17 | I didn't think so.
| | 04:17 | It's kind of rough.
| | 04:18 | So, what I'll do is this.
| | 04:20 | Click on Increment Every.
| | 04:21 | It's going to select a text.
| | 04:22 | I'm going to do a Paste, Edit>Paste.
| | 04:25 | You can do Command-V, Control-V, and you're
going to see your leading value in there.
| | 04:29 | Now, there's a little thing in here.
| | 04:31 | I've got to get rid of these actual parenthesis
here because it won't recognize it otherwise.
| | 04:36 | Now, with it pasted in there, if you Tab, or go to another field - just
clicking on the field - it will automatically convert it to inches for you.
| | 04:43 | So, that is the distance between the baseline.
| | 04:45 | So, if you take a look we also have Relative To.
| | 04:48 | Relative To, like I said, allows you to say: start this grid - if you
look on my page out here - start it at the top of the page, or better yet,
| | 04:56 | if I move this out of the way, start it at the top
of my margins, which is usually what we want to do.
| | 05:01 | I'm going to move this back.
| | 05:02 | I'm going to say Relative To: Top Margin. Select Top Margin.
| | 05:06 | We can't preview this unfortunately.
| | 05:08 | So, we're going to have to click OK, get it out there and take a look at it.
| | 05:12 | So, Relative To: Top Margin.
| | 05:13 | I'm going to tell it to Start 0 here.
| | 05:15 | If it said Top Margin it would start it
a half inch from your top of your margin.
| | 05:19 | So, I'm going to say let's start at 0 inches from the
Top Margin and get it to start directly on there.
| | 05:24 | Now, View Threshold is literally saying, if I zoom
out beyond this value they will actually disappear.
| | 05:29 | These gridlines will disappear.
| | 05:31 | So, you can get it to do that.
| | 05:32 | It's kind of a nice little feature.
| | 05:35 | Once we set up our baseline grid, this is going to do it for the
whole document, click OK, take a look at your document out here.
| | 05:41 | You can basically see now that it starts
right at the top of your margin guides here.
| | 05:46 | And, if you look at your text it should look a lot better.
| | 05:49 | It's actually the distance between these
grid lines here is set to your leading value.
| | 05:53 | That's a good thing.
| | 05:55 | Now that this is snapped to the grid itself, one thing we
want to do is we want to get the rest of our text to do that.
| | 06:01 | So, this is actually a paragraph format.
| | 06:04 | I've actually set up paragraph styles for this.
| | 06:06 | If you didn't set up paragraph styles you'd have to go in and
select every paragraph and tell it to snap to the baseline grid.
| | 06:12 | Since we have a paragraph style - come off to the
side over here in your Paragraph Styles palette.
| | 06:15 | If you take a look we've got Body with a plus next
to it, plus meaning that we've got an Override.
| | 06:20 | If you take a look, it says Grid Alignment: Baseline.
| | 06:23 | All I want to do is this: with my cursor in the paragraph we're
going to redefine the body to tell it to snap all the body text.
| | 06:30 | So, with Body selected, I'm going to come to the
Paragraph Styles menu and say, Redefine Style.
| | 06:34 | There's the shortcut for that.
| | 06:36 | That allows me to redefine all the body text.
| | 06:38 | Now, if you take a look all of your body
text should be snapped to the baseline grid.
| | 06:42 | Kind of a nice easy process.
| | 06:44 | There's a couple things you want to watch out for this though.
| | 06:47 | With Space After, and that sort of thing, if I
look down here - let me scroll down a bit here -
| | 06:52 | I'm going to use my Option key on Mac, Alt
key on Windows, to get to my Hand tool.
| | 06:56 | If I take a look, you're going to have to jump basically
the distance between the two baselines here.
| | 07:00 | So, if you have heading values or headings themselves that are
not snapping, it's going to look a little different right there.
| | 07:06 | And, if you do any Space After, for instance, if I had my cursor in
this paragraph, come to your Paragraph Format, or the Paragraph palette,
| | 07:14 | go up to Control panel, Paragraph Formats, if
you take a look I've got my Space After right here.
| | 07:20 | Now, if I do any Space After, watch this.
| | 07:22 | If I start to do Space After, it's going to start to move my text.
| | 07:25 | See what happens to this paragraph down here?
| | 07:27 | It has to snap to a line.
| | 07:29 | So, it's actually going to jump which is
something that you do have to watch for.
| | 07:33 | So, those are basically baseline grids inside of a document.
| | 07:37 | The whole document works the same way
using the baseline grid for every page.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with frame-based baseline grids| 00:00 | All right.
| | 00:00 | In this section we're going go through and talk about how
to work with a baseline grid for an individual text frame.
| | 00:07 | Now, from the exercise folders go ahead and open up from
the Chapter 2 folder the "brochure_baseline.indd" file.
| | 00:13 | It is the same file we had open last movie.
| | 00:16 | I saved it.
| | 00:16 | You didn't have to save it.
| | 00:17 | That's fine.
| | 00:18 | The first thing we're going to do is this.
| | 00:20 | We're going to talk about a baseline grid as
far as it relates to an individual text frame.
| | 00:25 | First things first.
| | 00:26 | Open up the actual grid itself.
| | 00:28 | I want to see the grid.
| | 00:30 | Come into View, the View menu.
| | 00:33 | Go down to Grids and Guides.
| | 00:34 | Take a look.
| | 00:34 | You should see Show Baseline Grid.
| | 00:37 | Turn that on.
| | 00:38 | Let's take a look.
| | 00:39 | Last movie, last session, I showed you how to actually work
with the baseline grids just as a document in general.
| | 00:45 | This time what I want to do is focus in on a single text frame.
| | 00:49 | Clicking down here where it says "New Tea
Shop" - I'm going to zoom into that.
| | 00:52 | Command-Spacebar, Control-Spacebar Windows.
| | 00:55 | Taking a look down here you can actually
see that I've got a text frame here.
| | 00:58 | And if I put my cursor inside of it by double-clicking with my Cursor
tool here, taking a look at my character styles up at the top -
| | 01:06 | character formatting - I can actually see
that this is 10 point type if I take a look.
| | 01:11 | So a little different from the type out on the page.
| | 01:14 | Now in the last session what I did was I talked about the baselines,
and I said that the baseline grid itself has to match, or at least has
| | 01:21 | to start matching, with your leading value of your text.
| | 01:23 | If your text is different sizes, it's going to be
really kind of rough to snap that text to the grid.
| | 01:28 | For instance, if I put my cursor inside of this
first paragraph here, come to my paragraph formats,
| | 01:34 | or come to your Paragraph palette - doesn't
matter - follow me in the right here.
| | 01:38 | I am going say Align to baseline grid.
| | 01:40 | You click on Align to baseline grid.
| | 01:43 | Take a look what happens here.
| | 01:44 | It's going to align it.
| | 01:45 | Now it's kind of almost imperceptible here, but the text
actually is a little bit more spread out than it should be.
| | 01:52 | It's a little bit more than the leading value of the text
| | 01:54 | because this text is a little bit smaller.
| | 01:56 | So what we can do instead is we can actually align it
to a baseline grid that's set for this text frame only.
| | 02:02 | Now I'm going to turn off that Align to baseline grid.
| | 02:04 | Click on Do not align.
| | 02:06 | And we're going to set this for this dialog - this text frame.
| | 02:10 | Come up to the Object menu with your cursor in the text frame.
| | 02:15 | Come down to Text Frame Options.
| | 02:16 | You'll notice the short cut down there.
| | 02:17 | Command-D, Control-D, Windows.
| | 02:20 | Let's open that up.
| | 02:21 | Something new in InDesign CS2 which is really
kind of nice is the Baseline Options setting.
| | 02:26 | Click Baseline Options.
| | 02:28 | Taking a look here, we can see Baseline Grid.
| | 02:30 | For any text frame you have selected, or if your cursor
is in a text frame, for that text frame it will affect it.
| | 02:35 | It will actually put in its own personal baseline grid.
| | 02:38 | Here's what we are going to do.
| | 02:40 | Move this dialog box out of the way a bit, grabbing it by the title bar.
| | 02:43 | I am going to turn on my Preview, lower left here, as always.
| | 02:47 | Turn on Preview.
| | 02:48 | And I'm going tell this text frame to Use a Custom Baseline Grid.
| | 02:51 | So click on Custom Baseline Grid and take a look.
| | 02:54 | I can see my own grid inside here.
| | 02:56 | Now what we've got to do is this.
| | 02:58 | If I take a look at the Layer Color here, we're actually going to change
the color of the grid itself, just so it looks a little different.
| | 03:03 | I'm going go to gold.
| | 03:05 | I usually pick something as horrible as I can, just so I can see it.
| | 03:08 | I have a hard time seeing these things.
| | 03:10 | If you take a look, its actually going to ask similar
things to the baseline grid for a document.
| | 03:14 | But this time it's relative it the text frame edges itself.
| | 03:17 | Look right here.
| | 03:18 | It says Relative to Top Inset.
| | 03:20 | Now take a look at that.
| | 03:21 | We can do Top of the Page itself, Top of
the Margin, or Top of the Frame altogether.
| | 03:26 | This text frame has an inset.
| | 03:27 | It recognized that.
| | 03:28 | If you take a look, it's insetting the text from all edges.
| | 03:31 | So it's saying relative to the top of the inset here.
| | 03:33 | Now if you take a look Increment Every is basically
saying this should be equal to your leading value.
| | 03:40 | Now one of the things that I always forget to
do and you'll probably wind up doing it too,
| | 03:43 | is I forget to look at the leading value for this text.
| | 03:46 | I am almost guarantee you it's going to be
12 point, but here's what we have to do.
| | 03:50 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 03:52 | Still there.
| | 03:53 | With my cursor in the text come up top to the Character Formats.
| | 03:57 | Take a look.
| | 03:57 | You can see that your leading value is 12 point.
| | 04:00 | So we're going to get back to the actual Baseline Grid Options.
| | 04:03 | With your cursor in there I'm going to do Command-B, Control-B on Windows.
| | 04:09 | Move the dialog box out of the way a bit here.
| | 04:11 | I can click on Baseline Options again.
| | 04:13 | If you take a look, we're going to make
the Increment Every equal to 12 point.
| | 04:17 | Just by typing in 12pt. The "pt" is actually very important in this case,
because we're telling it what the increment, or what the actual unit is.
| | 04:24 | If I click inside of another field here
or hit Tab, it will convert it for me.
| | 04:27 | It looks like we actually had already.
| | 04:29 | So that's kind of nice.
| | 04:30 | So what we're going to do is we're going to click OK.
| | 04:34 | That set our baseline grid inside of the text frame.
| | 04:36 | The next thing we've got to do is we actually
have to change the text to lock it to the grid.
| | 04:39 | With your cursor selected, basically inside of the text,
come to your Paragraph Format or Paragraph palette.
| | 04:46 | Follow me in the right here. I'm going to see Align to baseline grid.
| | 04:48 | Click Align to baseline grid.
| | 04:50 | It should snap it to the grid itself.
| | 04:52 | Now, we've got to make all of the text inside of here do that.
| | 04:55 | So, I set up a paragraph style for this
so it's kind of nice and easy to do.
| | 04:59 | Otherwise you're going to select all the text
at once and tell it to Align to baseline grid.
| | 05:03 | Take a look at your Paragraph Styles in the side.
| | 05:05 | You can see that we've got sidebar.
| | 05:06 | The plus is telling me that something's different.
| | 05:09 | It's actually aligning to the baseline grid.
| | 05:11 | And what I'm going to do is come up here to
the actual Paragraph Styles menu and Save.
| | 05:14 | Redefine this Style, using the new Align to baseline grid.
| | 05:18 | All of my text, then, should align to the baseline grid nice and neat.
| | 05:22 | Now like I said, this is for individual text frame.
| | 05:25 | You could do it for any text frames.
| | 05:26 | It's great for side bars, all sorts of pieces you're working on.
| | 05:29 | If you didn't like the fact that it came
down a bit from the top, we can control that.
| | 05:34 | If I go back to my actual document Grid Settings, Command-B,
Control-B, come back to Baseline Options, I could tell it, right here
| | 05:43 | if you take a look, to Start at a different location.
| | 05:47 | If I increase this value and we take a look I can
tell it to start at a different location, like I said.
| | 05:51 | Pulling it down just a bit, I can actually see that it starts
just shy of the top right here, which actually looks pretty good.
| | 05:57 | So it's pulling the actual line down here, starting
it from the top inset, pulling it down just a bit.
| | 06:02 | Which is sort of nice to be able to do.
| | 06:04 | That looks a little bit better, I think.
| | 06:05 | All of our text is aligned to the grid.
| | 06:07 | We do have space after out here, which is
going to be affected by the grid itself.
| | 06:11 | But I'm okay with that.
| | 06:13 | Click OK to close Text Frame Options dialog box.
| | 06:16 | And we are basically ready to go.
| | 06:18 | You can save your file at this point and close it up, and we've just
finished talking about baseline grids inside of a single text frame.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Column guides| 00:00 | Now, another feature a lot of us like to do is when you're working
on an InDesign file and you want to go through and actually set
| | 00:05 | up several columns, multi-column document, that sort of thing,
let's say you're doing a magazine or something like that.
| | 00:11 | Now, a lot of times design is going to come into play.
| | 00:14 | You want to be able to work with documents.
| | 00:16 | So what I'm going to do is I'm just going to open up a brand new file here.
| | 00:18 | Go to File>New, Command-N, Control-N on Windows.
| | 00:22 | Take a look.
| | 00:22 | We're going to set up a Facing Page document.
| | 00:25 | Now, look down here, I've got my columns, so what I want
to do is we're going to start with just a 2 column page.
| | 00:28 | So I'm going to increase that number to 2.
| | 00:30 | And I want to change my gutter to .25.
| | 00:33 | That's kind of the standard gutter I use.
| | 00:34 | Now, you can use the arrows to the left here, or
like anything else, if you click on the tag here,
| | 00:39 | you can select the text using your arrow keys or typing the value.
| | 00:43 | Arrow key up will increase the value.
| | 00:44 | My arrow key down will decrease the value.
| | 00:47 | Another feature we can do here, which is a great time saver, if
you ever use these little things right here, these little arrows,
| | 00:52 | just to be able to change the values, you know that it
goes really painfully slow sometimes, in small increments.
| | 00:58 | If you hold your Shift key down in any dialogue
box and you click, it will jump further, faster.
| | 01:03 | So it's going by quarter inches with my Shift key held down here.
| | 01:07 | Set the gutter to .25, number of columns to 2, and let's click
OK to get this document on here with the 2 column document.
| | 01:16 | Taking a look at the page, I can see that InDesign automatically balances
the columns, which basically means that when we set columns on the page,
| | 01:24 | it just looks within our margin guides up top here, and on the left,
all the way around the page here and basically splits it all up.
| | 01:30 | So if I say 2 columns, I've got 2 equal columns out here.
| | 01:33 | Now, what I want to do is I want to set up 2 unbalanced columns.
| | 01:37 | To do that, I can either do it on this page, which,
if we look at the Pages palette on the right,
| | 01:42 | I can see that I've got only 1 page in the document.
| | 01:44 | Or if we want to apply it to every page, I can do it on my Master.
| | 01:47 | We're going to do it just on this page just to show you how it works.
| | 01:50 | So what I want to do is first of all, if you take a look out here,
| | 01:53 | your column guides themselves are completely
locked, I can't touch them, by default.
| | 01:57 | I'm going to right-click on my page here.
| | 01:59 | Now, for those of you with a one-button mouse, which is
some Mac users, I'll show you that in just a second here.
| | 02:04 | I'm going to come up to Grids and Guides, take
a look, I will actually see Lock Column Guides.
| | 02:09 | With a check-mark, it is locking.
| | 02:11 | Click on it, it will turn off the locking.
| | 02:13 | Now, if you have a one-button mouse, which I have at home, come under
View, come down to Grids and Guides, you will see Lock Column Guides.
| | 02:21 | Now, with that turned off, we have the
ability to click and drag our column guides.
| | 02:26 | This allows us to create unbalanced columns,
which is kind of a nice little feature.
| | 02:31 | Now, what I want to do is, I want to set it off on the right here.
| | 02:34 | I want to get it somewhere around 5 inches or so.
| | 02:36 | So we just barely have it unbalanced.
| | 02:39 | The thing is, as I move the columns here, if I look
at my Control palette up top, I will see a position.
| | 02:44 | So if I move this across, I'll see a position.
| | 02:46 | I want to hit a measurement on the ruler here.
| | 02:49 | If I hold my Shift key down while I move this, just like
guides, it will actually snap to the ruler measurements.
| | 02:54 | Now, basically what's going to happen here is this:
| | 02:56 | It's going to look where my cursor is, my double arrows
down there, and that's how it's going to snap to it.
| | 03:01 | So, for instance, if I want the left edge
here to snap at 5 inches, let's say,
| | 03:05 | I'm going to come to the left edge, Shift key down, click and drag.
| | 03:10 | Right when that line gets above on the ruler at 5
inches, I can let go of my mouse, let go of the key,
| | 03:15 | and I have unbalanced columns, I've got a 5 inch column right here.
| | 03:18 | This takes the remaining part of it.
| | 03:21 | That way when we flow text on the page, like we're going
to see actually later on, we can see that we can flow text.
| | 03:26 | It will put the text frame and make it as a
column here, the width of the column outside.
| | 03:31 | Now, if you want to, you can do it on your master page.
| | 03:34 | We have a facing page document.
| | 03:36 | So if I come to my Pages palette, double click on A-Master
right here, that should open up our pages out there,
| | 03:41 | take a look, we actually have the 2 columns sitting out here.
| | 03:44 | Now, I did it on the first page, which
means the master doesn't do anything to it.
| | 03:48 | But if you wanted to do it on a master page, you could as well.
| | 03:51 | These column guides are completely unlocked.
| | 03:53 | I can hold down a Shift key as well, snap those
in, and basically move these together as well.
| | 03:58 | So if I wanted to go to 5 inches, Shift key down, click and drag.
| | 04:01 | As long as they are unlocked, I can go to 5 inches on both sides.
| | 04:04 | That way, every page will allow me to
have column guides that are unbalanced.
| | 04:08 | And you can do them separately, if you want to.
| | 04:10 | So I could have this page do a little differently.
| | 04:12 | So that way they both look a little different.
| | 04:14 | Either way, you can get those to work.
| | 04:16 | That's utilizing column guides.
| | 04:18 | Usually when you set them, you want to lock them back in place.
| | 04:21 | So either coming under View>Grids and Guides, or
right-clicking, you can see Lock Column Guides.
| | 04:28 | Once I lock these, take a look, they should be locked on my page.
| | 04:31 | I should not be able to select them.
| | 04:33 | So using unbalanced columns is great when you want to be
able to set up text and place it out there pretty quickly
| | 04:38 | and easily, not having to change the text frames themselves.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Guide preferences| 00:00 | Now, since we've been working with a lot of
guides and column guides and that sort of thing,
| | 00:04 | I want to show you a few preference settings that I
utilize to kind of make your life a little bit easier.
| | 00:09 | Takes us through things a little bit further.
| | 00:11 | So we're going to go to some preferences, but first and foremost, what I'd
like to do is open up the document here in your example files folder.
| | 00:18 | Inside the Chapter 2 folder you should see the
"brochure_baseline.indd" file.
| | 00:22 | Now, throughout this whole chapter here we've been using this file.
| | 00:26 | What I would like to do is, go to the first page of the document,
take a look at the Pages palette; I am on the first page.
| | 00:31 | We're going to use this to do some alignments
using guides, that sort of thing.
| | 00:35 | Now, what I'd like to do is set a guide in the page.
| | 00:36 | If we take a look we've got "JAVACO COFFEE
COMPANION." I want to line that stuff up.
| | 00:40 | There's a couple of ways we can do this; I can
use my alignment methods or we can set a guide.
| | 00:44 | We're going to use a guide.
| | 00:45 | Come up to the top of your page, click and drag a guide out.
| | 00:47 | I'm going to set it just above this information here.
| | 00:50 | What I'd like to do is: we're going to align both these up.
| | 00:53 | I'm going to zoom in so we can see what
we are doing - Command-Spacebar, Mac,
| | 00:57 | Control-Spacebar, Windows, gets us our Zoom
tool - click, drag across. Lets get up in there.
| | 01:02 | What I want to do is move "COFFEE COMPANION" now, so if you look at
"COFFEE COMPANION," I've got my black arrow selected, my Selection tool.
| | 01:08 | I'm going to click on it to see my test frame.
| | 01:11 | One thing about guides is this: if you move
an object and it gets anywhere near a guide,
| | 01:15 | once it comes kind of close to it, you'll feel it kind of snap in there.
| | 01:18 | Now, sometimes that drives me crazy, cause you know,
you may have wanted to move something just a little bit.
| | 01:23 | Now I can use my arrow keys up and down, that sort of
thing, to move objects and it will not snap in the guide.
| | 01:28 | That's fine, but if I just want to drag
it, kind of run into some things here.
| | 01:33 | So let's talk a little bit about some guide preferences.
| | 01:36 | To do that, on the Mac we're going to come under InDesign in the
menus, on Windows we're coming under Edit menu, come to Preferences,
| | 01:44 | let's come right to Guides and Pasteboard, open that up.
| | 01:47 | If you look inside of here you can see several preferences we can utilize.
| | 01:50 | First of all you can set the Color for any guide -
Column guides, Margin guides, whatever you want.
| | 01:55 | I immediately attack these, because sometimes it's
hard for me to differentiate between guides.
| | 01:59 | If you look right here we've got the Magenta and Violet, I don't
particularly care for those, but you know, it's something you get used to.
| | 02:05 | So the Bleed is great, it's red, you can see it.
| | 02:08 | Preview Background, I always change this.
| | 02:11 | If you look right here it says Light Gray.
Hopefully you all know what the preview is.
| | 02:14 | Preview is, if you look at your toolbox on the left here, Preview
is clicking the Preview button down here and it does three things:
| | 02:20 | it basically hides your pasteboard, cuts off the actual
bleed, hides any guides, column guides, any margin guides,
| | 02:26 | any of that, as well as hides your hidden characters when you type stuff.
| | 02:31 | What I usually do if I do a background color for my
preview I usually set it to about 50% gray.
| | 02:36 | That way it makes it a little bit easier to see, and for color
managing purposes, that can be a little bit nicer too.
| | 02:41 | If I come to Custom down at the bottom here -
I apologize if it's coming at the very bottom.
| | 02:46 | Clicking on Custom will allow me set a gray;
by default it's set to 50% gray.
| | 02:51 | So if I just click OK and take a look, I now have my 50% gray.
| | 02:55 | When I enter Preview mode it's going to cut off
everything outside the page and utilize that color.
| | 03:01 | So this is just some nice color things you can do with your guides.
| | 03:04 | Some other things you can do: if you look right here, your Snap to Zone.
| | 03:07 | This is a favorite of mine, because sometimes when you are moving things
it's kind of rough to get it to move when it keeps snapping to guides.
| | 03:14 | This right here is a pixel value.
| | 03:16 | I used to wonder why, but everything on your
screen is basically pixels for the most part.
| | 03:20 | So if you want to actually make it to where you can drag something and
get closer to the guide without it pulling in, you can lower this value.
| | 03:27 | With the value selected you can type in another number,
I'll say 2 pixels, I kind of like that value a little bit.
| | 03:32 | That way I can get a little bit closer and when
I'm 2 pixels away it will snap to the guide.
| | 03:37 | Another feature we have in here is Guide
to Back, or Guides in the Back rather.
| | 03:41 | This is a nice one, sometimes your guides get in the way.
| | 03:44 | We can hide guides, that great, it's fine,
but you can also put your guides to the back.
| | 03:48 | That puts it behind all your content which is sort of a nice thing.
| | 03:51 | So if I do my Snap to Zone to 2, set Guides to Back, click
OK. Actually, you know what, one thing before we do this.
| | 03:58 | This is something I always run into.
| | 04:00 | If you hold down your Option key, Alt on Windows, you're
going to notice your Cancel button turn to Reset.
| | 04:07 | A lot of Adobe apps do this sort thing.
| | 04:09 | What it allows you to do, if you set some
preferences in here and you decide, you know what,
| | 04:13 | I want to the go back to the way they were,
holding down Option on Mac or Alt on Windows,
| | 04:18 | if I click Reset, it will take it back
to the last saved preference settings.
| | 04:22 | I do use that once in a while.
| | 04:24 | It's kind of a nice little feature.
| | 04:26 | So,sorry about that, let's get back in here.
| | 04:27 | Let's click OK; we're going to set that up.
| | 04:30 | If I look all of my guides are basically behind everything.
| | 04:33 | To kind of prove this to you, I'm going to move some objects out here.
| | 04:36 | I'm going to grab this image right here, just move out of the way.
| | 04:40 | Take a look, there are all my guides sitting behind everything.
| | 04:42 | So I'm going to undo that, Edit>Undo, Command-Z, Control-Z, now what I can
do if I grab another object and I move it, it will snap to the guides.
| | 04:51 | And the way I can tell is that little white arrow
shows up when I snap to a guide, which is kind nice.
| | 04:56 | Something else that is really kind of nice is, if you want to move an
object and you want to snap it to a guide in the center of the object,
| | 05:02 | don't forget if you go under View, with all of your frame
edges showing, if you take a look under Show Frame Edges,
| | 05:08 | as long as these are showing, if I select
an object and I can see its center point,
| | 05:13 | I can select the center point, move an
object, and I can snap that to a guide.
| | 05:17 | I can see a white arrow right there.
| | 05:19 | Earlier, in some of the lessons we went
through, talking about grid and guide placement
| | 05:23 | when we did all the guides and everything, and I showed you how to do a
centering guide, vertical and horizontal, this is a great way to
| | 05:29 | center objects on the page. Just grab it by it's center
icon right there, the little center button,
| | 05:33 | click and drag and it will snap to the guide itself.
| | 05:36 | So these are just some nice features that
you can utilize when working with guides.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Time Saving FeaturesLibraries| 00:00 | In this chapter we are going to discuss time saving features.
| | 00:03 | This includes things like libraries, snippets, object styles,
all sorts of stuff that just make our life easier inside InDesign
| | 00:09 | and also so we can make it so we can work
faster and smarter inside of here.
| | 00:13 | Now, once again I have a file open here, once again
you will find this file in the example files folder
| | 00:19 | in the Chapter 3 folder, it's called "postcard_announce.indd."
| | 00:22 | If you open this file, some of you may get a dialogue box
that's talking about missing or modified images or graphics.
| | 00:29 | You can go through and actually just fix
those for yourself. That will be fine.
| | 00:33 | Also, if these are available, if you are actually using or have the Premium
subscription and on the CD-ROM, if you are a monthly or annual subscriber.
| | 00:41 | If you don't have access to these files,
you can watch, you can use your own.
| | 00:45 | If you want to follow along and use my files, I would suggest actually
going up to the Premium subscription or purchasing the CD-ROM itself.
| | 00:52 | So once again with "postcard_announce" open, let's talk about libraries.
| | 00:56 | Libraries are a great way for us to be able to save things.
| | 00:59 | It's kind of like a Copy>Paste that's virtual.
| | 01:03 | Okay, a Copy>Paste you can save forever.
| | 01:05 | For instance, things like colors, like
headers, footers, logos, that sort of thing.
| | 01:10 | If you are going to use it again and again in a document
you can create a library to actually save those things.
| | 01:14 | Library file is just a file that sits on your desktop
or wherever you want to the save it for that matter.
| | 01:19 | To create one, we are going to go up to
File and create a brand new library.
| | 01:23 | So let's get started.
| | 01:23 | I'm going to come up to File, come to
New, you will see Library inside of here.
| | 01:29 | Now, you can make as many libraries as you want.
| | 01:31 | Your libraries are going to sit wherever want, I can save
them on a network, I can save them wherever I want to go.
| | 01:36 | And you give it a name according to whatever you want to have it.
| | 01:39 | I'm going to call mine "brian."
| | 01:40 | I'm going to go ahead and save that on my desktop.
| | 01:43 | Why don't you go ahead and save yours on your desktop.
| | 01:45 | What it will do is open a palette for
us, this is called your Library palette.
| | 01:49 | And here's what I want do, I'm just going to show you on your
desktop what it creates just to give you a sense for what this is.
| | 01:54 | This palette does not live with this document;
it's not tied in any shape or form to this document.
| | 01:59 | It lives aside from the document.
| | 02:01 | You can open and close it at your will.
| | 02:02 | Now if I go to my desktop just to show you.
| | 02:05 | The icon might look a little different from Mac and Windows here.
| | 02:08 | I am on a Mac.
| | 02:08 | But if you take a look this is the library file generated.
| | 02:11 | It is an INDL extension; you can save
this across a network, wherever you want.
| | 02:16 | Only one person can open it up at a time.
| | 02:18 | So let me go back into InDesign right here and take a look.
| | 02:21 | To use a library you are going to drag things into it.
| | 02:24 | I'm going to, by the title bar up here -
I'm going to pull this around right here.
| | 02:27 | Let's say we want to do something like this.
| | 02:29 | Right down here I actually have some information that is copyright.
| | 02:31 | I might want to use it in several documents.
| | 02:34 | With my Selection tool I can select the object.
| | 02:36 | The whole idea behind a library is to just
drag the object or objects into the library.
| | 02:41 | So if I click and drag and come up to my
library I will see a plus with a hand.
| | 02:45 | If I let go I basically have a library item.
| | 02:48 | You can create as many library items as you want to.
| | 02:51 | I can drag as many things in here as I want.
| | 02:53 | One of the best things about this, if you take a look, you've
actually got a thumbnail over here, the thumbnail is untitled.
| | 02:58 | You can categorize these things or title them yourself.
| | 03:01 | To title them, so I can tell which one is which, double-click right on the
icon for the library item and it opens up an Item Information dialogue box.
| | 03:08 | Then I can give it a name.
| | 03:10 | I'll call this "copyright info."
| | 03:13 | The great thing to is, you can actually give it a category.
| | 03:18 | So you can see right here, you can categorize
things by Images, PDF's, Pages, Geometry, et cetera.
| | 03:24 | So there's a lot things you can do out here.
| | 03:25 | And this allows you later on to search by those
categories or view things in those categories only.
| | 03:31 | I can also apply Description to a library item.
| | 03:34 | This basically means that if I want to do a search, and there's
some great search functions in here, I can search by a description.
| | 03:39 | So if I click OK, I now have my copyright info.
| | 03:42 | One thing to watch out for with these, it only accepts
like, I think it's like six or seven characters in here.
| | 03:47 | If you go longer then that you're going to
get the dotted line or the dots right there.
| | 03:51 | So you just got to keep them a short name.
| | 03:53 | So if I want to use this again, let's say I decide to open up another
document, I'm going to open up another document just to give you an idea.
| | 03:59 | I can do it in this one or not, but I'll open up a brand new file here.
| | 04:02 | I just going to File>New.
| | 04:04 | If I want to use this again, you can open up a brand new document or
you can do it in the postcard, click on the library item, drag it out,
| | 04:13 | drop it on the page, you've just created a copy of that object.
| | 04:16 | So it's here forever for you to use, which is a great thing to do.
| | 04:20 | Alright, let me get back to the postcard.
| | 04:21 | I'm going to click back in the postcard right here.
| | 04:24 | Now, you can do single objects, you can also
do groups of objects, which is pretty nice.
| | 04:28 | Take a look at the upper left hand corner over here.
| | 04:30 | I am on the first page of this document here and
if you look I've got these boxes hanging out.
| | 04:35 | Now, when I used to do production way back when, I used to see this a lot.
| | 04:38 | People used to put boxes on the page and
I wonder why there are these color boxes.
| | 04:42 | These color boxes are great, because if you save swatches in this document,
save some colors, and let's say you need to get them to other documents.
| | 04:50 | You can actually apply the colors to swatches, to color cubes, just
boxes full of color, and I can take all these boxes I just created -
| | 04:58 | these are actually grouped together -
| | 05:00 | I can take all of these. If I drag all of these into the
library - I can drag a group of objects into the library -
| | 05:05 | if I let go in my library, I basically have those objects.
| | 05:09 | So if I double-click to name it, I can call it "pcardcolors," click OK.
| | 05:16 | Of course, I won't see the whole name in there
because it's truncated, but that's fine.
| | 05:20 | If I want to use those inside another document, what I can do is go
back to the document I had before, I come under Window I should be able
| | 05:26 | to see Untitled document I opened, click on that,
let's say I want to pull those swatches inside of here.
| | 05:33 | Grab my postcard swatches, like I said, these are just boxes filled with
color, drop them on the page anywhere and once I let go if I happen to look
| | 05:41 | at my Swatches palette, if I scroll down, what
I can see is all the colors are inside of here.
| | 05:47 | So this is a great way to move colors between documents.
| | 05:50 | And if I just want to get colors in here, I can just literally just
delete those color cubes, the boxes I drew and the colors stay behind.
| | 05:56 | Let's take a look, there they are.
| | 05:58 | So there's some great things we can do with libraries.
| | 06:00 | I'm going to go back to the postcard; I'm going to click back in the
postcard, something I need to kind of tell you about inside of here.
| | 06:07 | It has to do with images or graphics.
| | 06:09 | If you had images or graphics on a page and decide, hey I
want to the put those in my library, you can drag them in,
| | 06:14 | that's great, but you have to be aware of a few things.
| | 06:17 | What I'm going to do is come down to "JAVACO" right here.
| | 06:19 | This graphic down in the corner, this is just a simple EPS file.
| | 06:24 | I'm going to take this graphic; I'm going to drag it into my library.
| | 06:27 | Drop it in there.
| | 06:27 | What it does is, in your library it actually
names it according to what the file name is.
| | 06:33 | Now here is the only thing you have to consider.
| | 06:36 | If I drag this image, this graphic onto another page, let's say
I go back to the Untitled page, under Window and Untitled page - I'm
| | 06:43 | in another document here - I drag the image onto the page and let go.
| | 06:49 | You have to watch the links on these objects.
| | 06:51 | Here's how it works.
| | 06:53 | The link for this object right here will point back, let me
go back to postcard; will point back to the original image
| | 07:01 | and the original folder that this image is located in.
| | 07:04 | So in your library it is remembering the
link to that object, to that image itself.
| | 07:09 | So you have to be careful with these.
| | 07:11 | So if I had placed this "JAVACO" image from my desktop, let's say a
week ago, I dragged it into my library and a week from now I went
| | 07:19 | to that other document under Window here, Go to the other
document, I drag it onto the page, this graphic is going to try
| | 07:25 | and find the link to the original postcard graphic I used.
| | 07:29 | So if I moved it, I will have a broken link.
| | 07:32 | Now, one thing you can do to avoid this, is if you embed
an image, which is done through the Links palette -
| | 07:37 | we're going to talk about that most likely later on -
| | 07:40 | that allows you, once you drag it into your library -
| | 07:42 | if I drag that onto a page - it will embed
the image inside of the document itself.
| | 07:48 | So that way I don't have to worry about a link.
| | 07:51 | There's drawbacks to that of course.
| | 07:52 | So the whole moral of the story here is, with
your libraries you just have to be careful
| | 07:56 | with, when you drag images in there, just know there is a link attached.
| | 07:59 | You have to be careful about.
| | 08:00 | Other things you can do inside of here are to select multiple objects.
| | 08:03 | For instance, if I look down here I have the leaf
and bean text box as well as this text box here.
| | 08:08 | I can select both of these pretty easily just by dragging
across and take both of them and drop them into my library.
| | 08:15 | If I click and drag, dropping them into my library over here, letting go.
| | 08:18 | Wherever I let them go, it's going to place them inside of there.
| | 08:20 | I see it's called Untitled, now I can grab the corner of
this and basically open it to see all my objects in there.
| | 08:25 | Now, I can drag this onto a page and it basically
allows me to put both objects onto a page.
| | 08:31 | Now this is a 9 by 6 document.
| | 08:33 | If I were to look at my rulers, I'd see it's 9 by 6.
| | 08:36 | What I want to do is create a document that's 9 by 6.
| | 08:38 | Let's say we are going to create another postcard,
for instance, and I want to put these on the page
| | 08:42 | and put them on the same location as they are on this page.
| | 08:45 | Let's go ahead and create a brand new document,
so let's go up to File>New, come to Document,
| | 08:52 | pretend we're going to make ourselves a brand new postcard.
| | 08:54 | It's the same dimension, which was 6 by 9.
| | 08:56 | So width I'm going to do 9 inches, for height I'm going to do 6.
| | 08:59 | I'll talk to you about why we are doing this.
| | 09:02 | Facing Pages, turn it off.
| | 09:03 | That means we don't to have facing pages in
this document, just single pages, click OK.
| | 09:08 | Now watch. This is a nine by six document.
| | 09:13 | If you drag objects into the library, you can either drag and drop them on
the page from the library and place them wherever you want, that's fine.
| | 09:20 | Or you can use their own method here, watch this, I'm going to delete
these, hit Delete, from the library if I come to the Library palette menu
| | 09:28 | on the side here, I should see Add Items on
Page, Place Item(s), Delete Item(s), et cetera.
| | 09:33 | If I select a library item and click on Place Item(s), click and
let go, it will place it in the exact same position on the page.
| | 09:42 | Now if you had a different size page or a facing page document
when the postcard was not, it might do some weird things.
| | 09:48 | You just have to make sure it's the same page size and it
will position it perfectly for you, which is really nice.
| | 09:54 | Let's go back to postcard; I'm going to click back on postcard here.
| | 09:58 | There's other things you can do with the library as well.
| | 10:00 | If you look at the Library palette, you can view these in certain ways.
| | 10:04 | If I come to the Library palette menu, the arrow on the side out here,
| | 10:07 | take a look down here; you can also see your information as a List View.
| | 10:10 | Click on List View, this is kind of interesting.
| | 10:12 | It will actually show me a little graphic that kind
of tries to tell me what this thing is.
| | 10:16 | I can see things like images, EPS's and text files.
| | 10:20 | So sometimes it's a little bit easier and you can
see the whole name in this case, so it's kind of nice.
| | 10:25 | Now coming out to the Library menu again, on this side out here.
| | 10:28 | If you look at the Library menu, there's
a couple of things you can do here.
| | 10:31 | Add Items on Page and Add Items on Page as
Separate Objects is kind of interesting.
| | 10:35 | Add Items on Page lets you take the whole page, all the contents of
the page, I should say, and add them as a single item into your library.
| | 10:44 | Add Items on Page as Separate Objects literally says this: if
I decide I want to take all of these graphics, all this text,
| | 10:51 | et cetera, and I would like them all to be library items as
separate library items, that is what this option will do.
| | 10:57 | It will place them all in the library for me.
| | 10:59 | If I click Add Items on Page as Separate Objects and take a look, suddenly
I will see every item that was on the page is now inside my library.
| | 11:08 | Sometimes that can be a nice easy way to get all the objects
in there if you want to use them all on other pages as well.
| | 11:13 | Like I said before, other things we can do with the
libraries as well is I can select everything on the page.
| | 11:18 | If I go to Edit>Select All, or do a Command-A,
Control-A on Windows, to select all my items out here,
| | 11:24 | if I come out to the side and I say let's Add Item or Add Items on Page.
| | 11:29 | If I click Add Item right here - and take a
look - it will allow me to actually add an item.
| | 11:33 | Now, it's going to add everything on the page as one single library item.
| | 11:38 | Now I'm going to go back up to the menu here, so let's take a look.
| | 11:40 | I'm going to click on the menu; if I take a look
out here I'm going to go back to Thumbnail View.
| | 11:44 | Let's take a look, if I scroll down a bit I should
be able to see this one sitting right here.
| | 11:48 | This is my complete page including guides, et cetera.
| | 11:51 | So this is a way for you to take a whole
design and move it to another page.
| | 11:54 | The last thing I want to show you with
libraries is how to update a library item.
| | 11:58 | Say for instance that we have this information
right here, which is our leaf and bean information.
| | 12:02 | I get out to the page and I decide, you know what, I don't
want it to say leaf and bean, I want it to say leaf and beans.
| | 12:08 | I'll double-click in here so get my cursor
and just put an "s" in there and I decide
| | 12:13 | that looks a little bit better, but my
library item actually says leaf and bean.
| | 12:17 | What I want to do is update the library
item to reflect this, this change I've made.
| | 12:21 | So come on back to Selection arrow and let's select both of these
and I'm going to select both objects and that's important to do.
| | 12:28 | I want to the make sure the library item is selected.
| | 12:31 | Come back to your Library Item palette menu and what we
are going to be able to do is update this library item.
| | 12:36 | So you should see right here, you should be able to see Update Library
Item and I click on that and it's going to be sort of hard to tell in here,
| | 12:42 | they just added the "s" to the untitled library I had right here.
| | 12:46 | Just to prove this to you, I'm going to move over and drop it on the page.
| | 12:49 | Using my spacebar to get to my Hand tool, I'm going to move over,
I'm going to take the untitled library item, drop it on the page,
| | 12:56 | let it go, and you should be able to see the "s" show up.
| | 12:59 | It's a great way to update your library items.
| | 13:02 | Libraries can be used for all sorts of things and if
you also take a look at the Library palette over here,
| | 13:07 | you do have the ability to search on items;
I can also show you subsets et cetera.
| | 13:11 | As a matter of fact, clicking on the eyeglasses right here I can
see that I can Search the library, I can even give it Parameters
| | 13:17 | or if I go to More Choices I can tell to Match anything or nothing at all.
| | 13:21 | So, there are a lot of things you can do with a library.
| | 13:25 | I am going to Cancel out of this.
| | 13:26 | Libraries can contain as many things as you like. You
can open up the library as big as you like.
| | 13:30 | I can grab the corners down here.
| | 13:32 | I can delete library items. You can share libraries with people.
| | 13:35 | That's just a library file.
| | 13:36 | I can literally just Copy>Paste that to someone or e-mail them.
| | 13:39 | Always watching for my image links though.
| | 13:42 | So we seen a lot of different things we can do with libraries.
| | 13:44 | There's a lot of stuff that can happen with them and they're
a great way to be able pull information back and forth.
| | 13:49 | Not only can be pull colors, but we can pull
things like styles and all sorts of things.
| | 13:53 | So, we've taken just a quick look at the libraries out here.
| | 13:56 | In the next sections we are going to go through
and talk about some other time saving features.
| | 14:00 | You can take "postcard_announce" and close it
up, you don't have to save it, that's fine.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Snippets| 00:00 | Another time saving feature is to work with snippets.
| | 00:02 | Snippets are pieces of a page basically. They are sort of like a library
item, but you can take these objects either single pieces, single boxes,
| | 00:12 | single text frames or multiple objects, and save
them as a single file called a snippet file.
| | 00:17 | Now to do this we're going to select the
items we want to save as a snippet.
| | 00:21 | This allows us to open them in multiple documents
or place them in multiple files.
| | 00:25 | Go to your sample files folder, Chapter 3 folder and you should see the
"postcard_announce" file, we're going to go to page 2 inside of that.
| | 00:32 | In the second page you should see some objects inside of here.
| | 00:34 | A picture and some description text inside of here.
| | 00:37 | I realize the description text isn't very descriptive, but there it is.
| | 00:40 | Let's select these two, I'm going to click and drag across. To get yourself
a snippet or save a piece of this, save it as a snippet file, we're going
| | 00:47 | to go to File>Export, the Export option here
allows us to name it and tell it where to go.
| | 00:53 | If you take a look, we're going to call this "picw
descrip." Now I've already had that set in there -
| | 00:58 | we'll take a look at "picwdescrip."
| | 00:59 | Usually it names it either according to the file or
the folder you were in last, that sort of thing.
| | 01:04 | Under Format, what we want to do is we want to choose InDesign Snippet.
| | 01:08 | Now, Format is on a Mac, Save as Type is Windows.
| | 01:11 | So let's come under there, you should see InDesign Snippet. The key here
is you have to have something selected to see InDesign Snippet.
| | 01:17 | Let's go ahead and save it on our desktop.
| | 01:20 | I want to show you what it looks like, what it did.
| | 01:22 | I'm going to go out to my desktop just to give you an idea.
| | 01:25 | This is what the InDesign snippet looks like.
| | 01:26 | The icon is going to be similar on a Windows machine,
the same concept here.
| | 01:31 | "Picwdescrip," .inds is the extension. This is
technically an XML file, it's kind of interesting.
| | 01:36 | It's actually saving just the pieces of the page you want.
| | 01:38 | Now to use this - I'm going to get back into InDesign.
| | 01:41 | If we want to use this out on our page, or in another
document we can go to File>Place,
| | 01:48 | I'll go out to my desktop, and select the InDesign snippet. If you take
a look, you can turn on or off Show Import Options - it doesn't matter.
| | 01:56 | There is no import options for snippet, click Open. If
you take a look, this is kind of something interesting.
| | 02:03 | What is does, is it tries to put it in exact same
position as it was before, which is actually kind of nice.
| | 02:09 | If you place it on another postcard or something
like that, it will be in the same position every time.
| | 02:14 | You can always move it.
| | 02:15 | So I'm going to click on these two objects
here - select them both with the Shift key.
| | 02:18 | I'm going to move them down. If you take a look, I now
have an exact duplicate of the object I had before.
| | 02:24 | Now, a couple things to do here, that's one way to be able to create this.
| | 02:27 | Another way to create a snippet is a little bit more interesting.
| | 02:31 | It's using the ability to drag objects.
| | 02:34 | Now I'm going to select both of these
again, I'm going to show you another way.
| | 02:37 | We're going to make a copy, but that's fine.
| | 02:38 | So I'm going to select both these objects.
| | 02:41 | To make a snippet, you can either do this: you can drag it directly
to a folder or your desktop, and it will create a snippet,
| | 02:47 | or one of the more way optimal ways is to drag it to Adobe Bridge.
| | 02:52 | So to open up Adobe Bridge, now remember Adobe Bridge is
a separate application it comes with InDesign CS2 only.
| | 02:58 | Okay, so if you have earlier version you don't get this thing.
| | 03:01 | If you come under File and come to Browse, this will launch Adobe Bridge.
| | 03:05 | Now, I already have Adobe Bridge open, this maybe a good time for
you to pause the movie and wait for it to actually happen here.
| | 03:11 | So once Adobe Bridge is open, here's what we will do.
| | 03:15 | I'm going to drag and drop directly in there.
| | 03:17 | Now, on a Windows machine it's going to be a little different here.
| | 03:19 | You've got to be able to see your page as well as Adobe Bridge.
| | 03:22 | So I'm going to come back here.
| | 03:23 | I'm going to take my page and minimize it a bit.
| | 03:27 | Grabbing the corner, I should be able to see my
content still in here as well as see the bridge behind.
| | 03:32 | As I said, on a Windows machine you have to
get the bridge open, kind of floating above.
| | 03:36 | What I want to do is, I'm actually going to
grab my objects here and drag them across.
| | 03:41 | You could either let them go on the desktop and it will
create a snippet, or put them directly in the bridge.
| | 03:46 | The bridge is just a way to organize files, that's all it is.
| | 03:49 | So if I drag and drop inside of here, I know we've already got one out
there, but if I drag and drop one, it's going to place it in the bridge
| | 03:54 | and even place it, if you look out here look
at my desktop, place it out on my desktop here.
| | 03:59 | So I should be able to see the extra snippet I've created.
| | 04:02 | Dragging and dropping as well as getting an
export will allow you to create a snippet.
| | 04:06 | I can now come up here and actually open this up and rename it.
| | 04:11 | I'll call this "picwdescrip2," and there we go.
| | 04:16 | We got a second snippet.
| | 04:18 | Let me get back over to InDesign here and take a look.
| | 04:21 | I'm going to get my page back out here, pull it open a bit.
| | 04:25 | Snippets can be used for all sorts of things.
| | 04:27 | They are really great.
| | 04:27 | You are not going to update these things.
| | 04:29 | They are just meant to be used; they are sort of
like a Copy>Paste, but a permanent Copy>Paste.
| | 04:33 | The one thing you have to watch out for with
these though, just like anything else especially
| | 04:36 | with library items like those, your links are permanent.
| | 04:39 | Meaning, if you have a link to a picture from this
postcard file, if I make a snippet out of it,
| | 04:44 | that snippet it going to preserve the link inside of it.
| | 04:47 | So it's going to have at the point back to the original picture.
| | 04:49 | So if you move it, you're going to have
a broken link when you use a snippet.
| | 04:53 | One way to get around that is if you actually,
if you really want that picture,
| | 04:57 | you can embed that picture inside the file using the Links palette.
| | 05:00 | So if I come up to Window, if I come down the Links, take a look.
| | 05:05 | In the Links palette I can see my picture right here.
| | 05:09 | If you really want to the keep this picture and have it go
from document to document without having to worry about a link,
| | 05:13 | I can come out to the palette menu out here
and I should be able to see and Embed File.
| | 05:17 | If I click Embed File it is going to embed this picture inside the InDesign
document here, but if I create a snippet out of these two pieces now
| | 05:25 | and I drag that snippet into another document or this
one, it will embed the picture in that new document.
| | 05:31 | So it basically kind of travels with it.
| | 05:34 | Now if you don't want to embed pictures - embed pictures is getting rid
| | 05:36 | of the link; it is actually adding the file
size to the InDesign file when you drag it,
| | 05:40 | so you do have to be careful of that -
| | 05:42 | you can always un-embed it once you drag the snippet out.
| | 05:46 | Let me close up my Links palette.
| | 05:47 | That's just one way if you really want to keep that picture.
| | 05:49 | Another way to do it is this, if you set up your content here, you can
actually with your white arrow, which is your Direct Selection tool,
| | 05:57 | I can get rid of the picture itself and just keep the picture frame.
| | 06:00 | That way you've got the container there, but
you can just drag another picture in there.
| | 06:04 | So if I click on the picture inside of here and hit Delete - I know
it's kind of hard to see, because I don't see my frame edges.
| | 06:10 | If I come under View - you probably don't see them either -
| | 06:13 | take a look out here - we're going to see Show Frame Edges.
| | 06:17 | You'll actually see that I have the frame
there still; it's just a place holder.
| | 06:20 | So next time if I want to use this snippet, I can drag
both pieces out as a snippet, place them in here
| | 06:26 | or actually drag them in and I've got myself a snippet ready to go.
| | 06:30 | So we can either do an Export or a File>Place.
| | 06:32 | It's really kind of a nice thing to do there.
| | 06:34 | So those are snippets.
| | 06:35 | There are a lot of things we can do with them.
| | 06:37 | I suggest using trying to use them, because you
can use these across different projects, especially
| | 06:41 | when you want to use footers or headers, or things of that nature.
| | 06:45 | We can take "postcard_announce," you can
close this up; you do not need to save this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Object styles| 00:00 | Next, I'd like to discuss object styles and how they relate to InDesign.
| | 00:03 | Forever and a day when I worked with this program basically I had a lot of
different things I wanted to do, like set text frames with drop shadows
| | 00:10 | and have colored boxes and all sorts of stuff inside of here.
| | 00:14 | To do that, though, I'd have to select a whole bunch of text frames and do
it once or I'd have to go out and try to use my eyedropper to sample things
| | 00:21 | or even just duplicate things I've already been doing.
| | 00:24 | As far as putting drop shadows on objects.
| | 00:26 | These days in InDesign we can utilize something called Object Styles.
| | 00:29 | From your sample files folder in Chapter
3, let's open up "postcard_announce.indd."
| | 00:34 | This is the same file we have been using, I
just asked you not to save it the last time.
| | 00:38 | Come to page 2; the second page actually has all
this content on it and let's talk about this.
| | 00:43 | Now, when you start working with a file inside of InDesign, there
are some basic defaults, some basic standards that are set inside.
| | 00:49 | For instance, if we go to our Type tool, take your Type tool;
let's draw a little box in the frame page to just get an idea here.
| | 00:56 | I'm going to click and draw myself a little text frame.
| | 00:58 | If I come up and I just, let's say I type in "hey" or something like that.
| | 01:03 | I come to my black arrow and select the frame itself;
it's doing the formatting I had done last time, that's fine.
| | 01:09 | But with the frame itself selected, if you
take a look over at the right hand side at
| | 01:12 | your Object Styles palette - if you don't see it, it's
probably hidden in the side, collapsed on the side.
| | 01:17 | So go ahead and click on it to open it up.
| | 01:19 | And you'll notice it says Basic Text Frame with a "T" in a box over here.
| | 01:23 | Now, every time you create a text frame, it's
going to look like this thing you see here,
| | 01:27 | which basically has no stroke, no fill, no drop shadow, nothing like that.
| | 01:31 | This object style here called Basic Text Frame dictates how
every text frame is going to look when you first create one.
| | 01:38 | Basic Graphics Frame does the same thing.
| | 01:40 | When you create a graphics frame it's always going to have things like a
stroke on it, that sort of thing, no drop shadow, that sort of thing.
| | 01:48 | None basically says just put no formatting on it.
| | 01:52 | So these are some basic, basic standards that we can work with.
| | 01:55 | Now, we can change these if we want to.
| | 01:57 | If we decide every text frame needs to have a white
fill for instance, for some reason, you can do that.
| | 02:02 | You could change the actual formulation right here.
| | 02:04 | For instance, let's say I want to the put some kind
of color in every single one of my text frames.
| | 02:10 | I'm going to deselect everything out here, I can
do Command-Shift-A, Control-Shift-A on Windows.
| | 02:16 | If I come over here to my basic text frame,
if you double-click on it you can open it up.
| | 02:20 | It'll actually show us all the formatting here.
| | 02:23 | If I look inside of here, I'll be able to see all
the categories that are associated with a text frame.
| | 02:28 | For instance, if you come to fill, click on fill right
here, I'll be able to see that I have a fill color.
| | 02:33 | Now, if you - just for the sake of an argument here - wanted
every text frame you created to actually have a white fill.
| | 02:39 | I could choose Paper.
| | 02:40 | Let's say I wanted to do something like a blue fill, we have a PANTONE
inside of here, I click on PANTONE, I'm going to click OK
| | 02:47 | and that's going to assign that color to this text frame.
| | 02:49 | So every time I draw basic text frame, take a look out here.
| | 02:52 | Every text frame I draw, if you come to
your Type tool, click and drag on the page,
| | 02:57 | you're going to notice that every text frame you
create is going to have now a blue background.
| | 03:01 | So these are just sorts of things you can do.
| | 03:02 | It's really kind of nice if you have to create a document
that has all the same formatting for the most part.
| | 03:08 | Now, take a look over here in my Object Styles palette.
| | 03:10 | You're going to notice a couple things interesting here that have happened.
| | 03:13 | If you take a look you're going to see a
T with a box and then this box right here.
| | 03:18 | This is really kind of interesting.
| | 03:19 | We'll hover over it and you'll see a little tool tip,
it says "Indicate style applied to new graphic objects."
| | 03:24 | This little box with a T in it represents every text frame I create.
| | 03:28 | This little box right here should be on Basic Text Frame.
| | 03:31 | When we doubled-clicked, it actually moved our basic graphic
object's icon to the Basic Text Frame. And what that means is,
| | 03:38 | if I see this icon on the Basic Text Frame
object style and I create let's say a,
| | 03:44 | come over here to my Rectangle tool for instance and create myself a shape.
| | 03:46 | Let's say I do that.
| | 03:47 | It's going to take the Basic Text Frame's formatting.
| | 03:51 | Now, these little icons can be moved around.
| | 03:53 | So if you decided that every graphic frame you create just
needs to have a stroke on it, or the Basic Text Frame look,
| | 03:59 | I can grab this little icon and move it to
the object style I want it to be a part of.
| | 04:03 | These can move anywhere you want to.
| | 04:05 | That means if you create an object style that's got,
let's say, a drop shadow and some really cool stuff,
| | 04:09 | I can say, "Every text frame let's use that object style."
| | 04:12 | I just drag this little icon right here
to the object style I want to use it on.
| | 04:17 | All right, now that I've made a complete mess of the
page here, I'm going to get rid of these text frames.
| | 04:20 | I'm going to go back to my Selection tool, I'm going
to select each one of these and get rid of them.
| | 04:24 | I'm going to delete them after selecting them with the Shift key.
| | 04:26 | Now, let's talk about this text frame.
| | 04:28 | Suppose, suppose, suppose, you'd like to take this text frame
and you want to use the same formatting over and over again.
| | 04:34 | I would probably format one, kind of get it set the way I want it.
| | 04:36 | And if you look over on the right-hand side
here, you're going to see Basic Text Frame with a plus,
| | 04:40 | the plus indicating that something is different; that's my override.
| | 04:43 | If you take a look below that, it's actually telling you
what the overrides are in the tool tips, if I hover over it.
| | 04:48 | Kind of interesting.
| | 04:49 | Here's what we are going to do.
| | 04:50 | We're going to create an object style.
| | 04:51 | Now, there are tons of ways to do this.
| | 04:55 | If you come down here you can see the page icon, with an object selected.
| | 04:58 | If I click on that page it's going to create a new object style.
| | 05:01 | What I want to do is, I'm going to double-click to name it right away.
| | 05:04 | By double-clicking on it, what I'm actually
going to do is apply it to this object.
| | 05:08 | It's kind of a sneaky little thing InDesign
does for us, but it's a good thing to do.
| | 05:12 | So let's actually call this "picdescrip," there we go.
| | 05:19 | If you take a look, these are all the categories it's assigning.
| | 05:23 | Now, I got a fill on this object.
| | 05:25 | If you click on Fill, fill in this is Paper.
| | 05:26 | Now, if I take a look I've actually got a stroke right here, the
stroke is actually black with a tint on it, there's a Stroke category.
| | 05:33 | So I have Corner Effects, we have Transparency.
| | 05:36 | If you look right here, Drop Shadows, it's kind of interesting.
| | 05:39 | Every category that has a check mark is applied.
| | 05:41 | It means there's something going on, you are
saying to do it or basically keep it a default.
| | 05:46 | If I click on this category Drop Shadow and Feather and take a
look, it picked up the drop shadow on the text frame inside of here.
| | 05:52 | You can see right here, it turned it on and set all
my settings according to what that text frame had.
| | 05:57 | This is actually pretty cool.
| | 05:58 | It's actually nice to be able to do.
| | 06:00 | So we're basically done.
| | 06:00 | I did it; we're going to click OK.
| | 06:02 | I'm going to Save it.
| | 06:03 | It's just picking up what we did with that text frame,
there it is, "picdescrip" and here is what we can do.
| | 06:08 | I'm going to come out here and create another text frame.
| | 06:10 | Select your Type tool from your toolbox; come right below that text frame.
| | 06:14 | We're going to draw ourselves a text frame below it about
the same size; we can get really crazy if we want to here.
| | 06:19 | You can see what it is doing now; it is
picking up my basic text frame formatting.
| | 06:23 | So it's really working for everything.
| | 06:25 | I'm just going to type in "Welcome," let's say.
| | 06:29 | Now, you can see the paint behind my text, because
the default in here got set with a different font.
| | 06:33 | Not going to worry about that right now.
| | 06:35 | What I want to do is I ultimately want to select the frame.
| | 06:37 | So come to your black arrow, click on the text frame itself.
| | 06:40 | I want to apply the "picdescrip" object style.
| | 06:42 | Now, there is something kind of neat here, if you take a look.
| | 06:44 | The Object Styles palette, just like regular old Paragraph
Styles, I can just click on the object style to apply it.
| | 06:50 | If you also look up top here in the Control
palette you can see Basic Text Frame.
| | 06:54 | You can apply it from here once it's created.
| | 06:57 | It doesn't matter where you do it from.
| | 06:58 | I'll click on "picdescrip" right here, click and let go, and if I
take a look, the formatting for the actual text frame is working.
| | 07:05 | You can see it, it's got the drop shadow, it's got
the stroke on it, it also has a text inset right here.
| | 07:10 | So I'm just about there.
| | 07:12 | Now the only thing is the actual text is not quite working for me.
| | 07:16 | So what I want to do is come back to this
text frame, go ahead and select it.
| | 07:19 | I'd like to open up the "picdescrip" here
really quick and show you a few things.
| | 07:23 | Double-click on the object style called "picdescrip"
and that will actually open up its definition.
| | 07:29 | Take a look inside of here, there are all sorts of things we can do.
| | 07:32 | These styles settings are just like, just showing you what's going on.
| | 07:35 | If I open these up it'll tell me what's going on right here.
| | 07:37 | Okay, so that's just basically your content.
| | 07:39 | I want to take a look on the left hand side and what we
are going to do is click on the Paragraph Styles area here,
| | 07:44 | take a look, and Object Style can actually
include formatting for the text.
| | 07:49 | It's really kind of intriguing.
| | 07:51 | If you look in here, if I turn on Paragraph Styles,
come over here, what's going to happen is this.
| | 07:56 | If I look at my text frame, I have two paragraph styles already set up.
| | 08:00 | We're going to look at that in a second.
| | 08:02 | I have one right here and one right below it.
| | 08:03 | I always know I'm going to have this headline
first and then this body kind of copy below it.
| | 08:09 | Now, normally what happens is this.
| | 08:11 | If you create yourself an object style you're kind of
hoping all the text in it is formatted the same way.
| | 08:17 | What you can do is, with the Object Style,
I can come over here to Paragraph Style
| | 08:20 | and just chose myself a paragraph style and
it will automatically apply it to the text.
| | 08:25 | Now, if you take a look in here, I actually
got sidebar paragraph styles already set up.
| | 08:29 | This is kind of a key if you want to the use this
feature, you've got to set up paragraph styles and text first.
| | 08:33 | I am going to say sidebar_title and what that
will do is, in my Object Style when I apply it,
| | 08:38 | all my text will have sidebar_title applied, which is kind of interesting.
| | 08:41 | So if I click on Preview right here and take a look, look what's
going on here - it's applying this paragraph style to all my text.
| | 08:47 | And here's what I'm going to do, I'm going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 08:49 | There's something else we're going to look at in just a second, click OK.
| | 08:54 | Take a look in here.
| | 08:54 | Here's what we are going to do: select your Type tool and I'm going to
come to this text inside of here, and what happened was it basically said,
| | 09:02 | all of our text, every paragraph is going to have this formatting applied.
| | 09:06 | That's not the way this looked at first.
| | 09:07 | If I put my cursor back in here and I say,
it just applied that formatting style, and
| | 09:12 | I don't want that, I want to the go back to another paragraph style.
| | 09:15 | Come back to your about Paragraph Styles palette on your right.
| | 09:17 | I'm going to apply sidebar_text, there's just a
style I've quickly created and here's what we can do.
| | 09:23 | The object style allows you to create what's
called like a header and then the body copy itself.
| | 09:27 | So you can apply two styles at once.
| | 09:29 | It's kind of interesting.
| | 09:31 | If you click inside a field to copy, you are
going to notice that sidebar_title is selected.
| | 09:35 | That's my paragraph style for the title.
| | 09:37 | We're going to open that up and I'm going to edit it really quick.
| | 09:38 | So double-click on sidebar_title.
| | 09:41 | Take a look inside of here, there's something
kind of interesting that we're going to see.
| | 09:44 | It says Next Style.
| | 09:46 | Now, this was set, normally it would say something like Same Style.
| | 09:50 | That just means if I'm typing out here and I apply
Paragraph Style - you probably already noticed this -
| | 09:55 | but every time you hit a return it applies the
same paragraph style to the next paragraph.
| | 09:59 | What we can do is, we say, you know what, when you hit a return
the next style is going to be something different.
| | 10:05 | Let's try sidebar_text, that's the text we just applied here.
| | 10:09 | So we just set this paragraph up here to apply this sidebar_text.
| | 10:12 | Now, if I click OK, there's our paragraph style.
| | 10:15 | Here's what we are going to do.
| | 10:16 | I want to the go back to the object style and I'm going
to give it a little command here and tell it what to do.
| | 10:20 | So come back here to Object Styles palette,
I'm going to select, with my black arrow,
| | 10:25 | my text frame; you always have to have something selected here.
| | 10:29 | Now, you'll notice you're going to see a plus here, that's
fine. Let's just open up the description right here.
| | 10:33 | Open up the description; come back to Paragraph Styles over here.
| | 10:37 | Take a look, we're going to edit this.
| | 10:39 | What it's going to do is this: the first text it comes
across in this text frame is going to apply sidebar_title.
| | 10:45 | What I want it to do is I want it to follow the command we just
put in sidebar_title called Apply Next Style.
| | 10:50 | So you can tell it, "You know what, when you look in side-
bar_title, look at the command called Next Style and apply it."
| | 10:57 | That's what it's doing for us.
| | 10:59 | So if I click OK right now, take a look,
watch what is going to happen here.
| | 11:05 | Text tool, come down to the second frame right here.
| | 11:07 | What I'm going to double-click to get my Text tool.
| | 11:09 | Before, if I just hit return, it would actually go
to the same paragraph style, but if I hit return
| | 11:14 | and I start typing here, look what it's doing for me.
| | 11:18 | It's applying that next style, it's saying, okay for this
text frame, for any text frame with this object style applied
| | 11:24 | when you hit return, follow the command that's
in this paragraph style called Next Style.
| | 11:29 | This is a great way to set up things like bios for people,
set up informational content like this sort of thing,
| | 11:36 | so object styles can be used for all sorts of things.
| | 11:39 | If you take a look with your black arrow
and you still have the text frame selected.
| | 11:43 | You can create as many object styles as you like.
| | 11:46 | If for instance you come to an object, let's
say you come to this text frame right here.
| | 11:49 | I decide you know what, this one doesn't need a drop shadow on it.
| | 11:54 | What I can do, is I can turn the drop shadow off.
| | 11:56 | Let me do that, I'm going to come to Object>Drop Shadow.
| | 12:00 | If you take a look, what we are going to do is turn the drop
shadow off, so inside of that dialogue box you should be able
| | 12:04 | to check off Drop Shadow, click OK; that should turn off the drop shadow.
| | 12:09 | Now, if you look at your Object Styles you should see a plus.
| | 12:11 | That's telling me something is different.
| | 12:12 | And if you look over here, click over it, you'll see Drop Shadow.
| | 12:17 | Now, with the plus, if I decide I don't want that formatting,
| | 12:20 | if you look right down at the bottom of the
palette down here, there's actually a slash.
| | 12:24 | This means clear, something called overrides, any pluses are overrides.
| | 12:27 | If I click on the slash right there it is going to remove
anything I did locally; anything I did out there.
| | 12:32 | So that's going to get it right back to where it was.
| | 12:35 | Now, on the flip side of that, if I wanted to the keep this formatting.
| | 12:38 | Let's say I decide to get rid of that drop shadow
again and a want to keep it and update this style.
| | 12:44 | Here is what we can do.
| | 12:45 | With it selected, come to Object>Drop Shadow,
this will allow us to turn off the drop shadow.
| | 12:52 | In the Drop Shadow menu deselect Drop Shadow, the check mark right there.
| | 12:56 | That will turn it off, click OK, close the dialogue box and now you'll
see a plus over in the right hand side in the Object Styles palette menu.
| | 13:04 | Now, if you look you'll see the plus and that's
basically telling me the drop shadow is different.
| | 13:08 | So here's what we'll do.
| | 13:09 | I'll tell InDesign to redefine that style based on this text frame.
| | 13:15 | So coming to Object Styles palette menu, you'll see Redesign Object Style.
| | 13:20 | Normally this works great, it just quickly redefines the style itself
and anything it uses will be redefined, it'll look differently.
| | 13:27 | Now, in case of utilizing the paragraph formatting,
go ahead and click, paragraph formatting.
| | 13:33 | Things are going to be a little different here.
| | 13:35 | What happens is it losing that formatting. If you
ever see something like this happen you've got to go back
| | 13:41 | in and make sure it's doing the paragraph formatting.
| | 13:43 | The information that's in the object style.
| | 13:45 | So come back to "picdescrip," double-click to open up the
Object Styles, take a look over at Paragraph Styles over here.
| | 13:52 | Like I said, everything else is assigned; it should be good.
| | 13:55 | If you look inside of here, suddenly it just
forgot what we did in the Paragraph Style stuff.
| | 13:59 | So what I'm going to do is just choose sidebar_title once
again and tell it to Apply sidebar_text as the Next Style.
| | 14:08 | Remember that was done inside the Paragraph Styles.
| | 14:10 | Go ahead and click OK to close the Object Styles
Options dialogue box and we should be back where we are.
| | 14:17 | Now, in the Object Styles menu, let's take a look over here.
| | 14:19 | Click on the Object Styles palette menu. If you take a
look there's all sorts of things we can do right here.
| | 14:24 | I can actually Break Link to Style; that literally says, take this
object that has the object style applied and just keep it on its own.
| | 14:31 | If I change the object style in the Object Styles palette,
don't update that object, don't change it for me.
| | 14:37 | There's also the ability to Load Object
Styles from other pages, from other documents.
| | 14:42 | I can get rid of All Unused, there's all
sorts of things we can do over here.
| | 14:45 | Even things like Deleting or Duplicating Object Styles.
| | 14:49 | Some really great things we can do with these.
| | 14:51 | Hopefully, this gives you a nice easy way to use them
and a great, great feel for what they can do for us.
| | 14:56 | So object styles are used like I said, for all sorts of objects.
| | 15:00 | Things being able to apply things like drop shadows, fills, strokes,
all that sort of things to files, to individual text frames,
| | 15:07 | even graphics frames even if you wanted to, for that matter.
| | 15:10 | So in this case object styles are a great
feature for us, great way to help us out.
| | 15:14 | In the next section what we are going to do is going to take this a
little bit further and we're going to talk about anchored objects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Anchored objects| 00:00 | Anchored objects are next feature that I'd like to talk to you about,
because they are such an important feature inside of InDesign.
| | 00:06 | They allow you to do things like take a, basically a picture, and
associate it with a text file so when the text itself moves -
| | 00:14 | let's say you've got a picture with a description,
just as you see on the page right here,
| | 00:17 | this is kind of a finalized version of what we're going to be doing.
| | 00:20 | I just want to show you what this can do.
| | 00:23 | On the left-hand side I have a picture; I
also have text describing the picture itself.
| | 00:27 | I know it doesn't look very descriptive, but you know it's working, so.
| | 00:30 | The reason why we do this is, if I click on this text frame right
here, I can actually see that I've just got the picture next to it.
| | 00:36 | Now, I just place a picture and put it next to the text,
| | 00:40 | but if this text frame moves this picture is not going
to move with it, unless I try and group it together.
| | 00:45 | Now, grouping is great and if I move the text frame,
it's fine, it'll do it, but if I actually move the text
| | 00:50 | within the text frame group, these groupings are not going to help me.
| | 00:53 | These are called anchored, these right here, these are actually anchored.
| | 00:56 | Now, that means that they are actually
positioned so that I can't move them right now.
| | 01:00 | I set it that way and they're actually
linked to a certain part of the text.
| | 01:04 | They are linked to Seattle Tea Shop right here, this picture right here.
| | 01:07 | So watch, if I come to my Type tool, I'm
going to double-click on my Type tool.
| | 01:10 | Let's say, I'm just starting to type a little bit more, I hit return.
| | 01:13 | Look what happens to my pictures.
| | 01:15 | They are basically moving with the text,
because they are anchored to the text itself.
| | 01:18 | Now, I can anchor outside text frames, I can anchor
pictures, there's all sorts of things we can do.
| | 01:23 | There are two types of anchored objects we can work with.
| | 01:26 | Go back to my Selection arrow here, I can see, I'm going to
zoom in a bit - Command-Spacebar, Control-Spacebar Windows.
| | 01:33 | There's basically a custom anchor object, which
allows you to place an object anywhere you want.
| | 01:38 | Such as like a side bar, that sort of thing
or you can actually have an inline graphic.
| | 01:43 | An inline or above line they call it.
| | 01:45 | This allows you to take an object and put it right in
line with a text or even have it right above the text.
| | 01:50 | That way if the text moves it moves with it, just kind of a nice feature.
| | 01:54 | Like I said, this sort of thing, these anchored objects are
great for side bars, if you want to put side bars next to text,
| | 02:00 | they will always move with the text or even pictures.
| | 02:02 | We are going to do a couple pictures to give you an idea how this works.
| | 02:06 | So go to your exercise file folder in Chapter
3 and we should see "brochure_baseline."
| | 02:11 | I'm going to open that up.
| | 02:12 | This is what it is going to look like to start with,
we just have a simple text frame hanging on the page.
| | 02:16 | With your black arrow, with my Selection tool, once you have
that file open, come to the fourth page of the document.
| | 02:22 | You should be able to see the fourth page out there.
| | 02:23 | It should have this text frame sitting on it.
| | 02:25 | Now, the text frame alone just has content inside of it.
| | 02:27 | What we're going to do, we're going to associate a picture with
the text frame, with each one of these descriptions right here.
| | 02:34 | To do that, what I'm going to do is place my
cursor where I want the picture to be associated.
| | 02:38 | Where this picture basically going to link to, I guess you could say.
| | 02:42 | So with my Type tool, I am going to double-click to get my Type
tool and put it the in front of the word "Kent," right here.
| | 02:46 | It's kind of important where you place this cursor, because
that's where the picture is going to be anchored to.
| | 02:51 | So if this text right here moves anywhere, the
picture can actually move in line with it.
| | 02:57 | So with my cursor there, we're going to come to Object>
Anchored Object - up top in the menus - Object>Anchored Object.
| | 03:04 | It's going to give us an option here to Insert.
| | 03:06 | So, click Insert.
| | 03:07 | Now you're going to notice here we're going to
get the Insert Anchored Object dialogue box.
| | 03:12 | I admit that this is a rather large dialogue box and to
be honest with you, we are going to go through this thing,
| | 03:19 | I just don't want to kill you with it.
| | 03:20 | Couple things we're going to talk about really quick here.
| | 03:23 | If you look under Object Options here, we are actually going to
see, what it's going to do for us is this, it's going to take a box,
| | 03:29 | basically a frame and link it or anchor it to the text.
| | 03:34 | What that frame contains is up to you.
| | 03:37 | So if I take a look here in Content, I can tell it can be a colored box,
which is Unassigned, it can contain a Graphic or it can contain Text.
| | 03:44 | Great thing for a side bar, you got text; we're just going to do a picture.
| | 03:47 | So I'm going to say Graphic.
| | 03:48 | If you had an object style set up that actually
would apply a drop shadow and all sorts of things,
| | 03:53 | this is a great way to be able to work with
something like an anchored object.
| | 03:56 | Now, what happens when I click Anchored Object and
go to None, it seems to change things down here.
| | 04:00 | So don't worry about that, we'll figure that out.
| | 04:01 | If you look here, if this is a text frame, if this actually had content,
you could pick a Paragraph Style and associate it with it, or apply it.
| | 04:08 | Now, if you look right here, we've got height and width.
| | 04:10 | This is actually going to be the height and width of the frame.
| | 04:12 | What I'm actually going to do, I'm going
to change that to an inch and a half.
| | 04:15 | We can always change the size of the frame once we
get it out of here, it's just going to draw us frame.
| | 04:19 | Now, this is the big stuff.
| | 04:21 | This is saying what's going to be anchored to this point.
| | 04:24 | Now, if you look down here under Position, the Position is saying, once
the actual object is out there, once the graphic frame is out there,
| | 04:30 | where is it going to go in relation to
right where your cursor was, right there?
| | 04:33 | If you look under Position on this drop down menu, you are
actually going to see, it says Inline or Above Line or Custom.
| | 04:39 | Inline or Above Line is allowing the picture or graphic of the text
to go right in line with the text or right above that text.
| | 04:48 | This is great for things like, when I create handouts,
| | 04:50 | I want to put a little picture of the actual icon I am talking
about or the tool I'm talking about, it can go inline with the text.
| | 04:57 | Custom can allow us to position it wherever we want.
| | 04:59 | I can put the text or picture box right out here.
| | 05:02 | So I'm going to click Custom.
| | 05:04 | Now, if you look, we're going to get just a ton of options in here.
| | 05:07 | You kind of barraged with all of these.
| | 05:09 | First and foremost, here's what we'll do, if you
look inside of here, there's no Preview button.
| | 05:13 | You can't preview this, so I'm going to
try and position it without previewing it.
| | 05:17 | So it's going to put a graphic frame and
we're going to try and position it.
| | 05:20 | I don't really like doing that, okay; it's kind of hard to do actually.
| | 05:23 | You don't know where it's going to go.
| | 05:25 | Once you do this a bunch of times you'll figure
it out, but here is what we are going to do.
| | 05:28 | We are going to talk just quickly about this stuff.
| | 05:32 | We can actually edit this information right here.
| | 05:34 | Position information after the text frame
or the graphic frame gets on the page.
| | 05:38 | We can do it after the fact.
| | 05:40 | So usually I just want to get the content out there with
the box and all that stuff out there and then we can edit it.
| | 05:45 | Then we'll talk about Relative to Spine, et cetera.
| | 05:48 | So here is what we will do: for right now, I know
we are going to ignore all this stuff for a second.
| | 05:51 | Just click OK and take a look, look what it did.
| | 05:55 | It actually put a graphic frame out there and it also put it right next to
where my cursor was, so it's actually putting it just to the left of it.
| | 06:04 | Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to
zoom in here to show you something here.
| | 06:06 | So I'm going to go Command-Spacebar,
Control-Spacebar Windows, drag across.
| | 06:10 | If you look with your hidden characters turned on,
if you don't see them, come under Type>Show Hidden Characters.
| | 06:18 | With these on, if you take a look you're
going to see this symbol right here:
| | 06:20 | the Y with the two lines underneath it. That is where your
actual picture box or your graphic box is anchored to.
| | 06:27 | That's the indicator right there.
| | 06:29 | Now, here's something we can do.
| | 06:30 | I can actually move this anywhere I want;
I can also put a picture in it right now.
| | 06:33 | We're just going to put a picture in it.
| | 06:35 | So here is what we'll do, come to your black arrow.
| | 06:38 | I'm going to go to my, basically the Adobe
Bridge, let's go to the Adobe Bridge.
| | 06:42 | So I'm going to go up to File>Browse.
| | 06:44 | Now, at this point, if you don't have the bridge opened
yet, it's actually going to have to open for you.
| | 06:48 | So you may want to the pause the movie.
| | 06:50 | Now, with the bridge open, what we're going to do, I want to go to
my desktop, if you look right here where it says Favorites,
| | 06:56 | scroll up and down here a little bit, you'll see Desktop, click on Desktop.
| | 07:00 | We're going to come into our exercise_files folder.
| | 07:03 | Double-click on exercise_files; inside of there we should see Chapter_03.
| | 07:07 | Let's go into Chapter_03; you should see your Links right there.
| | 07:11 | If you are just following at home and you don't have the
files you can use any picture you want to, basically anywhere.
| | 07:16 | We're going to grab the beans right here. So, from our
bridge, the best part about doing any anchored object,
| | 07:21 | as a matter of fact, any text, any frame you have in InDesign is from
your desktop or from the bridge, I can drag and drop into a frame.
| | 07:29 | So if I grab this image right here, I'm going to drag
it over, now watch, watch your icon when you do this.
| | 07:36 | You're going to notice that if I drop it somewhere off on the
page out here, I'm going to see like a corner icon with a page.
| | 07:41 | If I put it over an existing frame, I'll see parentheses around that.
| | 07:46 | That means I'm going to put the object inside the frame.
| | 07:48 | If I let go, it's going to place the graphic inside the frame.
| | 07:52 | It's a nice easy way to drag.
| | 07:54 | So I'm going to click back in InDesign here.
| | 07:56 | Last step I want to take is, I'm actually
going to fit the picture into the frame.
| | 08:00 | So if I come out here I'm going to right-click on the picture. Those
of you who have a one button mouse, say a Mac, you can come under Object
| | 08:07 | and go to Fitting, you're going to see Fitting inside of here.
| | 08:10 | Should be down towards the bottom, here we go.
| | 08:14 | And I should be able to see Fit Content
Proportionally or Fill Frame Proportionally.
| | 08:18 | This is really a nice one, I'm going to say Fill Frame.
| | 08:20 | It will fill it as much as it can, keeping the proportions of the image.
| | 08:24 | All right, so there we go, we got a graphic
out here, I also have it attached.
| | 08:28 | Like I said before, if I move this text frame, if I
click and drag this text frame with my black arrow,
| | 08:33 | the picture will move with it, which is kind of nice.
| | 08:35 | So now we need to position the picture.
| | 08:36 | So here is what we will do.
| | 08:37 | To actually edit the anchored object here, I can either put my cursor
back in the text or I can click on the object that's actually anchored.
| | 08:46 | Come up to Object, come to Anchored Object and if
you take a look you'll see Options, click on Options
| | 08:53 | and what you can see is the lower half of the
initial dialogue box we were talking about.
| | 08:58 | So this allows me after the fact to position this object.
| | 09:00 | Now, let's talk about this, if you take a look right here in the
beginning we got something called Anchored Object Relative to Spine.
| | 09:07 | If you had some text - and let's say this picture was on the outside - if
there was a concern or fear that this text may flow to a right hand page -
| | 09:16 | let's say this was a facing page document -
| | 09:18 | if it were going to flow, it would always keep the picture
on the left. But if I turn on Relative to Spine right here,
| | 09:25 | you could actually see right here that if I had two pages, this
spread and this text flow with the picture moving with it,
| | 09:31 | you could actually position it wherever
you want, once it got to that next page.
| | 09:36 | So right now, you can see right here, it's actually
going to position. There's a reference to point for me.
| | 09:40 | It's going to allow me to position it when it flips across
a page, where it's going to sit in relation to the text.
| | 09:45 | Now, I don't do a lot of longer documents with this sort
of thing, it's totally possible that you can do it.
| | 09:50 | So for right now let's turn off Relative to the Spine.
| | 09:53 | Here is what I want to do, we've got the reference point now.
Come down to Anchored Position, here's what's going to happen.
| | 09:58 | Reference Point literally means this, your text frame is sitting out
here; this graphics frame is located to the left of the text frame.
| | 10:07 | Now, if you look at the reference point right here, if I click in the
center, let's say right here, the reference point - and try to move this
| | 10:12 | out of the way - what it's going to try and
do is take my actual picture frame here -
| | 10:17 | so I got my frame - and try and position it
to the center of the text frame.
| | 10:22 | If I do right, it's going to go off the side here, you may not to see it,
but it's actually going to position it to the right of the text frame.
| | 10:27 | Reference Point is relative to the text
frame itself that's it's positioned against.
| | 10:32 | So what I'm going to do, I'm going to keep it on the left here,
even though they both work together if you take a look here.
| | 10:36 | Keep it on left; it'll keep it relative
to the left hand side of the text frame.
| | 10:40 | If you look right here, Reference Point, this is referring
to the reference points on the picture frame itself.
| | 10:46 | So if I click on any one of these right here, if you take a look,
I've got my center, my right, here is your reference point.
| | 10:52 | Here's where it's saying, that's where it's actually linking to,
or it's anchored to.
| | 10:56 | So if I do my center reference point for instance, it's going to actually
try to put my center point right by my anchor, right there, okay.
| | 11:02 | You can't move it above; it's just part of it.
| | 11:05 | So what I'm going to do, I'm going to say from the upper right hand
corner let's position it on the left hand side of the text frame, okay.
| | 11:11 | Once that's set, we're actually going to move this around.
| | 11:14 | Now, if you look inside of here you're going
to see that X Relative To and Y Relative To.
| | 11:17 | We got to move this; it's too close to the text.
| | 11:20 | X Relative To is actually going to let me to move it horizontally.
| | 11:23 | Y is going to let me move it vertically.
| | 11:26 | If you see right here it says X Relative
to Text Frame, you've actually got X Offset.
| | 11:30 | This is the text frame itself.
| | 11:31 | So if I increase this value right here, you
can see this is the horizontal position of it.
| | 11:37 | So negative position right here is going to pull
it in and a positive is going to push it out.
| | 11:41 | It's doing it across the X axis.
| | 11:44 | That's Relative To the Text Frame. Now, if you look at
Relative To you can get it to go relative to the Edge
| | 11:49 | of the page, the Page Margin itself, all sorts of things.
| | 11:53 | You can get this to position wherever you want.
| | 11:54 | I usually position Relative To the Text Frame, because
if the text frame moves I want it to move with it.
| | 11:59 | Now, Y Relative To is actually going to position it vertically.
| | 12:02 | Now, this is actually an important one right
here, if you take a look, it says Line (Baseline).
| | 12:06 | We have a lot of different things we can do.
| | 12:08 | I can say Relative To the Text Frame, the Page
once again. The big ones we're probably going
| | 12:12 | to do here are this: Line (Cap Height), (Top of Leading), Column Edge.
| | 12:16 | Now, basically means this, I want this picture to follow the text if the
text moves and I want to keep it lined up to the top of the top cap here.
| | 12:26 | Okay. So if I go to Y Relative To, I'm going to say Line (Cap Height).
Basically it's going to align it right up at the cap height there
| | 12:32 | and if I want to pull it up or down, I can
use a position that's negative or positive.
| | 12:36 | It's all relative to where I set it right there, the Line (Cap Height).
| | 12:39 | Now, if you take a look down here, it's going to
say Keep within Top/Bottom Column Boundaries.
| | 12:44 | It basically means that within the boundaries of the column right
here, this picture can't move above it and it can't move below it.
| | 12:52 | So if this text were to go towards the bottom of
the page, the text could actually move down,
| | 12:56 | but the picture has to stop where the column ends basically.
| | 12:59 | If that was off, it would actually let it move
down with the text until it moved to the next page.
| | 13:04 | I usually keep that on.
| | 13:06 | Prevent Manual Positioning means you cannot
move it out here once you click OK.
| | 13:10 | You can't replace the picture itself.
| | 13:13 | So that's kind of a bummer.
| | 13:14 | It's a good idea to keep it on any way.
| | 13:17 | Let's turn it off for right now, I'm going to click OK.
| | 13:19 | I think that looks pretty good.
| | 13:20 | Let me zoom back out, I'm going to View>Fit in Window.
| | 13:24 | There we go, not too bad.
| | 13:26 | Now, here's a little trick we can pull.
| | 13:28 | We want to do the same thing down here in Seattle Tea Shop.
| | 13:31 | So I'm going to get an anchored object right next to this one.
| | 13:34 | What we can do is copy this one.
| | 13:35 | Put it right here, it will have the same positioning as everything.
| | 13:37 | We're just going to replace the picture.
| | 13:39 | So once again, I'm going to zoom in here to show you what I am doing.
| | 13:42 | So Command-Spacebar, click and drag in.
| | 13:43 | I'm going to get to my Type tool, so double-click, here's what we'll do.
| | 13:48 | I'm going to move my cursor to the left
of the K, now this gets a little tricky,
| | 13:52 | move it to the left of the K. What I want
to do, I want to select that character.
| | 13:56 | It's kind of interesting here.
| | 13:57 | I'm going to select that character, it
doesn't seem like I'm going to do it.
| | 14:01 | The easy way to do this is this, if you come to the right of the K, put
your cursor there, use your left arrow to move your cursor to the left.
| | 14:07 | If you hold your Shift key down and you use your left arrow you
can select whatever is to the left of the K and that includes
| | 14:14 | that little mark right there, that hidden character.
| | 14:17 | Now, make sure you've got your hidden characters turned
on under Type on the very bottom of the menu.
| | 14:21 | I'm going to go Copy, it doesn't look like I have it selected, I know.
| | 14:23 | You have to have faith here.
| | 14:24 | I'm going to do Copy, so Command-C, Control-C. I'm going to scroll
down, I've got a scroll wheel on my mouse, you guys can use your hand.
| | 14:32 | I'm going to click in front of Seattle here and I'm just going to paste.
| | 14:35 | And if I take a look it's just pasted the same inline object here.
| | 14:39 | So this is basically setting it out here.
| | 14:41 | I can now replace the picture of this one.
| | 14:43 | So if I go back to my black arrow and I'll zoom
go back out to fit, so go View>Fit in Window.
| | 14:48 | The short cut for that is Command-0 Mac, Control-0 Windows.
| | 14:52 | And we need to replace this picture.
| | 14:53 | So I'm going to go back to the bridge. We're going to drag a new piture on
and drop it right on top.
| | 14:57 | It willo replace the existing image.
| | 15:01 | So File>Browse. You could also just select this picture box
right here and go to Place and it will replace it for you.
| | 15:08 | It's the same kind of thing.
| | 15:09 | So go to Browse, I'm going to go into the exercise files folder into
Chapter_03, double-click on the Links folder, let's open that up.
| | 15:18 | What I want to do is we're actually opening up pattern_2.
| | 15:22 | So click, drag that in, we're going to drop
that right on top, click and drag it in.
| | 15:26 | You're going to notice your cursor, always watch your icon there.
| | 15:28 | You want to see the parentheses, that's going to replace it, so I'm going
to let go and it will replace that image and the only thing we have left
| | 15:34 | to do, since the picture is kind of small
I need to fit it into the frame itself.
| | 15:38 | So with the object selected, I'm going to
right-click on it, come down to Fitting.
| | 15:42 | And once again if you have a one button mouse on a Mac, you
can come down under Object menu up on top under Fitting.
| | 15:46 | It does the same thing.
| | 15:48 | Fill Frame Proportionally and we've got our picture.
| | 15:52 | You can use these for all sorts of things.
| | 15:54 | If you decide to get rid of the actual anchored object,
| | 15:57 | I can select the image itself, delete it.
| | 16:00 | We could also go to the actual icon right here and delete the icon.
| | 16:03 | It's the same thing.
| | 16:05 | There's all sorts of things we can do with anchored and inline objects.
| | 16:07 | I would love to show you every feature we could use in
here, but unfortunately we don't have enough time for this.
| | 16:12 | So use your imagination.
| | 16:14 | Use it for outside text frames, text frames that
flow with the text, side bars and things like that.
| | 16:20 | It's almost limitless what you can do with anchored objects.
| | 16:23 | So with that, we're done with anchored objects. In the next session
here we are going to go through and talk about applying style sheets.
| | 16:29 | So you can take "brochure_baseline," you can
save it if you want, you don't have to.
| | 16:33 | Go ahead and close out and we're basically done with these.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Quick apply| 00:00 | Now, moving along with our theme of time saving features,
I want to talk to you about how to apply styles faster.
| | 00:05 | This is utilizing Quick Apply.
| | 00:07 | Quick Apply is an easy shortcut method for
applying paragraph and character styles to text.
| | 00:13 | Go to your Exercise Files folder, in Chapter 3
you should see that the "tea_mag.indd" document.
| | 00:18 | Open that up; there is only one page in the
file, so we are just going to go on the first page here.
| | 00:22 | What I'd like to do is start applying some
paragraphs styles and character styles.
| | 00:25 | Now, here is what we will do, come over to
the left hand side, with the black arrow,
| | 00:29 | doubl- click on the first column, that way
you can place the cursor in the paragraph.
| | 00:33 | I want to zoom in just so you can see what I'm doing, so Command-
Spacebar Mac, Control-Spacebar Windows, get a little zoom there.
| | 00:40 | On the right hand side let's open up the Paragraph Styles palette.
| | 00:42 | I'll click on that.
| | 00:43 | I'll take a look; there are a bunch of paragraphs
styles already created in this document.
| | 00:47 | We need to apply them to our text.
| | 00:49 | So, I need to do that pretty quickly.
| | 00:50 | Now, I could just go over here and click and
apply and be good and done and there we go.
| | 00:54 | But, I want to be fast about this.
| | 00:57 | Now, one thing we could do is use a shortcut for the style.
| | 01:00 | Let me just talk about that for a second here.
| | 01:02 | For instance, if we go to body copy, once I double-click to open
up the paragraph style, it's going to apply it where my cursor it.
| | 01:07 | That is fine, I'll double-click.
| | 01:09 | If you look inside of here you will see Shortcut. Any
character and paragraph styles allow you to have shortcuts.
| | 01:14 | These are great, you can just hit a shortcut
key and it will apply the style, that is fine.
| | 01:20 | But some of the drawbacks with these are this: you have
to use, in a Mac, you use Command, Option, Control, Shift,
| | 01:26 | one of those keys or all of them, any combo of them.
| | 01:28 | In Windows you are going to use Control, Alt, Shift, one of them or a
combination of them, and you've got to use a number on your keypad,
| | 01:36 | which is all the way on the right hand side of the keyboard usually.
| | 01:38 | On a Mac laptop I could typically press the F6
and the NUM lock key on a Powerbook, typically.
| | 01:43 | And on Windows machine you can use a function
key as well to get to the numeric keypad,
| | 01:47 | which is part the actual keyboard itself, to use these shortcuts.
| | 01:51 | So, basically, it's kind of limiting.
| | 01:53 | So, if I want to do a shortcut for this one, if I
hold down, I'm on a Mac here, I hold down Command,
| | 01:57 | on a Windows machine hold down Control,
| | 01:59 | from your keypad, right hand side, I'm going to hit 1.
| | 02:03 | If try to do a number along the top of the actual
keyboard you won't do that, it won't happen.
| | 02:06 | So it says, Currently Assigned to: nothing, which is nice.
| | 02:09 | If I click OK, take a look, there is the number, it is applied.
| | 02:13 | If I go to another paragraph and click
Command-1, I can apply it pretty simply.
| | 02:18 | That is great, but it leaves for some interpretation here.
| | 02:22 | The shortcuts, there is only so many, plus, you
have to key the palette open and all sorts of things.
| | 02:27 | So what we are going to do is make this simpler on ourselves.
| | 02:29 | I'm going to use Quick Apply to apply styles.
| | 02:32 | Place the cursor in the next paragraph, which is "Fermentation."
| | 02:34 | I want to place my cursor in there.
| | 02:35 | I want to apply a paragraph style.
| | 02:37 | To do that we going to use Quick Apply.
| | 02:39 | If you look up in the Control palette right now,
you are going to see this button right here.
| | 02:42 | This is called Quick Apply.
| | 02:44 | Now, it really doesn't make sense to click on this button right now.
| | 02:47 | If I click on the button, I'm going to see a list of paragraph styles.
| | 02:50 | As a matter of fact, I'm going to delete what is in there,
there is a little field right here, I'm going to delete that.
| | 02:54 | And I'll see a total list of all of my styles.
| | 02:57 | It's the same thing as looking at your Paragraph Styles.
| | 02:59 | So, what we need to use is we need to use a shortcut to get to this.
| | 03:01 | This is going to allow us to apply styles really quickly and efficiently.
| | 03:04 | So, I'll click back on the button, to use Quick Apply with your
cursor and text, on the Mac we are going to hold down Command
| | 03:10 | and hit Return, and on Windows you are going to use Control-Enter.
| | 03:13 | As soon as I do that, its going to pull up the Quick Apply dialogue box.
| | 03:16 | Now what I can do is apply a style right now. I need a subhead for this.
| | 03:19 | So, I'm going to type in "su".
| | 03:22 | Suddenly it comes to subheads.
| | 03:23 | It filters the categories there and if I hit Enter
on Windows or Return on Mac, it will apply the style.
| | 03:28 | A nice easy way to apply styles.
| | 03:30 | The only sort of drawback to this is that you have
to sort of remember what your styles are named.
| | 03:35 | And this goes back to your workflow, trying to make sure that
you have named them something correctly that you will remember.
| | 03:40 | What I want to do is I want go to the next paragraph
now and we are going to apply the body copy to it.
| | 03:45 | My cursor is already in "Fermentation," what I will do is just click
down there; basically you can just place the cursor in there.
| | 03:50 | If I take a look now, there is something going on here.
| | 03:53 | If I look at Basic Paragraph on the side over here,
its got Basic Applied, there is an override here.
| | 03:58 | Italic has been applied to this text.
| | 04:00 | Now, here is the thing, if we use Quick Apply to apply a
style, we are going to do it a little differently here.
| | 04:04 | With any text that's got a style applied which is basic and someone
did something else, they applied italic, hear is what we will do.
| | 04:12 | Command-Return on Mac, Control-Return on Windows.
| | 04:15 | I want to apply my body copy.
| | 04:16 | So I'm going to do "bo" and suddenly there is body copy.
| | 04:19 | Now, here is the big difference, if I just hit Return,
it won't clear what is called local formatting.
| | 04:24 | See that italic out there?
| | 04:25 | It doesn't go away.
| | 04:26 | So, we have actually got to use a different key here.
| | 04:28 | Instead of just hitting Return I'm going to use my Option key.
| | 04:31 | Hold down the Option key on Mac and I'm going to do Alt
on Windows, and hit Return on Mac and Enter on Windows.
| | 04:37 | So, Alt-Enter on Windows and Option-Return on Mac and it
will wipe any formatting off and apply the paragraph style.
| | 04:44 | It's kind of a nice little trick there.
| | 04:47 | All right, so let's go down to the next paragraph.
| | 04:49 | To move between paragraphs there is a nice easy way that you can do this.
| | 04:51 | If you use the arrow keys, your cursor is just going to jump between lines.
| | 04:55 | But if you hold down the Command key on Mac, Control key on Windows,
and use the down arrow key it will jump to the next paragraph.
| | 05:02 | Once the cursor is in "Tea Bags," you can see it down there, I'm
going to scroll down a bit so you can see what I'm doing.
| | 05:05 | I'm going to use Quick Apply.
| | 05:08 | So Command-Return Mac, Control-Return Windows,
go to the subhead, so, "sub," there we go.
| | 05:16 | Hit Return or Enter.
| | 05:17 | And there it is applied.
| | 05:18 | Go to the next paragraph; use the arrow down to get to the next
one, now we have a little special circumstance hiding in here.
| | 05:24 | If you take a look at 1904 right here, 1904 has
italic applied but there is a little difference here.
| | 05:32 | If I look at my Character Styles palette,
there is a character style applied.
| | 05:36 | Now, if we didn't know that, here is what we could do.
| | 05:38 | Put the cursor in the paragraph, we are
going to Quick Apply the paragraph style.
| | 05:41 | So Command-Return, Control-Return on Windows, go to "bo" for body
copy, hit Return or Enter and I have just applied my body copy.
| | 05:50 | Now, there is a little problem.
| | 05:52 | 1904 is still there.
| | 05:53 | So what we need to do is this, I want to completely wipe
all formatting off and just apply the paragraph style.
| | 05:59 | To do that, to wipe character formatting, as well at
local formatting, we going to go back to Quick Apply.
| | 06:05 | On the Mac, Command-Return, Control-Return, Windows.
| | 06:07 | Before hitting Return or Enter on body copy right there, which it
is still remembering that, what I'm going to do is this, on Mac,
| | 06:14 | I'm going to hold down Option-Shift before hitting Return and
on a Windows I'm going to hold down Alt-Shift and hit Enter.
| | 06:21 | Let's go ahead and do that.
| | 06:22 | I'm going to hit Option-Shift-Return on Mac, Alt-ShiftEnter on Windows.
| | 06:26 | And you will notice that any formatting that
was in the paragraph is now cleaned away,
| | 06:30 | including character style formatting, which is kind of a nice thing.
| | 06:33 | All right.
| | 06:34 | Here is what we are going to do.
| | 06:36 | Let's move over a little bit, I'm going to hold - my cursor
is in my text so I'm going to get to my actual Hand tool.
| | 06:39 | So, Option on Mac, Alt on Windows, click and drag the page.
| | 06:43 | Come all the way over to the side over here.
| | 06:44 | What I want to do is come to the last column on the far right.
| | 06:47 | We are actually going to see where it says "Green Snow Dragon."
| | 06:50 | What I'd like you to do is this, select "Green Snow Dragon."
| | 06:53 | We are going to apply a character style to "Green Snow Dragon."
| | 06:56 | But at the same time I want to apply a body paragraph style to this.
| | 07:00 | We can do this pretty quickly using Quick Apply.
| | 07:03 | Now, to do this, what I want to do is: I've got to get
Quick Apply out there.
| | 07:05 | So I'm going to do Command-Return Mac, Control-Return Windows.
| | 07:09 | What I want to do is I want to apply body copy
first and its right there, it remembers it.
| | 07:13 | If its not there you can type in "bo" to get the body copy.
| | 07:16 | Now, instead of just hitting Enter or Return, what I want
to do is this, if you want to apply something and you want
| | 07:21 | to apply maybe character style right after that,
you want to keep the Quick Apply window open.
| | 07:25 | When you hit Return or Enter it closes that and applies.
| | 07:28 | To keep that open so you can keep applying things, hold down the Shift
key, hit Return on Mac, Enter and Windows and it applies the paragraph style
| | 07:35 | that you have but keeps it out there and allows to you apply another style.
| | 07:39 | Here is what we are going to do.
| | 07:40 | I'm going to, my cursor is up there is Quick Apply, you
can see it right up here, I'm going to back up here,
| | 07:44 | I'm going to use my backspace, I'm going to now apply my character style.
| | 07:47 | So I'm going to do italics, so "it", italic text,
I want to apply it and close the apply window.
| | 07:53 | So I'm just going to hit the Return on Mac and Enter
on Windows and it should apply the italic style.
| | 07:58 | Nice, easy way to do multiple formatting
within one Quick Apply session there.
| | 08:02 | I can just quickly keep it open for myself.
| | 08:05 | So, its a nice easy way to work.
| | 08:06 | One last thing I want to show you with Quick Apply is this.
| | 08:10 | Go ahead and select "Green Snow Dragon" again, if you did deselect it.
| | 08:13 | If not, that's okay.
| | 08:14 | Keep it selected.
| | 08:16 | Some back to Quick Apply and I'm going to
do Command-Return, Control-Return Windows.
| | 08:20 | Make sure that italic text is showing, just type in "it".
| | 08:22 | Here is something that you can do. If you just decide that
you want to apply it, but maybe you also want to edit it.
| | 08:27 | If I want to edit a style before you apply it or after you
have applied it, you can just get to the Quick Apply window.
| | 08:34 | On a Mac I can hold the Command key down
and on Windows I can hold Control.
| | 08:37 | If I hit Return on Mac, Enter on Windows, it's going
to actually open up the Character Style Options for me.
| | 08:43 | That way I can change the formatting. If I come down to
the left hand side here at the Basic Character Formats.
| | 08:47 | Click on that.
| | 08:49 | Take a look in here.
| | 08:49 | I can change the size, do whatever I want.
| | 08:51 | I'll do something like 11 point, make a little bit smaller.
| | 08:54 | Once I click OK, it will apply and also change
the formatting or settings for that character style.
| | 09:02 | Nice easy way to use Quick Apply.
| | 09:03 | Quick Apply is an excellent way to get yourself using these
styles faster and basically be more productive with your pages.
| | 09:11 | So, we can take "tea_mag," you can save the
file, close it up, we are done with Quick Apply.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Templates| 00:00 | Templates are the next time saving feature that I'd like to discuss.
| | 00:03 | From the exercise files folder in the desktop, in the Chapter 03
folder, we are going to open up "postcard_announce" again.
| | 00:08 | It's got a bunch of things that we were working on before.
| | 00:11 | Things like when we did the libraries and the last couple of movies.
| | 00:14 | What we are going to do is go through and from the first page, I want
to show you how to create a template and kind of what they are about.
| | 00:20 | A template is literally a way - it's kind
of a starting point I guess you can say.
| | 00:23 | It's a way for you to take a document that you have designed and
set up and make it so that other people can open up the template
| | 00:30 | and create copies of that without harming the original file.
| | 00:34 | That is the best part about that.
| | 00:35 | Now, I can take this postcard and send it to someone
and basically say, you know, hey, do a Save As,
| | 00:40 | save it as your next project, your next
postcard and just start working on it.
| | 00:44 | But invariably things get saved over the top, you
know, the original gets screwed up, that sort of thing.
| | 00:50 | So, as a template you can kind of avoid that.
| | 00:52 | Now, there is a couple of things to do with a template.
| | 00:54 | Once you set up the design, you get the pictures and
everything out there, a couple things we want to do.
| | 00:59 | To make it nice and efficient for yourself,
you want to kind of clean things up.
| | 01:02 | Looking on the side, I should be able to see my swatches over there.
| | 01:05 | I'm going to open up the swatches, what we first
want to do is we want to make sure that, you know,
| | 01:09 | all of the swatches that are you using are actually in here and
the ones that are you not going to use are gone from this list.
| | 01:16 | Unless you think people are going to use those
colors, you might want to take those out of here.
| | 01:19 | To do that in the Swatches palette, come to the
Swatches palette menu on the side, click on that.
| | 01:23 | You are going to see Select All and Use.
| | 01:26 | Choose Select All and Use, take a look over there and see what happens.
| | 01:29 | It didn't select anything which basically means that all of the
colors are being utilized in the document and on the document itself.
| | 01:36 | So that is good.
| | 01:36 | We are going to keep those out here.
| | 01:37 | I can do the same thing to Paragraph Styles,
Character Styles and all of these fixed styles as well.
| | 01:42 | All of these have a menu on the side that
actually has the ability to Select All and Use.
| | 01:47 | I'm going to make sure that all of my things are used out here.
| | 01:49 | I'll keep Basic Paragraph there,
and it's just a way to clean things up.
| | 01:53 | Once things are cleaned up, we are going to go
through and actually save this out as a template.
| | 01:58 | Now, what I usually suggest or actually warn you
against here is this: if you place images in a file
| | 02:03 | and decide to save it as a template, you've got to watch the links.
| | 02:07 | These pictures out here have links associated with them, which means
they are linked somewhere on the desktop or your network or wherever.
| | 02:13 | Now, if you save a template and you send that
template off to someone, pictures have to go with it.
| | 02:19 | If they move that file once they make a copy of this template here that
we are going to create, you've got to pay attention to the links.
| | 02:25 | A way around that is for Templates. You just make
sure people are aware of that, aware of the links,
| | 02:31 | or you can actually imbed the pictures,
which is done through the Links palette.
| | 02:35 | Now, a lot of times what I do is this, I keep the
Paragraph Styles in here, and what I do is I go through
| | 02:40 | and for the text itself, you know the pictures may change and they may not.
| | 02:43 | You can get rid of the pictures.
| | 02:44 | Let's say that these pictures are going to change.
| | 02:46 | The JAVACO and the sidebar are going to stay the same.
| | 02:49 | Invariably what I'll wind up doing is I'll show all of
my frame edges here, so if you go up to View,
| | 02:53 | Command-H or Control-H, you will see Show Frame Edges.
| | 02:56 | Now we can see the frames out here.
| | 02:59 | What I want to do is, I want to get rid of
the pictures but keep the frames in there.
| | 03:01 | Just telling people that pictures are going to go in there.
| | 03:04 | To do that I'm going to go into my white arrow -
that is the letter A - click on one of the pictures.
| | 03:09 | I'll see the brown box there, I'm going to just hit Delete.
| | 03:11 | I'm going to get rid of those.
| | 03:12 | I'll do that for each picture.
| | 03:14 | The reason why I'm doing this is so that we can keep the frame
in place, but get rid of those pictures that are going to change.
| | 03:20 | So I usually will keep the pictures that are a consistent inside of here.
| | 03:23 | The next thing I will do is come down to the text down here
and a lot of times, you know, you can leave the text in there
| | 03:28 | that is fine, we can just select it and write over the top of it.
| | 03:31 | That works fine.
| | 03:31 | Sometimes what I will do is this: I'll come in here,
I'm going to double-click to get to my Text tool.
| | 03:36 | I might type in something like this.
| | 03:38 | I might type in like "Headline," I'm just trying to give them,
oops, I'm trying to give them an idea of what this is going to be.
| | 03:45 | I come down here and type in something like,
you know, "body copy" or something like that.
| | 03:49 | And you can repeat that if you want to.
| | 03:51 | So, it's just kind of a reference for
them to know what is going to go here.
| | 03:54 | Like I said, you can also keep the text; that is totally fine.
| | 03:56 | A lot of times what also I will do is I will come out, come
back on the Selection tool, come back to my black arrow.
| | 04:02 | Anything that is going to stay in the same position I want to lock in place.
| | 04:05 | So I'm going to come over here to the picture and this picture
behind the bar, I'm going to select both by clicking and dragging.
| | 04:10 | I'm going to come up to Object, right-click on the pictures.
| | 04:13 | There is a couple of ways to do this and I will
see Command-L or Control-L, Locked Position.
| | 04:17 | That way if someone gets, you know, a little crazy out here,
they won't actually move these things, which is kind of nice.
| | 04:23 | So I'll click off to the side and we basically have the file set up.
| | 04:26 | I have cleared things off, I have things locked
that are in position, I have pictures that are going
| | 04:30 | to be replaced or moved and I also have the text out there.
| | 04:33 | Formatting is still in place so they can
see all I have to do is type in place.
| | 04:37 | So we are ready to save as a template.
| | 04:39 | So we are going to come up to File.
| | 04:40 | We are going to do a Save As, save a template.
| | 04:42 | So File>Save As.
| | 04:44 | The one key here, let's go on the desktop and click on desktop.
| | 04:50 | Take a look under Format down here.
| | 04:52 | You will also probably see Save as Type on the Windows machine.
| | 04:55 | Come down there, I'll actually see there are only two options.
| | 04:57 | You have a document and you have a template.
| | 04:59 | Let's choose template, it's always going to name the template
the same thing that you have the original file name.
| | 05:04 | If you didn't save the file yet and are
just starting from scratch, give it a name.
| | 05:08 | "Indt" is the extension for template.
| | 05:11 | You can save this basically anywhere as long as the links are good,
which means you usually place the pictures, get them in association,
| | 05:19 | get them in the same folder, same place, that
sort of thing and make sure the links work.
| | 05:24 | Then I'll save somewhere.
| | 05:25 | A lot of companies will save these on networks, that sort of thing.
| | 05:27 | So people can just open them up and start using them.
| | 05:30 | So I'll click Save and basically I can see
right here it says "postcard_announce.indt."
| | 05:34 | It's a template now.
| | 05:36 | I always want to double-check my links and make sure they are working.
| | 05:38 | So I'll come up under Window, come down
to Links from wherever I saved it.
| | 05:42 | If I take a look, I don't want to see any stop
signs or any yellow yield signs out here.
| | 05:46 | I'm just making sure that it knows where the pictures are, which is good.
| | 05:50 | All right.
| | 05:50 | So I'll close up the Links palette.
| | 05:52 | Last thing I do want to show you is: we are done, we have made the template.
| | 05:55 | I want to close up the template file here, File>Close.
| | 05:59 | I'm going to go to my desktop just to show you what this looks like.
| | 06:01 | So, I'm going to click on my desktop.
| | 06:02 | Here is what a template file generally looks like.
| | 06:04 | Windows will look a slight bit different here.
| | 06:06 | You can see that this kind of looks like a note
pad and that is basically what a template is.
| | 06:09 | It's just a starting point.
| | 06:11 | I can see "indt."
| | 06:13 | Now, we had this somewhere and let's say a week later
we need to create another postcard announcement.
| | 06:17 | I can just open up the template either by double-
clicking or going to File>Open through InDesign.
| | 06:23 | I'm going to go back to InDesign here; I'll going up to File>Open.
| | 06:26 | Come out to the desktop.
| | 06:29 | I should see my postcard template.
| | 06:31 | I'm going to click on Open out here.
| | 06:33 | And what is going to happen is it's going to open up an untitled copy.
| | 06:37 | This is a total copy of the template.
| | 06:40 | Your job is to save it where you want it.
| | 06:42 | You always have to remember though, you always have to tell people as
well that are utilizing this template, they have to watch their links.
| | 06:48 | Okay. Now, once I save this, this thing is perfectly viable.
| | 06:52 | I can do anything I want to with it.
| | 06:53 | I can move objects; I can type in text, anything I want basically.
| | 06:57 | A template is just a catch so that you kind of catch
yourself and you don't overwrite the original template.
| | 07:02 | As a matter of fact, let's say I needed this: let's
say I wanted this circle hanging out over here.
| | 07:06 | I suddenly decide, you know what, all my
templates should look like this. This is a copy.
| | 07:12 | To actually change the template itself we going
to do pretty much the same thing we just did.
| | 07:15 | I'm going to do a File>Save As and
just save over the top of the old template.
| | 07:19 | So I go to File, come down to Save As,
this is how my template should look now.
| | 07:23 | I'm just going to actually come and click on my template file here.
| | 07:26 | I want to make sure that I name it the same thing and
make sure that it actually says InDesign CS2 template.
| | 07:31 | That is the safety catch right there.
| | 07:33 | So I click Save.
| | 07:34 | It's going to ask you if you want to replace it.
| | 07:36 | I'll say yes.
| | 07:38 | My template now looks like this.
| | 07:40 | Any document that is created from this point forward
will actually utilize the look and the feel of this page.
| | 07:45 | It won't change any pages that were created from the template before this.
| | 07:49 | But any page created from here on out, it will change.
| | 07:52 | Templates are a great way for you to kind of just help yourself to maintain
consistency; to a have a nice easy starting point so that, you,
| | 07:59 | or your fellow co-workers can actually
work pretty quickly with these things.
| | 08:02 | So, that basically wraps up templates.
| | 08:04 | We have one more thing to do in the next section here.
| | 08:05 | We are going to talk about preferences.
| | 08:07 | So you can take the postcard announcement, close
up the template, you don't need to save this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Advanced preferences| 00:00 | In this last section on time saving features, I want
to take you through some of the program's preferences.
| | 00:05 | They are going to help you work faster
inside of here, also work a little smarter.
| | 00:09 | It makes it easier to just kind of work with the files.
| | 00:11 | So, what I'd like to do is, we actually
got, I have got "brochure_baseline" open.
| | 00:15 | Go into the exercise files folder, Chapter 3,
you should see "brochure_baseline."
| | 00:19 | This is one that we have been using through some of the videos.
| | 00:21 | Go ahead and open that one up, I'm on the second page right
here, just to see some text so we can get a feel for some things.
| | 00:28 | On the Mac platform, let's go under InDesign, and
Windows go to Edit, come on down to the Preferences.
| | 00:33 | No, actually, let's just open up General.
| | 00:35 | You are going to notice a shortcut and usually when you are working in
this program enough you will start to get into Preferences a lot.
| | 00:40 | So, knowing how to shortcut is a good thing.
| | 00:42 | Now, here is the interesting thing about Preferences and InDesign.
| | 00:45 | A lot of programs work like this and InDesign is one of them.
| | 00:49 | If you set Preferences right now, from most of the
objects on the side over here, most of these options,
| | 00:53 | it's going to set for the document that you have open.
| | 00:56 | If you want to set these and make it so that every
new document you save is going to take these,
| | 01:02 | you want to close out of the documents first and set the preferences.
| | 01:05 | So, it's kind of what we call a no publication state.
| | 01:08 | Now, there are a couple in here that I want to show
you right off the bat that are really kind of useful.
| | 01:12 | And the General side over here, if you take
a look, you are going to see Tool Tips.
| | 01:15 | You are going to look that you can actually turn off your Tool tips.
| | 01:18 | It's kind of interesting.
| | 01:19 | Sometimes they get in the way.
| | 01:20 | Once you learn what a tool is and, you know, you kind of find
your way around here you can say, don't show any tool tips.
| | 01:25 | Or if are you getting, you know, some of these tool tips
that show up on tools out here are kind of slow basically.
| | 01:30 | You can tell it to be fast when the tool tips pop up.
| | 01:33 | A lot of times actually, after a while, I will actually
turn the tool tips off, but it's up to you.
| | 01:36 | So it's kind of nice to be able to do.
| | 01:39 | Take a look at the Type settings at the left hand side, the Type category.
| | 01:43 | There are some interesting ones that we want to take a look at.
| | 01:46 | One of them, right out of the gate here,
is Triple Click to Select the Line.
| | 01:49 | It's kind of interesting, when you go out in
InDesign and you triple click with the Text tool,
| | 01:53 | with the Type tool, you actually get the line, not the paragraph.
| | 01:56 | And that is sort of different from a lot of programs.
| | 01:59 | If you turn that off, and you triple click inside
of text, it's going to grab the whole paragraph,
| | 02:04 | which is the way that Word and some of the other programs work.
| | 02:05 | So, this is something that you can work with a little bit.
| | 02:08 | Any of you coming from in other programs, like Work
Express, PageMaker perhaps, you are going to like this one.
| | 02:14 | When you do leading inside of text - leading being the space
between each line - you can, in here, you can do it line by line.
| | 02:20 | I can literally take a whole paragraph of four lines in a paragraph,
let's say, and I can take one line and actually change the leading value.
| | 02:28 | But in another programs you can tell it
to do the whole paragraph at once.
| | 02:32 | In here, if you turn this on, if you put the cursor in a paragraph
and you adjust the leading value, the space between the lines,
| | 02:37 | this will do it for the whole paragraph,
all lines in the paragraph automatically.
| | 02:40 | This is a great feature because you can kind of turn it on and off.
| | 02:43 | It's kind of neat to be able to do.
| | 02:45 | Now, this is a good one, too.
| | 02:46 | This, actually, we don't want to touch this one.
| | 02:48 | When you Cut and Paste Words, it automatically
puts a spaces and stuff in there.
| | 02:50 | So you want to keep that one on, it's kind of a nice thing.
| | 02:53 | There are some other ones in here that we
are not going to talk about right now.
| | 02:56 | Some of them you have actually seen in the earlier videos.
| | 02:58 | So, what I want to do is, let's come over
here to Advanced Type and take a look at that.
| | 03:03 | This is how you can control some things; this is how the program thinks.
| | 03:06 | You really have to be careful with these, because once you
have set them, they are set for this document right now.
| | 03:10 | This is controlling Superscript, Subscript and the Small Cap, the sizings.
| | 03:15 | Take a look at Composition; this is a really good one to look at.
| | 03:17 | Composition allows you - let's say that someone gives you a document.
| | 03:21 | You decide to open it up.
| | 03:22 | It could be a PageMaker file, a Quark file
of a certain version, or an InDesign file.
| | 03:27 | They did some work to it, you open it up,
you want to see where they did things.
| | 03:30 | You want to see where they did kerning and
tracking, you want to see if they, you know,
| | 03:33 | had quotes and they suddenly got, you
know, messed up, something like that.
| | 03:36 | If you look in here, when you open a file, if
you check these boxes, such as Substituted Glyphs.
| | 03:42 | Basically what happens is, when you open a file,
if there is a dollar sign that get substituted,
| | 03:47 | or a quote gets substituted, it will highlight it for you.
| | 03:50 | The other thing we can do too is, if you look right here, any
Custom Tracking/Kerning, meaning the space between letters,
| | 03:56 | and basically the overall space between words with
more than two letters, if you turn that on it's going
| | 04:00 | to highlight that on the page for you if someone did it.
| | 04:03 | This is really great when are you working with other
people's files to utilize the highlight features right here.
| | 04:07 | All right, let's take a look at just a couple more out here.
| | 04:10 | Let's take a look the Units and Increments, this is a great one.
| | 04:12 | This is one that you could be looking at.
| | 04:15 | If you use shortcuts in the programs, if any of you use shortcuts
to actually change kerning, leading, tracking, baseline shift,
| | 04:24 | you want to take a look down at Keyboard Increments.
| | 04:27 | Those shortcuts allow you to go through and change.
| | 04:29 | Let's say the Kerning rate here, if you do the kerning shortcuts.
| | 04:32 | It's like, Option-Up arrow, -Down arrow.
| | 04:35 | Okay, that is going to change the leading value.
| | 04:37 | To do the kerning, if you do Option-Right arrow, -Left arrow.
| | 04:40 | Right arrow will increase the kerning,
Option-Left arrow will decrease the kerning.
| | 04:43 | Of course, on a Windows machine I'm going to hold down
Alt-Right arrow, Alt-Left arrow to do my kerning.
| | 04:49 | Alt-Up, Alt-Down will actually change the leading value.
| | 04:53 | Sorry about that, I just hit the arrow key.
| | 04:54 | So basically if you take a look at Keyboard Increments, what happens
is, this controls when you use those shortcuts, how far it goes.
| | 05:01 | A lot of people that use the other programs,
they will do those shortcuts to kerning,
| | 05:04 | to leading and all that sort of thing, the
keyboard shortcuts, but they jump pretty far.
| | 05:08 | The Kerning value here, twenty one-thousands
of an em. That is actually pretty big.
| | 05:12 | What I might suggest doing is bringing that value
down a little bit, that way it will be half as far.
| | 05:17 | So when you use the kerning shortcut, which is
actually, on a Mac, it's Option-Right arrow to go bigger,
| | 05:23 | Option-Left arrow to go smaller, the distance between words.
| | 05:25 | In Windows it's Alt-Right arrow, Alt-Left arrow.
| | 05:28 | This will change the increments.
| | 05:30 | Really kind of a nice thing here that you can do.
| | 05:33 | Cursor Key is excellent.
| | 05:35 | If you use your arrow keys to move frames around the page
let's say, you go to move a picture and you use the arrow key.
| | 05:41 | This is how far it's going to go just by using your arrow key.
| | 05:43 | You can make that distance smaller if you really want to.
| | 05:45 | These are some great settings to work with.
| | 05:48 | The last one I do want to show you is, if I take
a look at the Display Performance out here.
| | 05:52 | This is a big one.
| | 05:53 | With Display Performance you can control how your
images look, your graphics look, that sort of thing.
| | 05:58 | If you look over here, we actually have right under the Default
View menu, you have got Typical and High Quality and Fast.
| | 06:05 | This controls for all of the documents that you work on
and actually in this case, since we have a document open
| | 06:10 | in it only controls the document that we have, for all of the pictures.
| | 06:13 | Okay. You have Fast, Typical and High Quality.
| | 06:16 | That is the View setting.
| | 06:17 | Typical is 72 dpi, High Quality being the full res.
| | 06:20 | Fast being just grey boxes, basically for your pictures.
| | 06:23 | So, you can control that directly inside of here.
| | 06:26 | Now, if you look out here you can have the ability to control
the Raster Images, your Vector Graphics and the Transparency.
| | 06:32 | That is actually quite interesting.
| | 06:33 | You can literally split it up and say, any time I see vector graphics,
usually thing like logos and EPS logos, I can crank my setting over here
| | 06:42 | to High Resolution and all of the vector graphics in this
document will always look really good, really crisp, really clean.
| | 06:50 | Now, one thing I really like inside of here is if you do
any drop shadows on objects, they are set to medium quality
| | 06:56 | under Transparency, this controls your transparency.
| | 06:59 | If you want to see really nice drop shadows, just on screen to preview,
you can take the Medium Quality slider and move it over to the right,
| | 07:05 | that sets all of the drop shadows and transparency to High Quality.
| | 07:09 | They are going to look pretty good then.
| | 07:11 | Now, the thing about all these is that you have to be careful is that
it's going to slow things down, it's going to slow your screen re-draw
| | 07:16 | when you move things around so it's going
to be a little bit slower when you move.
| | 07:19 | But sometimes if I need to display things, like
display it to my boss or something like that,
| | 07:24 | I can turn these up really high and actually
have everything look really good.
| | 07:26 | So, it's kind of nice.
| | 07:28 | So those are some of the actual preferences right here.
| | 07:30 | I'm going to click OK to get those out there.
| | 07:32 | These are just a few of some of the preferences that really work
and if you look at here you can actually see because I set some
| | 07:37 | of the highlighting features like "Flavors," for
instance, it's got some things going on out here.
| | 07:41 | Things like kerning and tracking.
| | 07:44 | So, utilizing preferences we can make the program work a little bit
better for us, a little faster for us and even a little smarter for us.
| | 07:50 | There are more preferences we can go to but these
are some of the ones that I use on a daily basis.
| | 07:55 | You can take "brochure_baseline," close it up, you do not have to save the
file and we are going to move on to the next chapter called Master Pages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Master PagesBased-on master pages| 00:00 | .
| | 00:00 | In this chapter we are going to begin
to discuss master pages in more detail.
| | 00:04 | There is a lot of things we can do with these to
kind of help ourselves to make things work faster.
| | 00:08 | Basically work smarter in the program, once again.
| | 00:10 | So, we are going to go through in this first section here, we going
to go through and talk about basing masters on other masters.
| | 00:16 | I have an example file open here; you will actually
find this in the exercise files folder in Chapter 4.
| | 00:23 | If you'd like to open that you can, otherwise you can just look because all
I'm doing is showing you what we going to do basically and how this works.
| | 00:29 | Now, basing masters on each other is kind of a little
bit of a newer concept for page layout programs.
| | 00:36 | What it does is, it basically says I want to
have, let's say, several spreads in my document.
| | 00:42 | If you look out here, I have you zoomed out, I can basically see one spread
has several pieces of content out here which is basically master objects.
| | 00:48 | The second spread has pretty much the same
thing on it, if you look it's 2 columns.
| | 00:53 | I have content to the bottom, this is actually page
number, it's kind of hard to see here, I apologize.
| | 00:57 | But on the sides, it's actually got sidebars.
| | 01:00 | That is really the only difference between these two spreads.
| | 01:03 | So, my way of thinking is, why can't I create a single master page that has
the common elements on it, like the page numbers and that sort of thing,
| | 01:11 | and then create another master page that basically carries
that content over, but has a difference, like the sidebars.
| | 01:20 | Now that is called Basing Masters.
| | 01:21 | That is an easy way to do that.
| | 01:22 | It's a nice way thing we can do here.
| | 01:24 | If I create the second master page I can say base it on
the first one, which is A-Master, which looks like this.
| | 01:30 | And what I want to do is this, if I change any of the
common elements, such as page numbers, that sort of thing,
| | 01:35 | on A-Master I'm telling it to automatically update on B-Master.
| | 01:39 | If you look at my Pages palette on the right
you can see that I have A-Master and B-Master.
| | 01:44 | Now, what is different between working with regular master
pages is if you look at the right here, the page icon,
| | 01:48 | you can see that B-Master has A's in the middle of the page.
| | 01:52 | That means that A-Master itself is applied.
| | 01:54 | If I change anything on A-Master it will update automatically on B-Master.
| | 01:59 | Just to show this to you, I'm going to go to A-Master, so
I double-click on the words A-Master, open my master page.
| | 02:04 | I'm going to fit the whole spread here in the window,
so, Command-Option-0 Mac, Control-Alt_0 Windows.
| | 02:10 | Now watch, if I take some common elements
here, I'm going to take these two elements.
| | 02:13 | They are grouped and I'm going to go to my Selection tool.
| | 02:16 | I'm going to each one of these here to select
them with my Shift key, select them both.
| | 02:19 | Let's say I just decide to move them down a little
bit, I'll just move them down a little bit here.
| | 02:23 | There we go.
| | 02:24 | Now if I go back to B-Master, or go to B-Master rather.
| | 02:27 | Come up to the Pages palette. I will double-
click on the B-Master name here,
| | 02:31 | take a look: that content has changed automatically
on the page because it's based on A-Master.
| | 02:37 | Everything on A-Master will change or update on this page automatically.
| | 02:41 | As a matter of fact, if you look in B-Master, if I try to
select this content, it's completely locked, I can't touch that.
| | 02:46 | That is because it's part of A-Master.
| | 02:48 | But the other elements out here, the side bars, if you click on
those with my Selection tool, I can do anything I want with those
| | 02:54 | because those are the difference between the two master pages.
| | 02:57 | All right.
| | 02:58 | So, we are going to go through and we
going to make this utilizing A-Master.
| | 03:01 | Go to the exercise files folder, inside of
Chapter 4 you should see "brochure_basemasters."
| | 03:06 | That is what we are going to start with.
| | 03:07 | I have already got it open.
| | 03:08 | I'm going to go over to that.
| | 03:09 | I can see that right here.
| | 03:11 | Once you have it open, what we are going to do is we going to go to
A-Master, I'm going to double-click on the word A-Master over here
| | 03:17 | in the Pages palette just so we can open up that spread.
| | 03:20 | It's already fit in the window, if it's not, don't
forget, Command-Option-0 Mac, Control-Alt-0 Windows.
| | 03:26 | That will get you in there, fit it in the window.
| | 03:28 | Now, I can see all of my elements out here.
| | 03:30 | Got Coffee Companion, got my page numbers. What I want to do is I want
to basically make a second master page and have it based on this one.
| | 03:38 | So, up in the master pages section, in the Pages palette, I'm going
to right-click - now, if you have a one-button mouse you can Control,
| | 03:45 | hold the Control key down and click inside of this area.
| | 03:47 | Make sure that you do it where there is a blank area.
| | 03:49 | I'm going to say, New Master, click on New Master there
and it's going to pull up the New Master dialogue box.
| | 03:55 | In the New Master dialogue box I can change the
prefix, I can change the name, all sorts of things.
| | 04:00 | They already did prefix B for me, that is fine, but let's name this.
| | 04:03 | I'm going to go to Master here and let's call this "Master with sidebars."
| | 04:08 | The name is up to you, you can name it whatever you want.
| | 04:11 | It's just something that you can remember it by.
| | 04:13 | So, now here is the key, I'm going to go to
Based on Master; it's probably the best part.
| | 04:17 | Come in here, I'm going to tell I want all of
the A-Master stuff to be on this new master page.
| | 04:22 | So, A-Master, click OK, and we should have our new master page out there.
| | 04:27 | If you see the name of it, it's B-Master with sidebars, I can
basically see that I have the A icons here in the middle of the pages.
| | 04:33 | It's telling me if I hover over I can see a tool tip, A-Master is applied.
| | 04:38 | All right, now these two masters look
identical so let's make them a little different.
| | 04:41 | What I want to do is place a sidebar on the side over here
and just kind of duplicate it on the right-hand page as well.
| | 04:46 | So, I'm going to go to File>Place, Command-D, Control-D. You should
be able to see that inside of the actual, if you take a look here,
| | 04:55 | inside of the exercise files folder, in the Chapter 4
folder, in the images folder in there, we should see a "stripe."
| | 05:01 | I'm going to open up the "stripe1.tif," you don't have to
actually do the Import Options on this, that is okay.
| | 05:06 | Let's click OK.
| | 05:07 | I've got my place gun out here, I'm going to come up to the corner,
snap to the actual bleed guides out here, click and let it go.
| | 05:15 | There it is.
| | 05:16 | What I want to do is make an exact duplicate on the right-hand side.
| | 05:19 | So, hovering over it with my Selection tool, hold down the
Option key Mac, Alt key Windows, I'll see the double arrows.
| | 05:25 | Let's drag it across.
| | 05:27 | It's going to snap in the guides for me, which is kind of nice.
| | 05:30 | Let go of your mouse first and then the key, and we
basically have the same object on the right hand side.
| | 05:35 | So, this is how B-Master looks different.
| | 05:38 | Now here is what we are going to do, we are going to go
out and apply B-Master and just see how it can update.
| | 05:43 | So, take a look at the Pages palette.
| | 05:44 | I'm going to scroll down a bit here.
| | 05:45 | I'm going to come to 4-5, double-click on 4-5,
the actual numbers below the page here in the Pages palette.
| | 05:52 | Now double-click, take you to the page out there.
| | 05:55 | Now, what I want to do is apply B-Master to this spread.
| | 05:57 | To do that, with the master pages selected, I'm going
to come up to B-Master here and I'm going to hold
| | 06:02 | down the Option key on Mac, Alt key in Windows and click.
| | 06:08 | That will apply the master page to it.
| | 06:09 | That is one way of many to be able to apply master pages.
| | 06:13 | So now that I have got B, you can see in the middle of 4-5,
over here in the Pages palette, I can see the B's in the middle.
| | 06:18 | That means that B-Master with sidebars are applied.
| | 06:20 | All right.
| | 06:21 | I'm going to take a little look out here.
| | 06:23 | I'm going to take a zoom look out; I'm going to go out a little bit.
| | 06:25 | So, I'm going to hold down Command and hit the minus sign.
| | 06:28 | Control-Minus on Windows and just take a look.
| | 06:31 | I've zoomed out a bit here; I can see three spreads of my document.
| | 06:35 | The first spread, pages 2 and 3, have A applied, the second
have B applied and pages 6, 7, have A applied again.
| | 06:42 | So, kind of repeating pattern on the here.
| | 06:44 | Now, here is what I like to do, I decide, you know what,
the page numbers need to move or something like that.
| | 06:49 | So here is what we will do, I need it to happen in all of my masters.
| | 06:53 | So I need to go back to A-Master since that is the base master.
| | 06:56 | That is the one that all of the masters pages are based on.
| | 06:59 | So coming over to the Pages palette, I double-click on A-Master, the name.
| | 07:03 | I'm going to fit that back in the window so on the
Mac, Command-Option-0, Control-Alt-0 on Windows.
| | 07:09 | If I take a look, I've got my page numbers hanging out here.
| | 07:12 | What I want to do is just kind of move this content down a little bit.
| | 07:15 | I'm going to select this all of the way across.
| | 07:16 | So Selection tool, I'm going to drag all of the way across, grab
both page numbers as well as both Coffee Companion icons here.
| | 07:23 | Let's say we want to lower them a little bit.
| | 07:24 | I'm going to hold down my Shift key just so
I can actually move it and keep it in line.
| | 07:29 | Move it down just a little bit here.
| | 07:31 | I know the guides are up there, that is fine, but I decide
that I think that looks a little bit better, it's okay.
| | 07:36 | So, what I want to do is we are going go back out
to the pages here, I'm going to double-click on 2-3,
| | 07:39 | the name here, that will take me to the whole spread.
| | 07:42 | I can see the change made.
| | 07:45 | Now, if I come down to 4-5, I'm
going to scroll down a little bit here.
| | 07:48 | Come down to 4-5, I'm going to double-click on the page numbers here.
| | 07:51 | If you take a look it's automatically updated.
| | 07:55 | This is how basing masters on other masters works.
| | 07:57 | It's an excellent concept; you can go really far with this.
| | 08:00 | I mean, I can take this, two, three, four,
levels deep if you really wanted to.
| | 08:04 | Of course, you have to be careful.
| | 08:05 | You know, there is a, you know, limit to this sort of thing.
| | 08:07 | But it really allows you with bigger documents, with
longer documents, that are you working with like magazines,
| | 08:11 | brochures, you know, newspapers, all sorts of things.
| | 08:15 | You can make it easier for you to update the
common elements between all of the master pages.
| | 08:20 | You can take "brochure_basemasters;" we
can go ahead and save this, close it up.
| | 08:24 | And basically we have just finished working
with these based on master pages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an initial single spread| 00:00 | I've had a lot of people ask me how to actually create
a document that has what is called a single initial spread.
| | 00:07 | This is allowing you to have the first page of the
document right next to the last page of the document.
| | 00:13 | So, like if you had a cover on a magazine kind of thing,
you can actually have the front cover, the front page,
| | 00:18 | and the back cover next to each other in the document itself.
| | 00:21 | That way you can kind of the visualize things, you can
put things across a spread, all sorts of things like that.
| | 00:26 | Now, what I want to do is come over to the Pages palette.
| | 00:28 | I have "brochure_basemasters" open; this is in your
exercise files folders, in the Chapter 4 folder.
| | 00:34 | So, if you'd like to open that up, I'm just trying to show
you what we are going to do, kind of how we can do this.
| | 00:38 | Looking at the Pages palette on the right
I can see all of the pages out there.
| | 00:41 | What I want to do is open this thing up.
| | 00:43 | I'm going to come down to the bottom here, the
lower left hand corner of the actual group on here.
| | 00:47 | I'm going to click and drag open.
| | 00:48 | I should see double arrows; I just want to
see all of the pages to give you an idea here.
| | 00:52 | Normally when you create a facing page document you have got the
first page up here, and your last page hanging out down here.
| | 00:57 | What I'd like to do is to get these two together.
| | 01:00 | Now, it's kind of a relatively painless process here.
| | 01:04 | Okay. And there are several ways to do this.
| | 01:06 | First of all, I'm going to show you how to do this
in this document, once you already have one set up,
| | 01:10 | and then I'm going to how you how to do this in a brand now document.
| | 01:13 | You know, similar but a little bit different.
| | 01:15 | So here is what we need to do.
| | 01:17 | Normally if I take page 8, right here, and let's say I do this.
| | 01:20 | If a take page 8, click and drag it up and
I'm like, I want to put it right over here.
| | 01:24 | You are going to see double arrows show up when you go left, if I let
go, what it's going to do is just going to reorder all of my pages here.
| | 01:30 | It's basically shuffling all of my pages.
| | 01:32 | That is not good.
| | 01:33 | Okay and I don't want to do that.
| | 01:34 | That is where you lead into problems here.
| | 01:36 | The reason why it's doing that is basically because you have
to have the odds on the right and the evens on the left.
| | 01:42 | So, it's assuming that you want to have one page up here and that is it.
| | 01:44 | I'm going to Undo that, Command-Z and Control-Z in Windows.
| | 01:48 | I'm going to Undo that.
| | 01:49 | Here is what I'm going to do.
| | 01:50 | We are going to pull up a little option here.
| | 01:52 | So, from the Pages palette menu I'm going to come
up to the menu on the side here, the Palette Menu.
| | 01:56 | Come down, you are going to notice a group of three
things down here that don't get a lot of use, I think.
| | 02:01 | Keep Spread Together, Hide Master Items and Allow Pages to Shuffle.
| | 02:05 | Now, Allow Pages to Shuffle is actually the program's mechanism for
keeping the odd pages on the right and put even pages on the left.
| | 02:13 | This is basically InDesign's power.
| | 02:15 | Okay. What we are going to do is turn it off, just for a little bit here,
I'm going to turn is off so we can actually reorder the pages ourselves.
| | 02:22 | So, once I turn that off, I'm going to come out here, what
I want to do is I'm going to take page 8, pull that up,
| | 02:27 | this isn't going to solve it, it's just going to help a little bit here.
| | 02:29 | I'm going to take you to page 8 and pull
it up, come just to the left of page 1.
| | 02:33 | Once again, I will see the double arrows in the Pages palette, let
go, this time though, something different is going to happen here.
| | 02:39 | You are going to notice that 3, 4, 5,
6, 7, 8, these pages all stay together.
| | 02:44 | Okay. But it kind of moved these pages
out a little bit, pages 1 and 8.
| | 02:49 | Now if you look, page 8 is now page 1, page 1 is now page 2.
| | 02:55 | So, InDesign is a little confused right now.
| | 02:57 | It's try trying to figure out what we are trying to do here.
| | 02:59 | Ultimately, we are just trying to get these two pages next to each other.
| | 03:02 | Okay. As a matter of fact, what I'm going to do is double-
click on page what is now page 1 in the palette here
| | 03:07 | and you should be able to see this is actually our back cover.
| | 03:11 | All right.
| | 03:11 | I'm going to zoom out in the document here, just to give you an idea.
| | 03:13 | So, Command-minus, Control-minus on Windows, and you can
basically see that I have my cover sitting right here now.
| | 03:19 | Our job is to get these two together.
| | 03:21 | So here is what we have to do.
| | 03:23 | These are number of page 1 and page 2.
| | 03:25 | So, to get them together I want to name
them according to what they need to be.
| | 03:29 | Page 1 technically needs to be page 8.
| | 03:32 | Page 2 need to be page 1.
| | 03:35 | Okay. So here is what we will do.
| | 03:36 | From page 1 here, and I know this sounds kind of
confusing, but this has to be 8, this has to be 1.
| | 03:42 | You will notice the arrows above; this is actually my section start.
| | 03:44 | I'm going to double-click on that.
| | 03:46 | Every first page in a document has this, you double-click
on it continue will open up the numbering section options.
| | 03:51 | What I'm going to do is this; I'm going to tell
it to actually start the page numbering at 8.
| | 03:56 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 03:59 | Now, I know we are almost there, you can kind of see out here, it
says 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, it follows the course down.
| | 04:05 | No pages change there, no pages shuffled.
| | 04:07 | So here is what we need to do now.
| | 04:08 | Page 9, which is actually, if you look
in the document, is the first page.
| | 04:13 | We have to tell that to be the first page, page 1.
| | 04:15 | So, what I'm going to do is double-click on that page and go to it.
| | 04:18 | I'm going to actually add a section start here.
| | 04:21 | So, I'm going to right-click on the page icon itself, if you
have a Mac, with a one-button mouse you can Control-click on it.
| | 04:28 | Come down here to Numbering Section Options, open that up.
| | 04:31 | Now, if you take a look it says, okay, we are going to start a section.
| | 04:35 | I want to start page numbering on this one at 1.
| | 04:39 | I'm going to leave the rest alone for right now.
| | 04:40 | I'm going to click OK and if you take
a look at it there, we are getting there.
| | 04:44 | It says, page 8, page 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.
| | 04:48 | Now, our next job is to get 8 next to 1.
| | 04:50 | With Allow Pages to Shuffle off, I can
now drag; drop it right to the left here.
| | 04:57 | You are going to notice a little arrow pushing to the left there.
| | 05:00 | There is a little arrow right there, once I get in and let
go that allows me to place the pages next to each other.
| | 05:06 | So, basically I can see that I now have 8 and 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7 and all my pages are numbered correctly.
| | 05:13 | One thing you could do right now is you could actually turn
Allow Pages to Shuffle back on and that would allow,
| | 05:18 | if you add extra pages, things to move around and renumber, et cetera.
| | 05:21 | So, I'm going to come back to the outside here, if
you take a look we have a lot of pages to shuffle.
| | 05:25 | I'm going to turn that back on.
| | 05:27 | That will give the power back to InDesign basically.
| | 05:30 | So, this is one way to be able to do this.
| | 05:32 | The next way I'm going to show you is involving a brand new document.
| | 05:35 | Okay? So, let's do this.
| | 05:38 | You can take "brochure_basemasters," close it
up, you don't need to save it in this position.
| | 05:41 | So, I'm going to close this and I won't save this.
| | 05:45 | You can save a copy if you'd like.
| | 05:46 | I'm going to reset my workspace, coming under Window>Workspace, go
back to Default so we can see all of the palettes out here pretty easily.
| | 05:53 | And I'm going to create a brand new document.
| | 05:55 | So, let's go to File>New>Document.
| | 05:57 | If you are starting from scratch here and you want
to create a document, here is how you do that.
| | 06:00 | There is a little bit easier way I think.
| | 06:02 | So Facing Pages is on, Facing Page doc, got a Letter size document.
| | 06:05 | You can create any size that you want.
| | 06:06 | I want to click OK.
| | 06:09 | Take a look; we have the document out here.
| | 06:11 | Now, what I want to do is this, I'm going to add a spread out here.
| | 06:13 | We have one page to start with.
| | 06:15 | I could have told it to do three right away, but I'm a little lazy, so.
| | 06:19 | From A-Master here, I'm going to take the whole spread, pull it
down below page 1 and let it go and I suddenly have three pages.
| | 06:26 | Here is what we will do: Pages palette, I want to take this
group out here, I want to open the whole thing up here.
| | 06:31 | So, lower left, going to grab the corner down here and pull it open.
| | 06:33 | And just so we have a little room to work,
what I want to do is this right away.
| | 06:36 | We are going to actually tell 2 and 3 to stay
together, we going to delete 1 and what InDesign is going
| | 06:42 | to do is it's going to shove these up and allow me to renumber them.
| | 06:46 | Watch this.
| | 06:47 | Pages 2 and 3 here, we have a command out in the
Pages palette menu out here called Keep Spread Together.
| | 06:54 | Now, here is what I want to do.
| | 06:55 | I'm going to actually check Keep Spread Together, what
that does is that basically locks this spread together.
| | 07:00 | If you take a look you have these brackets around here.
| | 07:03 | Now, watch this.
| | 07:03 | I'm going to come up to page 1 here, I'm going
to go on the page, I'm going to delete that.
| | 07:07 | I'm going to come down on the trash can here and hit delete.
| | 07:10 | And look what happened.
| | 07:12 | It literally locked those spreads together, I have got 1-2, et cetera.
| | 07:16 | What I can do is, let's say that you want a four page document out here.
| | 07:19 | I can actually take A-Master, drop it down below, there is a ton of
ways you can do this, drop it down below and suddenly I get this.
| | 07:25 | Okay. Now, here is what I want to do.
| | 07:27 | I want to start renumbering these things right away.
| | 07:30 | Because InDesign is, we have Allow Pages to Shuffle, if you take a
look at in the outside we have Allow Pages to Shuffle still on.
| | 07:36 | So what it is doing is saying, okay, odds
on the right and evens on the left.
| | 07:39 | We are going to fix that.
| | 07:41 | So what I want to do is this.
| | 07:43 | I'm going come up to page 1 here, I'm going to renumber that.
| | 07:45 | That is going to be page 4.
| | 07:47 | What is now page 2 is going to be page 1.
| | 07:49 | So I'm going to have 4, 1, 2, 3.
| | 07:51 | So, above page 1 double-click on the section start here.
| | 07:55 | I'm going to tell it to start page numbering at 4.
| | 07:58 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 08:01 | Suddenly things fall in line.
| | 08:03 | Now, 5, I need to change the number on it.
| | 08:05 | So, I'm going to actually double-click on 5 here and I'm going to
right-click on the page, Control-click if you have a one button mouse.
| | 08:11 | You will see numbering and section options.
| | 08:13 | I'm going to tell it to start a brand new section
but this page is going to start at page 1.
| | 08:19 | Now click OK.
| | 08:22 | And suddenly I have 4, 1, 2, 3.
| | 08:26 | Nice easy way to set up the documents.
| | 08:28 | Like I said, you can use either method to do this.
| | 08:31 | They both, in the Pages palette menu, the allow pages
to shuffle as well as keep spread together, can sort
| | 08:37 | of work together; there are some things they can do together.
| | 08:38 | Now, if I'm going to add for spreads out here, of
course I have to make them usually multiples of four.
| | 08:44 | The only thing I'm going to have to remember is that what is now the
back cover here, page 4, I've got to change that number manually.
| | 08:51 | Okay. So I have to go up there and if I have to make an eight page document
suddenly, it's going to be number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
| | 08:57 | and I have to come up to page 4 here
and manually change the number to 8.
| | 09:01 | This is just for the sake of being able to put things across
the spread and make it a little bit easier for yourself.
| | 09:07 | So, working with an initial spread is kind of a nice way to work
with the documents, it's not always going to be nice for you.
| | 09:12 | It's not always going to work for you.
| | 09:13 | Basically, it's not something that you are always going to want to
do but every once in a while it's a good thing to be able to do.
| | 09:17 | So, that is basically good for the master pages on that section.
| | 09:20 | Next thing we are going to talk about
is how to work with master page objects.
| | 09:24 | You can close up this untitled document; you don't have to save it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with master page objects| 00:00 | Now, keeping in the theme with master pages here, one
thing that I have to do an a regular basis is actually try
| | 00:07 | and move master items out on the pages in the document.
| | 00:10 | And this, you know, this gets a little bit sticky because when master page
elements, the things that are on a master page, they are completely locked.
| | 00:16 | You can't touch them out on the pages, typically.
| | 00:19 | Okay. I have opened up "brochure_basemasters.indd" document.
| | 00:22 | If you go into the exercise files folder, in the
Chapter 4 folder, you should see this one.
| | 00:26 | This is one that we have been working on with several of the
previous sessions that we have been going through in this chapter.
| | 00:31 | So, it basically has two master pages in it, if I look in
the Pages palette over here and it has two master pages.
| | 00:38 | This was done in the first section of
this chapter, I believe, "Based-on master."
| | 00:42 | So, I asked them to save it.
| | 00:44 | If yours looks a little bit different, that is okay.
| | 00:46 | All right?
| | 00:47 | So the "brochure_basemasters" is open, let's talk a little bit about this.
| | 00:50 | Come to page 4-5.
| | 00:51 | I'm going to come to page 4-5 here, and if you take a
look, I've got a bunch of master elements out here.
| | 00:56 | Now, I think my Coffee Companion, I have my
page numbers and I have the bars on the side.
| | 01:00 | From the first lesson we went through,
from the first section we went through,
| | 01:03 | we actually moved these objects right off the
guide just a little bit and then saved it.
| | 01:07 | If yours looks a little different or pushed up
a bit, don't worry about that, that is okay.
| | 01:10 | Here is what I'd like to do; I'd like to talk to you
about how to actually work with master items on the page.
| | 01:16 | Now, there are two ways to actually get
at these items; to be able to select them.
| | 01:20 | You can override them or you can detach them.
| | 01:23 | Now, there is kind of a big difference there.
| | 01:26 | Overriding - literally ways that I can
take any object on a page and override it.
| | 01:31 | Once it's been overridden, it means that I
can move it, I can change it, I can shape it,
| | 01:36 | but certain things are still linked back to the master page itself.
| | 01:40 | Certain things like box size, or frame size I
should say, rather, location, that sort of thing.
| | 01:47 | Those can still be linked back to, or associated
back with, the master elements.
| | 01:52 | Now, if you detach an object, which is a master
element, it's completely lost it's association
| | 01:57 | with the master page, which means I can do anything I want to it.
| | 02:00 | If I change the master item on the master page, like this sidebar for
instance, it won't change out here if I have detached it on the page.
| | 02:07 | So, there is two ways to do this.
| | 02:09 | Here is what I'd like to do, on page 5; I'm going to move over a bit here.
| | 02:12 | I'm going to use my spacebar to get to my Hand tool.
| | 02:14 | Move it over a little bit.
| | 02:16 | I'm going to select page 5 here.
| | 02:18 | Double-click on page 5; it should take me right to it.
| | 02:20 | We have a lot of master items out here, a lot, meaning three.
| | 02:23 | Okay. We have the Coffee Companion content
down here, have a page number and got the bar.
| | 02:28 | Here is what I decided.
| | 02:29 | I decided, you know what?
| | 02:31 | The bar out here, I want to leave room up top for another
image, so I want the bar to kind of stop about half way.
| | 02:37 | Okay? Here is what we can do, we can actually override that object.
| | 02:40 | Now, I'm going to show you the menu items, but
I want to actually show you just a shortcut.
| | 02:44 | It's so much easier to do.
| | 02:46 | From the Pages palette menu, come out to the side here by the arrow.
| | 02:49 | Take a look, are you going to see Override All Master Page Items.
| | 02:52 | What that is going to do is make all items overridden.
| | 02:55 | It's going to make them accessible, basically, only for this page.
| | 03:00 | If I do that and come out here, I will see little flash on
these objects here; this allows me to select all of these.
| | 03:05 | Okay. If I select these I can do whatever I
want to, delete them, move them, et cetera.
| | 03:09 | Now here is what I want to do, if I take this object right here.
| | 03:12 | Let's say I click on this object over here,
I'm going to use my spacebar to move over.
| | 03:15 | I'm going to grab the top here, that is the actual frame.
| | 03:18 | Pull it down just a little bit that way I'm
going to leave myself a little room up here.
| | 03:22 | Basically what is happening here is this.
| | 03:23 | I have just actually moved this object and I
decide I like that, let's keep it that way.
| | 03:28 | The rest of the objects though are still, if you take
a look, they are still associated with the master page.
| | 03:35 | What I want to do is I want to lock them back up so they don't move at all.
| | 03:38 | So I can't, you know, have the opportunity to move them.
| | 03:41 | I just want to get at the bar here.
| | 03:43 | So, what I have to do is this, if I select both of these, I'm
going to drag across with my black arrow, my Selection tool.
| | 03:49 | Come back to the Pages palette, come out to the menu item out here,
take a look and you are going to see Remove Selected Local Overrides.
| | 03:58 | Yeah, I know.
| | 03:59 | It's kind of a mouth full here.
| | 04:01 | Okay. Override All Master Page Items.
| | 04:03 | It overrode all of them, which means you can access them.
| | 04:06 | Remove is going to literally lock them
back to the master so we can't touch them.
| | 04:10 | So, like we first saw.
| | 04:11 | So, I see Remove Selected.
| | 04:13 | Now, if you just see Remove Local Overrides, basically what is going
to happen is that means you didn't select anything on the page.
| | 04:20 | With it selected, click on Remove Selected Local Overrides,
that locks those items back out so I can't touch them.
| | 04:26 | But I still have access to that bar on the side.
| | 04:29 | Kind of a nice little thing we can do right here.
| | 04:31 | All right.
| | 04:32 | Let's say, for the sake of argument, that I
don't want to do the menu items up there.
| | 04:35 | Okay. I want to use shortcuts to do this.
| | 04:37 | There is a lot of faster ways to do things.
| | 04:39 | What I want to do is this; I want to get us back to where we were.
| | 04:42 | Okay. So, I'm actually going to revert the documents.
| | 04:44 | We are going to go back.
| | 04:45 | I'm going to come to File>Revert and is this
highly irregular, but I'm going to go to Revert.
| | 04:48 | It's going to say, are you sure that you want to go back?
| | 04:50 | I'll say, yes, let's go back.
| | 04:52 | I should be taken right back, everything should be
back where it was, it's back on the last saved state.
| | 04:58 | All right.
| | 04:58 | Here is what we are going to do.
| | 04:59 | On page 5, I'm going to double click on page 5 to get it out there.
| | 05:01 | I'm going to fit that in the window, Control-0
on Windows and Command-0 on Mac.
| | 05:05 | Now, we are going to do the same thing here, but what I want to do is
this, I want to take the sidebar and I want to actually override that.
| | 05:12 | To do that, using shortcut keys, I'm going to hold down
Command and Shift on Mac, Control-Shift on Windows,
| | 05:18 | clicking with my Selection tool on the object will override that.
| | 05:23 | Now, that means I can move it, I can do whatever I want to.
| | 05:27 | Let's say, for instance, that this bar, I want to move over a little bit.
| | 05:29 | I don't want it to bleed. I want to kind of put it in the center over here.
| | 05:32 | Well, now with my Shift key, what I will do is just
move it over a little bit but kind of keep it in line.
| | 05:36 | Just get it right over there.
| | 05:37 | I think that looks pretty good.
| | 05:38 | So this page I am just trying to do something a little different.
| | 05:40 | Now, for instance, let's say I want to do this now.
| | 05:43 | I want to change the size of this object.
| | 05:45 | I'm going to actually take the frame and close it up a little bit.
| | 05:48 | I want to do it for every page that has this master item on it.
| | 05:53 | Here is what we will do.
| | 05:54 | This page has B-Master applied, if you look in the Pages palette.
| | 05:57 | What we just did by doing those shortcut keys
and clicking was we overrode this object.
| | 06:03 | Now that didn't detach it, that basically means that certain
things are still linked or associated with the master.
| | 06:09 | This may sound kind of weird, but just watch what happens here.
| | 06:12 | If I go back to B-Master, I'm going to double-click on that,
go back to B-Master; I am going to move over, spacebar down.
| | 06:17 | Click and drag over so you can see the right-hand page.
| | 06:20 | Here is what we will do.
| | 06:21 | I know it's in a different position.
| | 06:23 | That is because we overrode that object on
that page and we can do whatever we want.
| | 06:26 | But watch this.
| | 06:27 | I'm going to take this sidebar; I'm going to close it up
a little bit grabbing one of the bounding points out there.
| | 06:33 | I'm going to close up the frame a bit, just a crop on the picture.
| | 06:36 | Just so that we can the idea of the bar, but
we have some room up here for another picture.
| | 06:40 | And watch this; I'm going to go back to page 5 by
double-clicking on page 5 and watch what it did.
| | 06:47 | By overriding an object, Command-Shift on Mac,
Control-Shift Windows, and clicking on the object,
| | 06:53 | what it did was it made is so that you
could do anything that you wanted to it.
| | 06:57 | But it still has an association for certain things to the master page item.
| | 07:01 | Which means thinks like usually, honestly, usually
it's only the frame size itself and the position.
| | 07:06 | But if I move if I change the position of that object,
I have broken the link for the position for that object.
| | 07:11 | Okay? So it's kind of an interesting thing here.
| | 07:14 | So that basically means that now that this
is still, the frame itself is still attached
| | 07:19 | to the actual master page, the position of it is not attached anymore.
| | 07:23 | That element is not attached.
| | 07:24 | But if I were to come out here and actually change the
size of this one, it would finally detach that object
| | 07:30 | or that item, which is the frame size, from the master page.
| | 07:33 | Okay. I know, you know, a lot of this is, you know, basically clear at
mud, but when you work with overriding objects you just have to remember
| | 07:42 | that by using the shortcut keys you are overriding and not detaching.
| | 07:45 | That means that certain things or still associated.
| | 07:48 | If you decide that you actually do the override using the shortcut
keys and you don't want it to change when the master item changes,
| | 07:55 | with that object selected come back out to the Pages palette menu.
| | 07:59 | If you take a look, you are going to see Setach Selection from Master.
| | 08:03 | That will completely break the length for that object that the master page.
| | 08:07 | I'm going to go ahead and did that.
| | 08:08 | Detach Selection from Master.
| | 08:10 | Doesn't look like any of this changes, but if I go back to my B-
Master and I just decide to change anything - I will double-click
| | 08:15 | on B master - I'm going to use my spacebar to move over.
| | 08:18 | If I change this size of the frame now, I'm going
to open it up so it doesn't crop the photos.
| | 08:22 | With the Selection tool I will select it, come up
top, grab by the bounding point and pull it back open.
| | 08:28 | Now, if I go back out to page 5 by double-clicking, take a look,
nothing should change because I have completely detached that object.
| | 08:36 | Overriding and detaching are two separate things.
| | 08:39 | This is a great way for you to be able to actually change
something that needs to change on one page rather than going
| | 08:45 | to the master and have it change on all of the pages.
| | 08:47 | So, what I do a lot of times if I have, let's say, for instance, I need
to get rid of the Coffee Companion down here because I need to put
| | 08:54 | like an icon or a logo or something down here.
| | 08:57 | I can just basically use my shortcuts.
| | 08:59 | I can go Command-Shift-Click, Control-Shift-Click
on Windows, and just hit Delete.
| | 09:04 | What you have done is you have just basically gotten rid of that object,
there is no overriding, there is no detaching, it's basically just gone.
| | 09:11 | So that way if that object changes on the master page, which is B-Master,
| | 09:15 | it will have no effect on that object
anymore because it's gone from this page.
| | 09:19 | Now, one last thing I want to show you is just how to quickly
remove all of the overriding and detaching that you have done,
| | 09:25 | just in case you want to get back to where you were.
| | 09:28 | So, what I'd like to do is I going to move the page over a little bit here.
| | 09:30 | Spacebar down, click and drag over, I can see
that we have basically tortured this page enough
| | 09:34 | to where we have gotten rid of some objects, et cetera.
| | 09:37 | I decided I want to go back to square one;
I want to get it all back to where it was.
| | 09:41 | With page 5 selected from the Pages palette by double-
clicking, it kind of centers it out there for us
| | 09:46 | as well, I'm going to come back on the Pages palette menu.
| | 09:48 | On the outside you are actually going to see here until
the menu, you are going to see Remove All Local Overrides.
| | 09:53 | You got to be careful with this one because before we saw Remove Selected
Overrides, and that not only removes the overrides for the things
| | 10:00 | that we have selected on the page, this
will get everything back to where it was.
| | 10:05 | So, if I click on Remove All Local Overrides, take a look, basically
everything is back where it was and it's completely locked in position.
| | 10:12 | Okay. Which is sort of a good thing and sort of a bad thing.
| | 10:16 | I actually did not want that, so what I want to do is go ahead
and do an Edit>Undo so we can get it back to where it was.
| | 10:22 | That will kind of get it all back into position here.
| | 10:24 | So, I'm going to go ahead and do an Edit>Undo.
| | 10:27 | Basically we are back where we were.
| | 10:29 | So that is kind of a nice little thing that we can do right there.
| | 10:31 | So, working with master elements allows you the ability to come to a
page and either override or detach objects which are really great ways
| | 10:39 | to be able to work with pages that, you know, you need some extra
space, you can't do that page number, or that sort of thing.
| | 10:45 | Okay. That is a quick easy way to work.
| | 10:47 | You can either use the menus in the Pages palette or
you can use the short cuts that I have shown you here
| | 10:50 | or a combination of both which is what I typically wind up doing.
| | 10:54 | So, that is about it for working with master page items.
| | 10:56 | Next we are going to talk about auto flow of text.
| | 10:58 | You can close up "brochure_basemasters;" you don't have to save this.
| | 11:02 | We will work on the next one.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Autoflow of text and master pages| 00:00 | Another topic I get a lot of questions on when it comes to master
pages is working with the autoflow of text or trying to get a lot of text
| | 00:07 | out on the page automatically, but doing it in such a way that
it automatically lays out the pages for us as far as number
| | 00:14 | of columns and where the text needs to go on the pages.
| | 00:17 | This method I'm about to show you is really good for consistent
pages, maybe like a left-hand page and a right-hand page
| | 00:23 | and have maybe different columns on each, maybe three
columns on the left, two on the right, et cetera,
| | 00:27 | and possibly even split so you can put ads and things like that in there.
| | 00:31 | This allows you basically to go through and have a more
flexible workflow and to actually work a little faster.
| | 00:37 | So utilizing the master text frame we can do that.
| | 00:39 | I want to take you through that.
| | 00:40 | So what we're going to do is create a brand-new document, we're going to
get it set up so that we can do it, and then we're going to flow some text.
| | 00:46 | We're going to place some text and actually have it thread for us.
| | 00:48 | This going to involve a couple of things you've
probably seen before, the autoflow of text,
| | 00:52 | et cetera, but a little bit of different twist on it here.
| | 00:55 | So let's go to File>New. Come to Document.
| | 00:58 | Couple things just to make sure we've got checked here.
| | 01:00 | I'm going to do Facing Pages.
| | 01:01 | You'll see Master Text Frame right below it.
| | 01:04 | What this does is it puts a text frame on the master page
and if you have a facing page document, it will thread
| | 01:11 | from the left-hand page to the right-hand page.
| | 01:14 | So it's just allowing you to have text frames out there automatically.
| | 01:18 | Let's set up two columns.
| | 01:19 | I'll do a two column layout here with a gutter of a quarter of an inch.
| | 01:22 | Using my Shift key to - actually click the up arrow there will go faster.
| | 01:27 | Looks good.
| | 01:27 | Let's click OK.
| | 01:29 | With the page out here here's what we're going to do.
| | 01:30 | We're going to go take a look at the master page, this
is to give you an idea of what's going on here.
| | 01:34 | So double-click on A-Master in the Pages palette over here.
| | 01:37 | I'm going to click on the left-hand side over here and what I can notice is
| | 01:40 | that InDesign has automatically
placed a text frame out here for me.
| | 01:44 | On the right-hand page as well I can click and see it happening as well.
| | 01:48 | Now, what I want to do is this.
| | 01:49 | I'm going to turn on my text threads so I can see those.
| | 01:51 | So come up to View in the menus, come down to Show Text Threads, and
with any one of these text frames selected, either one I should say,
| | 01:58 | you're going to see the thread between them, which is kind of nice.
| | 02:01 | Now, an interesting thing here is this.
| | 02:02 | InDesign just set up two text frames that will
flow text automatically between these master pages.
| | 02:09 | Now, if I look at the left-hand text frame here - what I'm going to do is
I'm going to click and drag it just to give you an idea of what's
| | 02:13 | going on here. I'm going to click and drag.
| | 02:15 | With my text frame edges on - if I move
this over just a little built further -
| | 02:19 | you're going to notice that this text frame is actually dividing in the
two columns automatically for us, which is kind of a nice little thing.
| | 02:25 | So both text frames are automatically two columns.
| | 02:27 | What I'm going to do is I'm going to move this back
over here, and here's what we're going to do.
| | 02:31 | If we were just to go out to Page 1, if I
double-click on Page 1 in the Pages palette.
| | 02:35 | If I look out here I'm going to see two columns hanging out as
far as my column guides, and my margin guides are concerned.
| | 02:41 | I try and select things on here.
| | 02:42 | I'm not going to select anything because don't
forget, the master items are completely locked.
| | 02:46 | Now if I were to do a - let's say place some text - and have it
flow, in here, there would already be a text frame for me to use.
| | 02:53 | Now, it's not totally necessary.
| | 02:55 | Because if I were to do an autoflow of text it would just look at my
column guides and my margin guides here and just follow them along.
| | 03:02 | But using the master text frame there's some interesting things we can do.
| | 03:05 | Let's come back to the master page here.
| | 03:07 | I'm going to double-click on A-Master.
| | 03:09 | Now, we've got the text frames hanging out.
| | 03:10 | Here's what we're going to do.
| | 03:11 | We're going to pretend that we're going to create something like a magazine.
| | 03:14 | And the magazine is going to have kind of a let's say sections to it.
| | 03:17 | Okay. The sections are each going to have a distinct look to them.
| | 03:21 | Now, in this section what we want to do is this.
| | 03:22 | On the right-hand side we're going to have two
columns of text that span the page, that's fine.
| | 03:26 | But on the left-hand side we're gone that have two text frames
that are kind of cut in the middle here where we can put an ad.
| | 03:32 | So here's what we're going to do.
| | 03:33 | I'm going to take the top of the text frame - grab
the bounding box - I'm going to pull it down a bit.
| | 03:40 | You know, we could draw guides out here, I could get very
exact on this, but I'm going to be a little bit more free form
| | 03:44 | with this so we can actually have a little advantage to this.
| | 03:47 | So what I want to do is we're going to create another text frame
up top here, we're going to get that text frame in the mix.
| | 03:51 | In other words, we're going to have it autoflow or have
it flow rather and thread these three frames together.
| | 03:57 | So with my Text tool selected, come up top.
| | 04:00 | Now, an interesting thing about the Text tool, which took me a long
time to learn, was it's going to be rough for me to pick this out.
| | 04:06 | But in the actual cursor - I don't normally jog cursors around -
| | 04:09 | but if you look at the cursor you're going to notice a little
teeny line about a third of the way up in the I-beam there.
| | 04:15 | That is the top edge of the text frame.
| | 04:17 | So if I get that little line lined up with the actual margin
guides, click and drag, that is the top edge of the frame.
| | 04:24 | So what I want to do is I'm just going to open it up a bit.
| | 04:27 | What I want to do is with this text frame it's a single column text frame.
| | 04:30 | I want to turn that into a two-column text frame.
| | 04:33 | So I'm going to come up to Object>Text Frame Options -even though
there's a shortcut on that, Command-B, Control-B on Windows -
| | 04:40 | and we're just going to say, I want this to be two
columns and a gutter of a quarter of an inch.
| | 04:44 | So that's fine.
| | 04:45 | Let's click OK.
| | 04:46 | I now have two columns in this text frame.
| | 04:50 | Although it's kind of hard to tell, I know but - anyway.
| | 04:52 | Next thing I want to do is this.
| | 04:54 | I'm going to go back to my Selection tool.
| | 04:55 | We're going to pretend that we actually have these with an ad in the
middle here and we're going to place it to a frame out in the middle here
| | 05:01 | that just kind of gives an indication that
a picture for an ad is going to go there.
| | 05:05 | So I'm going to grab my actual - come over
here, I'm going to grab my Rectangle Frame tool.
| | 05:09 | It's got an X in it for a reason - that way you
can kind of tell it's got a picture in it.
| | 05:11 | It it's just kind of a visual clue.
| | 05:13 | Open that up a bit.
| | 05:14 | I'm just going to get it to go in there.
| | 05:16 | This is kind of telling me, you know, that an ad would probably go here.
| | 05:19 | Now, what I want to do is I want to have this first text frame.
| | 05:22 | I'm choosing my Selection tool from the toolbox.
| | 05:25 | I'm going to have this first text frame be a part of the thread.
| | 05:28 | So when we flow text it's going to go from
here down to here across to the right page.
| | 05:34 | So do that, I'm going to click on this text frame.
| | 05:37 | We're just setting this up so it's going to
automatically know where to go when it flows text.
| | 05:41 | I can see my outport hanging out in the
lower right-hand corner of this text frame.
| | 05:45 | I'm going to click, let go - just clicking and
letting go - and I've got my loaded text cursor.
| | 05:50 | I'm going to come down to this text frame
down here, I should see my link icon.
| | 05:53 | Once I click in the middle of that text frame, anywhere
out here, I've actually just threaded those together.
| | 05:59 | Basically what we're doing is by setting up the automatic text frame.
| | 06:02 | It drew some text frames and then we can go in and modify
and kind of get the layout to look the way we want it.
| | 06:07 | This is really good like I said for things like longer
brochures, books, magazines, that sort of stuff.
| | 06:14 | Now, what I want to do is we're going to get our text on the page.
| | 06:16 | So we've got the flow going here.
| | 06:17 | I can see with my text frames on and with my text
threads showing I can see all the threads happening.
| | 06:22 | Come out to Page 1.
| | 06:23 | I'm going to double-click on Page 1 is in the Pages palette.
| | 06:26 | Once again, since those text frames were placed on
the master page if I try and select them I can't.
| | 06:30 | But what we're going to do is this.
| | 06:32 | We're going to place the text, have it autoflow, and
you're going to see what happens with the text itself.
| | 06:37 | So I'm going to come up to File>Place, shortcut
is Command-D, Control-D on Windows.
| | 06:43 | You should be able to find a Chapter 4 folder.
| | 06:45 | There we go.
| | 06:46 | We're going to find the "coffee_text.txt" file inside of that there.
| | 06:50 | You don't have to Show your Import Options, that's fine.
| | 06:52 | This is just is a regular old text file.
| | 06:53 | I'm going to click Open.
| | 06:56 | If you get a dialogue box that talks about missing
fonts, that sort of thing, you can go ahead
| | 06:59 | and fix that by clicking Find Font and getting it fixed.
| | 07:03 | What I want to do is this.
| | 07:04 | Come over here.
| | 07:05 | You always - whenever you placed text in here -- I know a lot of you
noticed - but you got to watch your icons, you got to watch your cursors.
| | 07:10 | This is a loaded text cursor.
| | 07:11 | This means if I see it in actually a corner on it
that means it's going to, it's ready to draw text frames.
| | 07:17 | But if I come inside of a text frame that was on a master page you're
going to notice right here, you're going to see parenthesis shows up.
| | 07:23 | This is actually pretty cool.
| | 07:24 | Because what it's going to do is it's going to
automatically let us put the text inside of it.
| | 07:28 | And here we're going to put another little trick on this.
| | 07:31 | I wanted to autoflow the text.
| | 07:32 | I want all the text out here.
| | 07:34 | So what I want to do is I'm going to hold
down the Shift key, I've got my autoflow.
| | 07:37 | I can come anywhere inside of here.
| | 07:39 | The text frames already there, that's what the parentheses are telling us.
| | 07:42 | So click with the Shift key down.
| | 07:45 | If you take a look at the Pages palette on the right-hand
side you're going to notice that we now have three pages.
| | 07:50 | I'm going to scroll down them, got my spacebar
down and I'm going to click with my Hand and drag down.
| | 07:54 | And take a look at what it did for us.
| | 07:57 | All of these text frames were set up on the master page.
| | 08:00 | The left-hand master page had two text frames
split in the middle with a graphics box here.
| | 08:05 | So it's automatically flowing, or linking,
or threading between these two here
| | 08:09 | and then automatically coming up to the third page on the right-hand side.
| | 08:13 | Utilizing that master text frame can actually be a really nice
thing to use because it gives us a lot of opportunities to set up,
| | 08:20 | maybe a little bit longer document and kind of get
things basically set the way we want them.
| | 08:24 | That way you can set up different master pages
for different sections and just get the text out
| | 08:28 | and start to flow it and start to work between each section.
| | 08:31 | So that is great way, like I said,
| | 08:32 | to use the master text frame option.
| | 08:34 | There's all sorts of things we can do with it.
| | 08:36 | You got to make sure, though, that those two text
frames are threaded together just to get it to work.
| | 08:41 | So in this section we can close up this untitled document.
| | 08:43 | Next thing we're going to talk about is using margins and columns and how
to actually change things so that the text frames themselves change.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing margins and columns| 00:00 | When working with master pages a lot of times you want to be able to
change your mind as you kind of go along, and that's totally possible.
| | 00:07 | We can apply master pages, we can reapply masters, but sometimes we
want to actually change the number of columns on a master page
| | 00:14 | or, a big one a lot of people run across, is suddenly you realize that,
you know, you've developed this as a special size, the page size itself,
| | 00:21 | and it suddenly needs to be A4 or Letter, just something different.
| | 00:25 | I'm going to show you a way to be able to do
something like that, to get it to work for you.
| | 00:28 | So first thing we're going to do is this, open up from your exercise
files in the Chapter 4 folder there is the "brochure.indd."
| | 00:34 | We're going to open up that file.
| | 00:36 | I'm on page 2-3 right now and I've basically fit
it out here so you can see what I'm looking at.
| | 00:41 | What we're going to do is we're going to go through and actually going to
change the number of columns on the page, just to show you how this works.
| | 00:48 | So we're going to come back to the master page
because that's where our columns were set.
| | 00:51 | So let's double-click on A-Master in the Pages palette on the right.
| | 00:55 | Take a look out here.
| | 00:56 | All I have are some columns out here.
| | 00:57 | We don't have any text frames, nothing sitting inside of here.
| | 01:01 | Now, if you flow your text on the pages and you use the
column and the column guides to actually get this to work,
| | 01:07 | it's a nice easy way to get things to
change into two or three columns, et cetera.
| | 01:12 | So before we change the number of columns here - let's say we
want a three-column layout - there's something we've got to do.
| | 01:18 | Come under Layout in the menus up top,
we're going to come to Layout Adjustment.
| | 01:21 | It's kind of a little known feature that
is very useful in certain situations.
| | 01:26 | If you turn this on, if you enable Layout Adjustment,
what it allows you to do is to either resize the page
| | 01:33 | or change the column or margin guides and things are going to move with it.
| | 01:38 | In other words, your text frames are actually going to
resize, your number of columns is going to change,
| | 01:43 | and your text frames' number of columns is going to change as well.
| | 01:46 | It's going to reposition objects just to fit them on the page.
| | 01:49 | This is an excellent feature for being able to change things.
| | 01:52 | Once you turn it on if you take a look
there's some features we should look at.
| | 01:55 | You've got Snap Zone.
| | 01:56 | That says that if an object, let's say this sidebar picture here
is within .02 blah, blah, blah inches from a guide, margin, et cetera.
| | 02:06 | It's actually going to snap to it and reposition that object.
| | 02:09 | Now, if you have objects kind of hanging out here that are a little
bit farther away you can increase what's called the "Snap Zone."
| | 02:14 | That just means it's going to a greater chance of grabbing
that object and moving it with the page as you change it.
| | 02:20 | Allow Graphics and Groups to Resize basically means if I change the
page size for instance, the graphic, this sidebar, will actually resize,
| | 02:29 | it will change it's percent size, if I have this checked, to fit the page.
| | 02:33 | Allowing Ruler Guides to Move, just what it sounds like.
| | 02:36 | When your page repositions or resizes those guys are going to move with it
and everything is going to kind of keep coordinated with each other.
| | 02:44 | They're going to kind all keep the same reference.
| | 02:47 | Now Ignore Ruler Guide Alignments basically says, if you
have guides on the page, like we have some guides out here,
| | 02:53 | if the guides aren't really affecting layout, if maybe you
put some out there you're not using, if you turn this on,
| | 02:59 | if there are any guides that are basically not out there, not working
for you, you can turn that on and that will kind of ignore them.
| | 03:06 | That way objects won't snap to them and won't move around the page.
| | 03:09 | Now, our guides out there are actually lining things up for us.
| | 03:12 | I'm going to turn this off.
| | 03:14 | Ignore Object and Layer Locks, if you have anything locked it's
going to say I don't really care, I'm going to move that thing for you.
| | 03:19 | So we're pretty much set.
| | 03:20 | A lot of times you don't have to touch a lot in
here unless you have a specific purpose for that.
| | 03:24 | So let's click OK.
| | 03:26 | Once that's turned on we have the ability to change.
| | 03:29 | Now, first things first.
| | 03:30 | We're going to do a simple change here.
| | 03:32 | We're going to change number of columns on the page, okay?
| | 03:35 | So we've already got our text out there
on Pages 2 and 3 but here's what we'll do.
| | 03:38 | With your master page selected - I'm going to do it for both pages here so
I want to make sure that both pages are selected in the Pages palette -
| | 03:46 | come to Layout, open the menus, we're going to go to Margins and
Columns, it's going to change for all of our pages here now.
| | 03:52 | Now I'm going to say I want to do 3 columns
here, so I want to increase it to 3.
| | 03:56 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 03:58 | Take a look.
| | 03:58 | On the master page it's changed the column guides.
| | 04:01 | That's fine.
| | 04:02 | Now if you take a look, we're going to go out to
Pages 2 and 3 here, I'm going to double click on 2-3.
| | 04:06 | And if you look you've basically have just changed the column
guides out there as well and even the text flowing in there.
| | 04:13 | Now we had a little bit of problem right down here.
| | 04:15 | That's okay.
| | 04:16 | That's basically because it was trying to snap to the side.
| | 04:18 | I can quickly move that and make that pretty much work.
| | 04:22 | Now, last thing I do want to show you is this.
| | 04:24 | I'm going to go back to the master page, I'm going to double-click on
A-Master.
| | 04:28 | What I want to do is, we're going to grab these two objects here.
| | 04:30 | I'm going to fix this really quick.
| | 04:31 | I'll pull the guide over, get it to snap to the side,
and I'll get the actual page number here to snap over.
| | 04:36 | Kind of a nice easy fix there.
| | 04:38 | Now last thing's this.
| | 04:39 | That's great for being able to change guides.
| | 04:42 | The one thing you really can't do with this, though, is that in the
previous portions of this chapter, in Master Pages I actually talked
| | 04:49 | about how to move your column guides themselves to make unbalanced columns.
| | 04:53 | If you move your column guides the layout adjustment
won't help you, won't move your text frames on your page.
| | 04:59 | So that's something you've got to kind of just watch for.
| | 05:01 | Now last things here is this.
| | 05:03 | Suppose we want to change page size.
| | 05:06 | You'll be surprised to know that this is an 8 1/2 x 11 page.
| | 05:08 | This isn't a spread, it's got a different page size to it.
| | 05:11 | So here's what we'll do.
| | 05:11 | Come up to File, come on down to Document Setup.
| | 05:15 | If you look inside of here you're going to notice that
it's actually a width of 7 1/2 and a height of 8 1/2.
| | 05:21 | Suppose I want this to be an 8 1/2 x 11 page.
| | 05:23 | With Layout Adjustment under Layout still turned on, it's going to stay
on for this document, for the time being, I'll come under Page Size
| | 05:31 | and I'm going to say, you know, what, let's
actually do a letter-size page here instead.
| | 05:35 | It's going to change the page dimensions with Layout Adjustment on.
| | 05:38 | If I click OK and take a look.
| | 05:40 | Look what it did to my layout out here.
| | 05:43 | Basically tried to readjust things.
| | 05:44 | Now it's not going to be perfect.
| | 05:45 | I'm not going to tell you it's always going to
work and everything's going to be great,
| | 05:47 | but it did a really good job of trying
to stretch things and work with things.
| | 05:51 | If I come over to the Pages palette and double-click
on 2-3 I can see that my text has already reflowed.
| | 05:57 | Columns are the right height.
| | 05:58 | Look at this picture on the side over here.
| | 06:00 | This picture actually changed size.
| | 06:03 | If I go back to the master page by double clicking on A-Master
and take a look, come back to the actual picture over here -
| | 06:09 | I'm going to choose my white arrow by clicking on
the A key here, that'll quickly get me there -
| | 06:13 | and if I click on the object here I can actually see up
in the Control palette that my percentage has changed.
| | 06:19 | So it changed the size and it's also snapped it in, so it's still the
height of the page itself off on the bleed guides out there.
| | 06:25 | And one thing to watch out for is if you're
going to do a layout adjustment like that,
| | 06:29 | if you tell it in layout adjustment to let the graphics resize it'll do it.
| | 06:34 | But it'll only do it if the graphic is touching
column guides, margin guides, on three sides.
| | 06:39 | Okay. If I had this image out here just kind of literally -
| | 06:42 | let me select this thing -
| | 06:43 | if I had this thing kind of floating out
here like this it wouldn't resize it.
| | 06:47 | It's got to be touching some guides on at least three sides.
| | 06:50 | Okay. So that'll kind of work for us.
| | 06:52 | I'm going to undo what I just did there.
| | 06:53 | So Edit>undo, Command-Z, Control-Z. So you can easily go and resize pages.
| | 06:58 | You do have to go back and just kind of double
check that everything's in the correct place.
| | 07:02 | You can see down here that it tried to figure out where it should put that.
| | 07:05 | It didn't do such a, you know, horrible job; but
I would probably go in and just kind of fix that.
| | 07:09 | But it makes it a lot easier than having to like
copy, paste, drag and drop and rebuild this document.
| | 07:15 | So enabling Layout Adjustment allows us to do that.
| | 07:17 | The last thing I do want to do is I usually try turn
this thing off just kind of as a safety measure.
| | 07:23 | It's only doing it for this document, which is fine.
| | 07:25 | But come under Layout>Layout Adjustment.
| | 07:27 | I'm going to turn it off.
| | 07:28 | You don't have to.
| | 07:29 | But I'll turn it off, I'll click OK.
| | 07:31 | If I ever need to use it again, I'm always going to turn it back on and
utilize it for any document you're in, which is a great thing to do.
| | 07:37 | So that basically works with Layout Adjustment.
| | 07:40 | Go ahead and close "brochure" without saving
that way we can use it for our next section.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Section starts, prefixes and page numbering| 00:00 | When working with documents and master pages as we've been doing
through this whole chapter, a lot of times you're going to want to be able
| | 00:05 | to change the page numbering on pages to
reflect certain things like Table of Contents,
| | 00:11 | breaks in the middle of a catalog for a sales section, all sorts of things.
| | 00:16 | So why don't we get started by going to the exercise files
folder and Chapter 4 folder, opening up "brochure.indd."
| | 00:22 | This is the one we used in the last section.
| | 00:25 | I told you not to save it, so hopefully yours doesn't
look very much different from what I have on screen here.
| | 00:30 | What we're going to do is we're going to change the page
numbering and do just a couple different things.
| | 00:34 | I want to talk to you about sections,
creating sections, as well as using prefixes.
| | 00:40 | Sections allows you to take - let's say for instance you had a
magazine that had sections in it or a book that had chapters in it.
| | 00:46 | A lot of times what you'll see is at the top of the page or even down
at the bottom down here you'll see something like, you know, Chapter 1.
| | 00:53 | And that will span across the first chapter.
| | 00:55 | The second chapter will say Chapter 2 down here.
| | 00:58 | Now, you can do that just by typing it on the page,
that's fine, or we can use something called Sections.
| | 01:03 | Really a great way to do that.
| | 01:04 | The other thing we're going to learn is how to actually create a prefix.
| | 01:07 | A prefix is something like - let's say you had a table of contents section
| | 01:10 | and you wanted the page number on the
page to actually say something like TOC-1.
| | 01:16 | The prefix itself would be TOC-, and then it would number it for you.
| | 01:20 | So we're going to do both of these.
| | 01:22 | First things first, though.
| | 01:23 | This is only a four page document.
| | 01:24 | If you look at your Pages palette on the side over
- let's go do a quick scroll up and down here.
| | 01:28 | I can see I've only got four pages.
| | 01:30 | We need a few more pages to work with here so
I want to make this an eight page document.
| | 01:34 | So here's what I'd like you to do.
| | 01:35 | We're going to come to Page 3, just double-click on it
to kind of get to that page, make sure it's selected.
| | 01:41 | I'm going to come down here to my page icon, Create
New Page holding down Option on Mac, Alt on Windows.
| | 01:46 | I'll click.
| | 01:46 | That will give me the Insert Pages dialogue box.
| | 01:50 | Now we're going to create an eight page document,
so I need four more pages.
| | 01:53 | So I'm going to say I want four more after Page 3 - that's
why we selected it because it automatically put it in there.
| | 01:59 | We could have just selected it down here.
| | 02:00 | And based on A-Master.
| | 02:02 | Go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:04 | And if I take a look inside of here I'll be able to see
that I've got all eight pages now sitting inside of here.
| | 02:09 | It's just going to give us a little bit,
you know, better idea of how this works.
| | 02:12 | Now the rest of the pages don't have text on them.
| | 02:14 | That's fine.
| | 02:14 | We can flow the text.
| | 02:15 | We're concentrating on the sections and the prefixes right now.
| | 02:19 | So here's what we're going to do.
| | 02:20 | I'm going to scroll up a bit, I'm going to grab my spacebar, click on the
spacebar, click and drag down here to get up to the previous page.
| | 02:26 | If you take a look we've got Pages 2 and 3 right here, that's what I'm on.
| | 02:30 | Now let's say that we add sections to this document.
| | 02:33 | The first section is going to be called "Tea Flavors,"
the second section might be called "Coffee Flavors."
| | 02:37 | And I want that to show up at the bottom of the page.
| | 02:40 | To do that we could go back to our master
page and put in an automatic section start
| | 02:45 | out there basically saying I can control what this says on the page itself.
| | 02:51 | So on the master page I will put this automatic section, and
when I come out to the page out here I can say, "Please say Tea Flavors,"
| | 02:59 | and what it'll do is it'll just automatically put it in there for us.
| | 03:02 | It's almost like an automatic page number but
instead of a page number it's going to be some text.
| | 03:06 | So let's go back to the master page here.
| | 03:08 | I'm going to double-click on A-Master from the Pages palette.
| | 03:11 | Should be able to see my master page.
| | 03:13 | Here's what we'll do.
| | 03:14 | I'm going to come down lower left on the left-hand side page here.
| | 03:16 | I'm going to scroll in a bit on the page number, that text frame.
| | 03:20 | Command-Spacebar bar Mac, Control-Spacebar bar on Windows.
| | 03:22 | I'm going to click drag to zoom.
| | 03:24 | I'm going to get my cursor in there.
| | 03:26 | I got my black arrow selected so double-click to get my cursor in there.
| | 03:30 | Here's what we're going to do.
| | 03:30 | We're going to put something called a section inside of here.
| | 03:33 | So just do this for me.
| | 03:34 | Just hit your spacebar a couple times to give ourselves a little space.
| | 03:37 | We could do Tab, there's all sorts of things we could do.
| | 03:40 | And we're going to put our section marker in there.
| | 03:42 | Okay. This is a placeholder so that when we get out
to the document itself we can tell it what to say.
| | 03:48 | So with your cursor in there we're going to come up to Type.
| | 03:50 | You can also right-click right where your cursor is and say
Insert Special Character and you will see Section Marker.
| | 03:57 | Go ahead and click.
| | 03:58 | And it's going to put the generic word "Section" in there.
| | 04:02 | Now like I said, this is a placeholder.
| | 04:04 | It won't even show up on the page until we put something in there.
| | 04:06 | So here's what we'll do.
| | 04:07 | You can see how it took on the formatting of this page number here.
| | 04:10 | So what I want to do - I don't want to make it bold.
| | 04:12 | So select it, come to your Control palette up top.
| | 04:15 | You've got your Character formatting up there
or your Character palette, doesn't matter.
| | 04:19 | It says Myriad Pro Bold.
| | 04:20 | Let's do something like Myriad Pro Italic or even - let's do Light Italic.
| | 04:25 | That's kind of nice.
| | 04:27 | That looks pretty good.
| | 04:29 | Okay. So we've got our placeholder section in there.
| | 04:31 | What I want to do is I'm going to come across the page here and kind of
put the same thing on the right-hand side, on the right-hand page.
| | 04:37 | So Command-Option-0 will get me to fit in the window.
| | 04:39 | Control-Alt-0 will actually do it on Windows.
| | 04:42 | On the right-hand side - just to give you a little practice here,
| | 04:44 | you can try this.
| | 04:44 | I'm going to zoom in a bit, Command-Spacebar,
Control-Spacebar in Windows.
| | 04:49 | What I'm going to do is I'm just going to actually put our section in there.
| | 04:52 | So I'll come up to Type>Insert Special Character>Section,
hit my spacebar a couple times and I'm going to reformat that.
| | 05:00 | We could have Copy/Paste, that's fine.
| | 05:01 | I'm going to do Myriad Pro Light Italic.
| | 05:04 | Copy/Paste works as well.
| | 05:06 | Now that we have our placeholder out - here let me
zoom back out, Command-Option-0, Control-Alt-0.
| | 05:11 | We're going to come out to our page and take a look.
| | 05:15 | Let's come to Page 2-3 by double-clicking on
the 2-3 numbers down there underneath the pages.
| | 05:20 | If you take a look at the page it's kind of interesting.
| | 05:21 | The section marker doesn't show up unless
you tell it to put something on the page.
| | 05:27 | Like I said, it's a placeholder.
| | 05:28 | Here's how we do it.
| | 05:29 | On Page 2 what I'd like to have it say is "Tea Flavors.
| | 05:33 | We're going to have the - these two pages right here are actually
going to be the tea flavor pages so I want the section to reflect that.
| | 05:38 | So the way we do this is I'm going to double-
click on Page 2 to make sure I'm on that page.
| | 05:43 | On the page icon itself I'm going to right-click.
| | 05:46 | If you have a Mac with a one button-mouse, Control-click right on the page.
| | 05:50 | You're going to see Numbering and Section Options.
| | 05:52 | Let's open that up.
| | 05:53 | You take a look inside of here.
| | 05:56 | Now I don't necessarily want to change the page numbering.
| | 05:59 | You know, we could do that.
| | 05:59 | I could say start it at Page 6 or something.
| | 06:02 | It doesn't really matter.
| | 06:03 | I can even tell the style to be Roman numerals,
which we might do in just a little bit here.
| | 06:08 | What I'd really like to do is something called the Section Marker.
| | 06:11 | This only comes into effect when you actually
put a section mark on the page or on the master.
| | 06:16 | So when it's blank there's nothing on the page.
| | 06:18 | But if I come in here and I say - let's type in "Tea
Flavors," something like that - watch what happens.
| | 06:26 | I click OK.
| | 06:27 | Take a look out on my page, look what it does.
| | 06:31 | First of all look in your Pages palette.
| | 06:33 | If you look in the Pages palette on the right
you're going to notice the little arrow above.
| | 06:36 | That's telling me that I have a section started here.
| | 06:39 | Now, section, interestingly enough, can be a couple things.
| | 06:43 | It can be a page number, it could be a section marker, it could
be a combo of both, there's a bunch of things it could be.
| | 06:49 | But that's telling me I've done something here.
| | 06:51 | Now if you look on the pages you're going to see from Page 2 on.
| | 06:54 | As a matter of fact if you scroll down, you'll be able
to see that all your pages out here have "Tea Flavors."
| | 07:00 | That's what the section marking does for us.
| | 07:02 | It doesn't say anything until I go to the
page and start a section and say let's do it.
| | 07:06 | Now here's what I'd like to do.
| | 07:07 | Down here on this Page 4 and 5 I want to change it to say something
like "Coffee Flavors," so this is the coffee flavor section.
| | 07:13 | This is great for just sections of a magazine
or a book or something like that.
| | 07:19 | I've done this for business reports and things like that.
| | 07:22 | Come to Page 4, double-click.
| | 07:23 | Same thing.
| | 07:24 | I'm going to right-click, we're going to tell
it what to say in the section marker.
| | 07:27 | Control-click on a Mac with one-button
mouse, Numbering and Section Options.
| | 07:32 | In our section marker I'm going to say "Coffee Flavors."
| | 07:35 | Type in "Coffee Flavors."
| | 07:37 | Click OK. Here's what you just did.
| | 07:42 | You basically said from this page on we're going to have it say
"Coffee Flavors" in the section marker where the section marker was.
| | 07:49 | So if I scroll down here - I'm going to use my - I've got a control wheel.
| | 07:52 | You can also use your spacebar here.
| | 07:55 | I'm going to scroll down, and I should be able to see then 6-7 and all
the way down it should say "Coffee Flavors," which is kind of nice.
| | 08:01 | So those are sections.
| | 08:03 | They allow you to actually set up sections of your document.
| | 08:05 | It's a section marker usually done on the
master page just so we can get it out there.
| | 08:09 | Double-click back on 4-5 just so we can get to the page.
| | 08:12 | Next thing I want to do is this.
| | 08:13 | Back up on 2-3 I want to go through and we're
going to talk about prefixes and how do that.
| | 08:18 | So in the Page palette here I'm going to scroll up a bit.
| | 08:20 | Coming to Page 2-3.
| | 08:22 | You know what?
| | 08:22 | The whole idea of scrolling in this thing kind of drives me crazy at
times because if you have let's, you know, an 80-something page document,
| | 08:29 | a hundred and some page document you're
going to be scrolling for days to do this.
| | 08:33 | I want to show you a quick way to get rid of that.
| | 08:35 | If you come out here and you right-click anywhere in the blank area -
| | 08:38 | basically if you have a mouse with one button you can
Control-click out there - you're going to see Palette Options.
| | 08:44 | Click Palette Options.
| | 08:46 | Take a look inside of here.
| | 08:47 | What I can do is I can say for my Pages area
I don't want to show these icons vertically.
| | 08:52 | That basically mean it's going to show them
horizontally and kind of tile them in here.
| | 08:56 | So if I turn that off and click OK I can start
to see all my pages a little bit clearer in here.
| | 09:02 | I like to look at them this way because
that way I don't have to scroll forever.
| | 09:05 | As long as you get the understanding or you get the
concept of left and right pages and you can see the spreads.
| | 09:10 | All right.
| | 09:11 | Let's go back to Page 2-3.
| | 09:12 | I'll double-click on the numbers there.
| | 09:14 | Got my page number out here.
| | 09:15 | Now what I want to do is this.
| | 09:16 | I want this to be Roman numeral pages because maybe
we're going to make a table of contents out of this, okay?
| | 09:21 | Now I know it's says "Tea Flavors" in this section, but humor me here.
| | 09:25 | So here's what we'll do.
| | 09:26 | I've already got a section started.
| | 09:28 | If you take a look - as a matter of fact, hover over
that little section marker you'll see Start of "Sec1".
| | 09:32 | I've already got a section started.
| | 09:33 | What we're going to do is we're going to change the numbering system
and we're also going to have to say TOC- and be Roman numerals.
| | 09:40 | So since we already have a numbering system here I'm
going to double-click on the triangle, open up my Numbering
| | 09:45 | and Section Options dialogue box, and here's what we'll do.
| | 09:48 | If you look inside of here you have the
ability to control the page number itself.
| | 09:52 | No, I don't want to do that, I don't care, 2's fine.
| | 09:54 | If you look right here, Automatic Page Numbering, it says leave it alone.
| | 09:56 | Just keep it going from the previous system.
| | 09:58 | And if you'll look right down here, here's
where we're going to control things.
| | 10:02 | Under Style I'm going to come in here and we're going to say
we're going to do Roman numerals, something like upper Roman.
| | 10:08 | Click OK, take a look.
| | 10:09 | All I did was change the style.
| | 10:11 | If you look at the numbers now it's going to say 2-3 but -
let me zoom in here just so you can see what I'm doing.
| | 10:15 | Command-Space for Mac, Control-Space for Windows.
| | 10:18 | You can see it now.
| | 10:18 | It shows or appears as Roman numerals.
| | 10:22 | This is an automatic page numbering.
| | 10:23 | This is something you learned in the original,
or the initial, InDesign sectioning.
| | 10:26 | If you take a look out here all it does is this
automatic page numbering here is just looking
| | 10:31 | at the page number out here and saying what does it say?
| | 10:33 | I'm going to show it right here.
| | 10:34 | That's it's only job in life, basically.
| | 10:37 | Now that we have it out there here's what I'm going to do.
| | 10:39 | I am going to go to my black arrow.
| | 10:41 | I want to fit the spread in the window.
| | 10:43 | Command-Option-0, Control-Alt-0.
| | 10:46 | Come on to pages 4 and 5 here.
| | 10:48 | I'm going to double-click on 4-5.
| | 10:49 | If we take a look that's still 4-5, those are still regular numbering.
| | 10:54 | That's because there is a section marker here that said
just do regular numbers out here not Roman numerals.
| | 10:59 | All right.
| | 11:00 | So let's go back to 2-3.
| | 11:01 | Double-click on 2-3.
| | 11:03 | Come back to your section marker.
| | 11:04 | I'm going to double-click on that to open up
my Number and Section Options dialogue box.
| | 11:08 | Here's the last thing we're going to do.
| | 11:09 | If you take a look when you actually create
page numbering, if you do section starts,
| | 11:14 | it automatically puts this wacky thing in
here called Section Prefix, Sec1 colon.
| | 11:19 | This right here, actually if you're changing the page
numbering and let's say you have two page number 2s.
| | 11:25 | One's a table of contents and one's like a regular page numbering.
| | 11:28 | This section prefix differentiates between the two.
| | 11:32 | One's going to say sec1: and be the Roman numerals let's say.
| | 11:35 | And if I came out here to 4-5 and I said let's make
that Page 2, you would probably see Sec2:
| | 11:41 | and say okay, this is the second section you've set up.
| | 11:45 | Now these matter when you print the file because you have to differentiate
between pages, but for right now we don't, I don't want to use it that way.
| | 11:52 | A section prefix allows you to put like TOC,
something in front of the Roman numeral.
| | 11:57 | So if I did this - I'm going to type in "TOC-" -
| | 11:59 | now, it's not going to do anything right now if I click OK.
| | 12:05 | Unless we check Include Prefix when Numbering Pages.
| | 12:09 | Go ahead and check that.
| | 12:10 | What it's going to do is apply the section prefix before the style number.
| | 12:14 | So click OK and take a look.
| | 12:18 | If I take a look out here I can actually see - if I zoom
in down here I can actually see it says TOC-ll, TOC-lll.
| | 12:26 | Nice easy way to set up those for yourself and it's
a quick way to be able to do something like that.
| | 12:31 | So working with section markers, great way to
put sections on a magazine, a book, you know,
| | 12:37 | a business proposal, a project, whatever you're working on basically.
| | 12:40 | Also to be able to use something like the
prefixes right here, which are a great way to kind
| | 12:44 | of differentiate your table of contents and other things like that.
| | 12:47 | With page numbering, a lot of ways we could do this and these are just two
of the big things that we can kind of hit inside of here that I use a lot
| | 12:54 | in a lot of my projects, so hopefully you get a chance to use these.
| | 12:57 | Go ahead and save "brochure" for yourself.
| | 12:59 | And what we're going to do is in the next section here, we're
going to talk about creating a master page from a spread.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a master page from a spread| 00:00 | Every once in a while you're going to want
to create a new master page for yourself.
| | 00:04 | I mean, you may be working in a document and you may
have a master out here and you decide that, you know,
| | 00:09 | I need a second master that's just a little different.
| | 00:12 | In previous sessions in this chapter we've gone
through, we talked about working with master objects,
| | 00:17 | creating all sorts of things based on master pages, et cetera.
| | 00:21 | And in this section, we're going to go through and I'm going to talk to you
about how to create a master page from that page in your document, okay?
| | 00:29 | So we're going to do that by utilizing this "brochure" document
| | 00:32 | we've been using this throughout the chapter.
| | 00:33 | And I asked you to save it various times and close it, that sort of thing.
| | 00:37 | Once again, let's go to the exercise files folder.
| | 00:39 | In there I think you should see Chapter
4, and let's open up "brochure.indd."
| | 00:44 | I'm going to come to the Pages 2 and 3 and you're going to
notice that it's actually roman numerals out here.
| | 00:51 | That's because it was used in a previous
session talking about section starts, et cetera.
| | 00:55 | So if you just have page numbers on here, that's okay, that's fine.
| | 00:58 | If you take a look at the brochure on Page 2-3 here, what we've
done is we actually have one single master page in this document.
| | 01:04 | As a matter of fact, come over here to the Pages palette, double-click
on A-Master to take a look, and you can see all the objects out there.
| | 01:10 | I just have a single bar on the left, we've got two columns,
and some content on the bottom down here including sections.
| | 01:16 | Come back out to Pages 2 and 3 out here.
| | 01:19 | Here's what I'd like to do.
| | 01:20 | Go ahead and just in your Pages palette right here
what I've actually done is I've reset my workspace.
| | 01:24 | I do this every time I start usually, so why don't we do that right now.
| | 01:28 | Come under Window>Workspace.
| | 01:30 | Take a look under Default there.
| | 01:31 | It'll reset our workspace for us.
| | 01:33 | There's no shortcut.
| | 01:34 | You can assign your own if you want to under Edit
Keyboard Shortcuts, but that's another movie.
| | 01:39 | Click on Default, that'll reset our palettes for us really quick.
| | 01:42 | And what I'd like to do once again is I'd like to be able
to see all of my pages out here kind of scrolling across.
| | 01:47 | So what I'd like to do is right click out here in the white
space - Control-Click if you have a one-button mouse -
| | 01:52 | come to Palette Options, turn off Show Vertically on the pages themselves,
click OK, that way it will scroll for us. That way we can see them all.
| | 02:03 | What I'd like to do is come to 4-5 here.
| | 02:05 | I'm going to double-click on Pages 4-5.
| | 02:07 | Now, the reason why I just had you do that is just
because I can't stand scrolling inside of this thing.
| | 02:12 | I don't have a control wheel mouse so
I got to use the scroll bar sometimes.
| | 02:16 | Anyway, with 4-5 right here, if you take a look here's what we're going to do.
| | 02:19 | I decide that, you know, we've got a master and suddenly
you're going along and you're like well, you know what?
| | 02:24 | I'd kind of like this page to look a little different.
| | 02:27 | So what we can do is actually make it look different and then
save this whole spread as a new master page, which is pretty cool.
| | 02:34 | So in 4-5 here double-click on Page 4.
| | 02:37 | What I want to do is we're just going to control
the actual column guides and the margin guides.
| | 02:41 | Let's say for instance that on this side I decided that, you
know, what we want one column out here that's a little bit wider,
| | 02:47 | but I want a little sidebar area so we can put a sidebar.
| | 02:49 | And then we're going to save that as a master page.
| | 02:52 | I could go up to my masters up top here and just make a new master
and start working that way but, you know, sometimes you're on a page
| | 02:57 | and you start to work on that page and you're like,
Hey that looks kind of cool, I'm going to keep that.
| | 03:00 | So that's what we're going to do.
| | 03:02 | So by double-clicking on Page 4 you're going to come
to the page with that selected, come up to Layout.
| | 03:07 | We're going to change the actual margins and columns for this page only.
| | 03:10 | That's why we selected Page 4.
| | 03:12 | Click on Margins and Columns.
| | 03:14 | Take a look.
| | 03:15 | Here's what we'll do.
| | 03:17 | Take it to one column.
| | 03:19 | And what I want to do is change the actual margin here.
| | 03:22 | So we're going to take the inside here and I'm going to - oop, wrong way.
| | 03:25 | I'm going to increase that margin.
| | 03:27 | Now, if you notice mine's jumping further faster here.
| | 03:29 | I'm holding the Shift key down as I click.
| | 03:31 | So bring in to about, oh, let's see, about 2 1/2 inches.
| | 03:35 | That'll leave us a little bit of room over here for a sidebar.
| | 03:38 | Go ahead and click OK.
| | 03:40 | If you take a look you've actually got a single column out here now.
| | 03:44 | If I were to fit this in the window out here,
Command-Option zero Mac, Control-Alt zero Windows,
| | 03:49 | I can see that both pages are looking a little different here.
| | 03:51 | Now what I'd like to do is put a little
text box out here for the sidebar itself.
| | 03:55 | So come to your Type tool.
| | 03:56 | I'm just going to hit my letter T here.
| | 03:58 | I'll come up top and what we'll do is I'll just quickly draw it out here.
| | 04:02 | So just quickly draw a little text frame out for yourself.
| | 04:04 | That's going to be our sidebar.
| | 04:05 | What we could do is we could draw a guide.
| | 04:08 | There's a ton of things we could do out here.
| | 04:09 | Let's just get a guide out here really quick. From the
rulers - you should be able to see your rulers up top -
| | 04:14 | I'm just going to drag a guide out, snap
it on top of the margin guides up here
| | 04:18 | and I'm just going to quickly get my box
to kind of snap in there, my text frame.
| | 04:22 | So there we go.
| | 04:23 | Got that set.
| | 04:24 | Now, I like the way this looks, you know, that's fine.
| | 04:28 | What we just did was we changed a lot of things
on the page out here so we've been kind of -
| | 04:32 | we've pretty much broken the link to the
left-hand master page in here, in A-Master.
| | 04:36 | So I decide, you know what?
| | 04:37 | We want to keep this.
| | 04:38 | I want to use this again and again.
| | 04:39 | So we can save this page now as a master page.
| | 04:42 | The thing is, since this is a facing page document,
| | 04:44 | I've got to save it as a spread.
| | 04:46 | So both of these pages are going to be saved as a master page.
| | 04:50 | Here's how we do that.
| | 04:51 | If you come to the page that's near your Pages palette over
here, I'm going to literally just grab it by the numbers here -
| | 04:56 | you can grab both, it doesn't matter - grab it
by the numbers, I'm going to pull it straight up,
| | 05:01 | come right into the master page section up here and just let it go.
| | 05:04 | If you take a look you just created a second master page. That
second master page looks like what you've got on the page out here.
| | 05:12 | Matter of fact, we are on the master.
| | 05:14 | By double-clicking it you can see we're on it.
| | 05:17 | Any time I now want to use this basically it's all set.
| | 05:20 | I can just use it as a master page out here to change how my pages look.
| | 05:25 | Now this is one way to be able to change your pages.
| | 05:28 | To be able to actually do it out there while you're kind of working -
| | 05:30 | because I do that a lot.
| | 05:31 | You know pages are kind of influx.
| | 05:33 | I'll change it and then I'll quickly say,
You know, I'd like that as a master.
| | 05:36 | Drag it up.
| | 05:37 | Now here's the only thing you've got to watch
out for, or just pay attention to at least.
| | 05:41 | When you drag it up there and you get it to be a
master, if you take a look at the page icon over here
| | 05:44 | on the Pages palette you're going to notice it's got "A" applied.
| | 05:48 | This is creating a based-on master.
| | 05:50 | If you had a master page applied to these pages and you make a new master
out of those, it's going to automatically create a chain of events here
| | 05:58 | that says A-Master is applied to B-Master
so it's creating this parent-child relationship.
| | 06:04 | Honestly, I'm okay with that.
| | 06:05 | That's actually a good thing.
| | 06:07 | Matter of fact, if I were to go to A-Master right now, double-
click on it and see, pretty much everything's the same on the page,
| | 06:12 | all the content out here, et cetera, except my
two columns, et cetera, are changed out here.
| | 06:18 | So if I go to B-Master, double-click and take
a look, you can see that's the big difference.
| | 06:22 | Matter of fact, you kind of prove it to yourself that it is based on it.
| | 06:25 | If you come to B-Master - I'm going to hold down Option on Mac, Alt on
Windows - and click on B-Master you'll get to your
| | 06:34 | Master Options dialogue box. You can see it right here.
| | 06:34 | It says Based on Master, A-Master.
| | 06:37 | If you decided you wanted to create a page without
A-Master stuff on it I could say None right now
| | 06:42 | and that stuff would go away basically,
and it would be a master page by itself.
| | 06:47 | Anyway, I don't want to do that.
| | 06:48 | Let's click Cancel here.
| | 06:49 | So you can clearly see that we can create master
pages from regular spreads in our documents.
| | 06:54 | If you had a non-facing page document and
these were just single pages thrown out here,
| | 06:59 | if you drag it up top it's just going to create
a single master page, which is kind of nice.
| | 07:04 | Now you can do this in brand-new documents, I can apply them quickly.
| | 07:08 | Matter of fact if you do it in brand-new documents,
if you have pages with no master applied, which is -
| | 07:13 | if I scroll up top here - what None is up here, okay?
| | 07:16 | Having a hard time seeing this.
| | 07:18 | Let me grab the bar here and move it a little bit.
| | 07:21 | Okay. Still having a hard time.
| | 07:22 | Little redraw issue with the program.
| | 07:24 | Anyway. None up here, kind of hiding up there,
is basically saying that that has nothing implied.
| | 07:29 | So like I said, to drag them up you can do it pretty quickly and easily.
| | 07:33 | Now that I have that I can apply it to multiple pages.
| | 07:35 | If I come to Pages 6 and 7 here, double-click, I want to apply that to it
- it doesn't have any content yet, I'm just kind of setting things up.
| | 07:42 | So with 6 and 7 selected, come up to B-Master.
| | 07:45 | To apply it I'm going to hold down my Option
key on Mac, Alt key Windows, and just click.
| | 07:51 | And I've just applied that master page B to Pages 6 and 7.
| | 07:54 | So this is another way to work for you, basically.
| | 07:57 | Go ahead and save the brochure, that you've got
this for our next movie we're going to go through here,
| | 08:01 | which is going to be talking about sharing
pages and masters between documents.
| | 08:04 | Kind of a nice little feature.
| | 08:05 | So go ahead and save the file and we should be done with this section.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing pages and masters between documents| 00:00 | Now I'd like to talk about how to work
with pages and master pages across documents.
| | 00:05 | This is a nice little feature to be able
to use to be able to drag things across.
| | 00:09 | Like, for instance, if you have a couple pages using one document and
you decide you need them in another, you could basically combine the two.
| | 00:16 | I can drag them between documents themselves.
| | 00:18 | So you can do this for master pages or regular pages themselves.
| | 00:22 | I have some really cool things we can do here.
| | 00:23 | First and foremost what I'd like you to do is
we're going to open up "brochure,"
| | 00:26 | which is what we've had open for a lot of
this chapter, the Master Pages chapter.
| | 00:30 | And we've been going through - so hopefully you've
actually started from the beginning of this chapter,
| | 00:34 | kind of make it easy so it's going to look
exactly like I have it on screen here.
| | 00:38 | First things first.
| | 00:38 | Go to your exercise files, Chapter 4, you could see the "brochure" file.
| | 00:42 | Let's open that up.
| | 00:43 | Next thing I want to do is let's reset our workspace
so we're all back at the same position here.
| | 00:47 | So under Window>Workspace come to Default.
| | 00:51 | All right.
| | 00:52 | Now that we're there, let's do this, let's talk about
actually bringing pages and master pages across.
| | 00:57 | Across meaning across documents.
| | 00:59 | I do this all the time.
| | 01:00 | I happen to do a lot of handouts and things like that for clients and
a lot of times what I'll do is I'll create this master massive handout
| | 01:08 | for classes that I teach and actually have to drag thing across, okay?
| | 01:11 | Because I want to be able to take parts of the document
and save it for a company I'm doing some special work for.
| | 01:17 | So what we've got to do is open a document first,
we've got too actually create a second document,
| | 01:21 | either new or otherwise, and we're going to drag it back and forth.
| | 01:24 | So what we're going to do is with "brochure"
open, we're going to create a brand-new doc.
| | 01:27 | So come to File>New Doc, here.
| | 01:30 | When we do this there's a couple things to pay attention to.
| | 01:32 | First and foremost, you want to make the new document that
you're going to drag the pages or the masters into the same size.
| | 01:40 | It doesn't have to be, but just, you know, just making it as
comfortable as possible, we want to make them the same size.
| | 01:49 | Now looking out here I know that this document we probably should
check the document size on this one, but I happen to know what it is.
| | 01:55 | So I look at the rulers: it's 7 1/2 wide by 8 1/2 tall.
| | 01:58 | So let's do the width, let's do 7 1/2 here.
| | 02:01 | And for the height I'll do 8 1/2.
| | 02:04 | You want to make sure it's going to be the same type of document as well.
| | 02:07 | So if I'm dragging from a Facing Page you want to drag to a Facing Page.
| | 02:11 | You don't have to but I'm just saying that
it'll make it more comfortable for you.
| | 02:15 | So click OK.
| | 02:17 | Got our second document out here.
| | 02:18 | Now here's what we'll do.
| | 02:19 | You can see that this one's got an A-Master in it.
| | 02:21 | What I'd like to do is we're going to drag one of our master pages across.
| | 02:24 | So I need to get back to the previous document I
was working on, we have two documents open here.
| | 02:28 | Now you can move these out of the way, you can shuffle, I can come under
Window and come down here and see that all the documents I have open.
| | 02:34 | But a nice easy way to go between documents that you're going to
use a lot of is going to be, on the Mac, it's going to be Command-~(tilde).
| | 02:41 | I can't remember how to say this thing.
| | 02:44 | Let me show you what it looks like actually.
| | 02:46 | I'm going to type this on the - don't follow, just watch me here.
| | 02:49 | This actually looks something like this thing.
| | 02:53 | You see that right there?
| | 02:55 | If you see this on your keyboard. What we're going to do is we're going to
do Command, I believe it's called "tild", some people call it "til-day."
| | 03:02 | It should be above your Tab key.
| | 03:04 | If working on a laptop it's going to be a little different.
| | 03:07 | Now, on Mac it's Command-~(tilde),
on Windows it's going to be Control-~(tilde).
| | 03:11 | That should be able to cycle between.
| | 03:13 | This is what I'll do - I just wanted to show you that.
| | 03:14 | I am going to delete that.
| | 03:15 | Let me zoom back out here.
| | 03:17 | Do Command-0, Control-0.
| | 03:19 | To get to my other document I'm going to hold the
Command-~, and I should be able to go it.
| | 03:23 | Windows it should be Control-~.
| | 03:25 | Now, like I said on certain keyboards that's
going to be kind of hard to find.
| | 03:28 | So otherwise you can go under Window to find that.
| | 03:31 | Now that we're back in "brochure" here we can see all our pages.
| | 03:34 | What I'd like to do is going to kind of move
this out of way, move "brochure" out of the way.
| | 03:38 | Take a look.
| | 03:39 | What we're going to do is we're just going to
grab a master page to start with.
| | 03:41 | So let's say I want to share a master page.
| | 03:43 | I want A-Master to go into the new document.
| | 03:46 | So by grabbing A-Master by the name here
I'm going to click and drag it across.
| | 03:50 | Let it go anywhere in the page.
| | 03:51 | It doesn't matter where.
| | 03:52 | Let it go.
| | 03:53 | And if you take a look it's actually going to place
the master in there in the master page section.
| | 03:58 | Now, one unfortunate side effect I have is that this new document
already had something called A-Master, so it's actually making a copy.
| | 04:05 | So here's what we'll do.
| | 04:06 | Just to keep things clear I'm going to get rid of the original A-Master
and we'll just call the new copy, we'll just call that one A-Master.
| | 04:12 | So click on A-Master here up top.
| | 04:14 | I'm going to click on the trash can.
| | 04:16 | It's going to say it's applied to a page.
| | 04:17 | That's fine, we'll fix that.
| | 04:19 | Click OK. I'm going to change the name of A-Master copy.
| | 04:22 | To do that I'm going to told down Option key, Alt on Windows,
I'm going to click on A-Master copy with that key down.
| | 04:29 | I should be able to get to my Master Options.
| | 04:31 | Couple clicks there.
| | 04:33 | Come in here - prefix - let's just call this A-Master, that's fine.
| | 04:37 | Get rid of the copy.
| | 04:38 | Nothing else, click OK.
| | 04:40 | There we go.
| | 04:41 | Now let's apply that to Page 1.
| | 04:43 | All I have to do is drag the page down, drop it
right on top and let go and I've got it applied.
| | 04:50 | Okay. We're getting there.
| | 04:52 | So we have a master page out there.
| | 04:53 | Now what I want to do is we're going to drag some pages across.
| | 04:56 | So why don't you do this for me.
| | 04:57 | I'm going to fit my spread in my window here.
| | 04:59 | So Command-Option-0, Mac; Control-Alt-0, Windows.
| | 05:04 | I'm going to go back to the previous document.
| | 05:06 | Command-~, Mac; Control-~, Windows.
| | 05:10 | What I want to do is, we're going to drag some pages.
| | 05:11 | So from your Pages palette on here I'm going to scroll down a bit.
| | 05:15 | Come down to 6-7.
| | 05:17 | You should see - if you've been following along in the last couple of
exercises you will have been using "brochure" and actually doing things,
| | 05:23 | like doing based-on masters, creating section starts, et cetera.
| | 05:26 | So your document should look something like this.
| | 05:29 | If it doesn't, don't worry about it.
| | 05:31 | We're just going to grab some pages.
| | 05:32 | I'm going to come to 6-7.
| | 05:33 | The reason why I'm taking these pages is because in the previous
exercise we went through we created the B-Master that it's based on.
| | 05:40 | We dragged it across.
| | 05:41 | So I'm going to grab 6-7, it's got B applied.
| | 05:44 | Just grabbing the numbers.
| | 05:45 | I'm going to pull it straight across.
| | 05:46 | If you want to, just grab two pages; you
can pull them straight across, let go.
| | 05:51 | Doesn't matter where you drop them basically.
| | 05:52 | If you look in your Pages palette it automatically inserts them
where they should be in the next order, next section order here.
| | 05:58 | So I can, I've got 1, 2, 3.
| | 06:00 | Now something interesting just happened when we did that.
| | 06:03 | When you drag pages themselves between documents
- take a look up top at my master section.
| | 06:10 | The master page comes with it, which is kind of interesting.
| | 06:13 | Now, this is a kind of a special case because
B-Master in this case had the A applied to it.
| | 06:18 | In other words, they had the based-on master for A.
So it's automatically looking at A to find this stuff.
| | 06:25 | If you had dragged this across from the previous document, from
"brochure" and it had A applied you wouldn't see any new masters
| | 06:31 | up here because A's already in here because we dragged it in.
| | 06:34 | So the moral of story here is that if you drag pages, the master
page assigned to it, or associated with it, is coming with it, too.
| | 06:40 | So that's kind of a nice little feature we can do.
| | 06:42 | I'm going to go back to the "brochure" document.
| | 06:44 | Command-~, Control-~, Windows.
| | 06:47 | Another thing we can do is if you decide that you need sections of a
document - I'm going to open up my Pages palette here, click and drag.
| | 06:53 | If you want to grab a whole section, I can just click on a page
and then hold the shift key down and click on the next page,
| | 07:00 | or the last page, rather, I want. That'll grab the whole section and I can
literally grab the whole section and drag it across to the new document.
| | 07:07 | This is a really great way to be able to share
objects, share master pages, share pages, et cetera.
| | 07:12 | You just have to be careful when you drag across because, you
know, if you already had masters in the new document, you know,
| | 07:18 | your old masters are going to get renamed with
the word "copy" or something like that.
| | 07:21 | Okay? So you've just got to pay attention to that.
| | 07:24 | This dragging thing is great not just for pages and masters but if
you have objects, you guys have text frames, you have anything else,
| | 07:30 | all that sort of stuff can be helped by dragging
straight across, pictures, whatever you want.
| | 07:35 | Really kind of a nice little feature.
| | 07:37 | Now I mentioned earlier that if you drag and drop across documents
that are not the same size that it's going to be less comfortable for you.
| | 07:44 | Well, I just want to show you that really quickly.
| | 07:46 | So I'm going to come out here and click on the untitled document we opened,
and I'm going to go ahead and close that up, I'm not going to save that.
| | 07:54 | Here's what I'd like to do.
| | 07:54 | We're going to create a second document that
is not the same size as the brochure.
| | 07:59 | So what I'll do is come up to File>New, create a Document.
| | 08:02 | We'll do a letter-sized document, basically,
which is not the same size as this one.
| | 08:06 | Letter, Facing, I'll click OK.
| | 08:09 | Now here's what I'll do.
| | 08:10 | I'll go back, Command-~, Control-~ on Windows.
| | 08:13 | I'm just going to literally drag some pages across.
| | 08:16 | So I'm going to select the 2-3 here, which is the Roman numeral pages.
| | 08:20 | From the page numbers, drag them across.
| | 08:23 | Go ahead and let them go on the page.
| | 08:25 | In dragging from one document to another document
that is not the same size will give you this.
| | 08:31 | It's just telling you that stuff may move, basically.
| | 08:33 | So if I click OK right now - it'll let me do it; but if I
click OK and take a look you can clearly see what's happening.
| | 08:39 | You've got to just be aware of this sort of thing.
| | 08:42 | So you can do it, you can get content across, that's fine.
| | 08:44 | It'll actually bring the pages across.
| | 08:46 | If you look in the Pages palette and they're now 8
1/2 x 11 but the content will not change for you.
| | 08:51 | All right.
| | 08:51 | So why don't we do this.
| | 08:53 | We're all done basically talking about moving masters and pages across.
| | 08:57 | We don't is need to save either of these
documents so let's go ahead and close them both up.
| | 09:00 | In the next section what we're going to do
is talk about how to print master pages.
| | 09:04 | So we're going to be using "brochure" again.
| | 09:06 | If you're going to the next section right away and talking of printing
master pages you can leave it open, otherwise, let's close it up.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing master pages as comps| 00:00 | In this last section on master pages I just want to
show you how to actually print your master pages out.
| | 00:06 | Now you may be asking yourself why would you want to do that?
| | 00:08 | I've got several reasons actually.
| | 00:11 | A lot of times, what I'll do is when I go to create
a document, I'll generate several master pages, two,
| | 00:16 | three, four, et cetera, and I'll give my clients options.
| | 00:19 | And with the master pages I set up the basic look and feel for the page,
and of course you know, the main design's outline from regular pages,
| | 00:25 | but if they change their mind later on,
I'll just apply a different master page.
| | 00:30 | But what you can do is you can print these out and
kind of give them the look and feel of the page, which,
| | 00:34 | for just the basic elements you know, that sort of thing.
| | 00:36 | It can also kind of help you when you're building a document.
| | 00:39 | To do that, after you've created your master
pages, we're simply going to print it out.
| | 00:43 | So let's go to File>Print, take a look inside of the
Print dialog box inside of here, have several options.
| | 00:50 | Let's say I want to pdf them, if I look out here normally
I'll be able to pick Copies, that sort of thing, page Ranges.
| | 00:55 | If you look right below Sequence down here you're going to
see Spreads, and right below that Print Master Pages.
| | 01:01 | Just by selecting this you are actually
telling it to print your masters pages for you.
| | 01:07 | Now the only thing we have to pay attention to here is if this is a
facing page document and you've got spreads or a facing page master page,
| | 01:14 | if you want to print them as spreads, in other words print them
next to each other, you want to turn on Spreads when you print this.
| | 01:19 | You also want to take a look down here in your Preview and
make sure that the orientation is correct on the paper.
| | 01:25 | This is typical stuff to be able to work with.
| | 01:27 | So once I tell it to Print just the masters,
it's only going to print those.
| | 01:30 | And if I tell it to print the spreads, it's going to print the
two master pages next to each other, so left and right master.
| | 01:36 | And under Setup I could go in there and say let's kind of position
this thing where I want to, I could pick my Orientation on my page,
| | 01:42 | make sure the page fits, it's not going to fit in this case, so
I could print the correct page, 11 by 17, perhaps,
| | 01:47 | and fit it on there, as long as my printer will do that, obviously.
| | 01:51 | But this is just one way for you to be able to under the General
section of the Print dialog, to print those master pages.
| | 01:57 | Now something else I'll just kind of throw in here.
| | 01:59 | When you're printing documents, a lot of times when I'm teaching
people, I want them to be able to see where the guides are
| | 02:04 | and things like that, sometimes you want that as well.
| | 02:06 | If I look down under Options right here there's a couple other things
inside of here, one of them is Print Visible Guides and Baseline Grids,
| | 02:13 | kind of a nice little feature if you're trying to teach somebody.
| | 02:15 | Let's say in your company you're trying to train other people how
to do what you're doing, you can tell it to Print Visible Guides
| | 02:20 | and it will print them on the page so that they can actually see
how you position things, kind of a nice little thing right there.
| | 02:26 | Normally what I do is I would just print the document here
by clicking on Print, let it go, and I'm basically done.
| | 02:31 | So that's kind of a nice little way to print your master pages.
| | 02:34 | Instead, I'm going to Cancel out of here.
| | 02:36 | You can close "brochure," and basically we
are done talking about our master pages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Word and Excel WorkflowsImporting Word docs into InDesign| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to be talking about Word and Excel workflows
| | 00:03 | and how you can utilize Word documents as well
as Excel files within your InDesign files.
| | 00:09 | Now this first section we're going to go through here is going be
talking about just importing Word documents into an InDesign file.
| | 00:15 | What I want to do is I want to get started with a brand new document.
| | 00:17 | We're going to place a Word document and just talk to you about some
things you can do and some thing you want to look out for as well.
| | 00:23 | So we're going to create a brand new document.
| | 00:25 | Let's go up to File, down to New>Document.
| | 00:29 | One thing I really want to do here is
we're going to make a multi column document.
| | 00:32 | So we're actually going to make a two
column document with a quarter inch gutter.
| | 00:36 | Make sure the Facing Page isn't on for us and that should be all.
| | 00:39 | Let's click OK, letter sized document.
| | 00:43 | Now, here's what we'll do.
| | 00:44 | We're going to place a Word document.
| | 00:46 | Now Word document placement is like any other text file
placement, but there's a lot of things we can do with these.
| | 00:52 | First and foremost, when you place a Word document,
you can actually bring in the formatting or not.
| | 00:56 | You have a choice.
| | 00:58 | Also, if the Word document has tables, you can bring the tables in as well.
| | 01:02 | If we take a look over at our Paragraph Styles column on the
right hand side of you, I'm going to click on that to open it up,
| | 01:06 | you can see that we're starting with a basic paragraph.
| | 01:09 | Now Word documents start out with normal paragraph
style, headlines, all sorts of things that you can use.
| | 01:15 | Those can be brought in here to be utilized,
and that's what we're going to do.
| | 01:18 | So let's place a Word document.
| | 01:19 | Once again, we don't have any, need any text frames
out here, we can just place it straight out.
| | 01:23 | So let's go up to File, come on down to Place.
| | 01:29 | Hopefully you all have - come out to my desktop
here - in the exercise files folder
| | 01:33 | in the Chapter 5 folder there should be a "coffee_text" Word document.
| | 01:37 | All right.
| | 01:38 | Now if you take a look, what we want to do is this.
| | 01:40 | If you just click Open, you're going to place a document,
it's going to bring in some formatting, that sort of thing.
| | 01:44 | Now what I want to do is I want to Show
my Import Options as I bring in a file.
| | 01:48 | What I usually get in the habit of doing is instead of going over here
to check the box, if you hold the Shift key down when you click Open,
| | 01:55 | that'll do the same thing basically, so
that way you don't have to check the box.
| | 01:58 | So Shift key down, click Open.
| | 01:59 | That will allow us to get our Word Import Options out here.
| | 02:02 | Now this dialogue box, it's pretty imposing, I know.
| | 02:05 | But there's some things we can do in here that are pretty incredible.
| | 02:08 | If you take a look, first and foremost, we can actually include any
tables of contents that are in the Word document you can bring in.
| | 02:15 | If there's an index in the Word document you can bring that in.
| | 02:17 | Even if there's footnotes or endnotes that have
been placed in the Word document, they will come in.
| | 02:21 | Now if you don't want those things, you
can turn these off if you really want to.
| | 02:24 | But I know there's none of this in there so
I'm going to keep those on; it doesn't matter.
| | 02:28 | Also, if you take a look, Use Typographer's Quotes.
| | 02:31 | That's pretty important.
| | 02:32 | That's going to take your feet and inch marks and convert them
to true typographers curly quotes, which is a good thing.
| | 02:38 | Now here's the meat and potatoes down here
if you look under Formatting.
| | 02:41 | You have the ability to Remove all styling from the
actual text itself, et cetera, as well as from tables.
| | 02:47 | That's kind of interesting.
| | 02:48 | Plus, you have the ability to Preserve Styles
and Formatting from the Text and the Tables.
| | 02:53 | So there's two choices you have here.
| | 02:55 | When you place Word documents, it's pretty great to be able to do that.
| | 02:58 | So if I want to place it from someone, and I don't know what they did
to it, I just want the raw text, I can remove styles and formatting.
| | 03:05 | What that's going to allow me to do is,
if you take a look, Convert Tables To,
| | 03:09 | you can actually convert it into Unformatted
Tables or even Tab Text if you wanted to.
| | 03:12 | An unformatted table is going to look like it's going to be a
black outline kind of thing with no formatting inside.
| | 03:17 | Preserve Local Overrides is kind of interesting.
| | 03:20 | When you tell it to remove the formatting here, just by default it's going
to strip everything out; it's going to strip any styling you've applied.
| | 03:27 | If you check Preserve Local Overrides, what that's going to do is if there
are anything like, let's say somebody in the Word doc selected some text
| | 03:34 | and hit the B button for bold, that's called a local override.
| | 03:37 | That's above and beyond the styles, so that stuff will be preserved.
| | 03:40 | That's actually kind of a nice little feature.
| | 03:43 | Now we want to preserve the formatting.
| | 03:44 | So we're going to choose Preserve Styles and Formatting
from Text and Tables.
| | 03:48 | And we take a look down here, this kind
of opens up a whole can of worms here.
| | 03:51 | We've got a whole lot of stuff we can look at.
| | 03:53 | A lot of control, basically.
| | 03:55 | If you look at Manual Page Breaks, you can
actually see that we can actually go through
| | 03:58 | and Preserve Page Breaks, Convert to Column Breaks, or even say No Breaks.
| | 04:02 | So if somebody had actually manually inserted
page breaks, you can control those.
| | 04:07 | I know there are none, so it doesn't really matter in this case.
| | 04:10 | If you didn't know, you might want to say No Breaks and put in your own.
| | 04:14 | Take a look right here, Import Inline Graphics.
| | 04:16 | If there are any images that have been placed in the Word document, pasted
in, placed in, however, those are going to come in with this checked.
| | 04:23 | That means they're going to come in with
the text right inside the text frame.
| | 04:26 | If you want them then keep it checked.
| | 04:27 | We have some I believe.
| | 04:28 | So let's keep this checked.
| | 04:30 | Even if you didn't know, you could just keep it
checked and get rid of them if you didn't want them.
| | 04:33 | Import Unused Styles.
| | 04:35 | Inside of Word, you've got a whole bunch of styles that are generated
automatically, headlines, you know, body normal, all that stuff.
| | 04:41 | So you can actually say bring them all in if you turn this on.
| | 04:44 | I'm not going to do that.
| | 04:45 | I just want to bring in the styles that we have been using,
or that have been used in the Word document let's say.
| | 04:50 | Now it's kind of interesting, you look
down here, it says Style Name Conflicts.
| | 04:53 | When you bring in a Word doc and you tell it to preserve the styles,
it's going to bring in the styles themselves, the paragraph style sheets.
| | 05:01 | Now right here it says we have 0 conflicts.
| | 05:03 | If we were to bring in text into a document that already had paragraph
styles assigned, if they were named the same thing as what's coming
| | 05:10 | in from the Word document, you'd have
yourself a problem; there would be conflicts.
| | 05:14 | And down here is where you actually tell
it what to do if there are conflicts.
| | 05:18 | Now since we have 0, we're okay.
| | 05:21 | So we don't have to worry about this.
| | 05:22 | We will hit this in just a little bit.
| | 05:24 | So let's do this.
| | 05:25 | I'm going to actually save this preset because the great thing about this
is if you bring in the same kind of Word document over and over again,
| | 05:33 | you can save this as a preset and this will
save it so you can use it forever basically.
| | 05:36 | So all these formatting settings are set for you.
| | 05:39 | So let's click Save Preset.
| | 05:42 | Let's say that I know that this is actually
going to be part of my brochure text.
| | 05:45 | I can call this "brochure text" and I can click OK.
| | 05:48 | And once you click OK, take a look under Preset, you
will be able to choose that next time as "brochure text."
| | 05:53 | That way you know what it is.
| | 05:55 | You can also set it as default by clicking that
button which is kind of a nice little feature.
| | 05:59 | All right, we're ready to place it.
| | 06:01 | Click OK.
| | 06:03 | Take a look.
| | 06:04 | Some of you may actually have some things happen where
you're missing a font, missing a font dialogue might come up.
| | 06:10 | That's okay.
| | 06:11 | We're going to ignore that for a second.
| | 06:12 | If you really want to you can click Find Font and fix it, but.
| | 06:15 | I'm going to come up here and if you take a look, I'm
going to autoflow this text just to get it on the page.
| | 06:19 | So I'm going to actually - actually what I
want to do is I just want to place it.
| | 06:23 | So Shift key down, click in the upper left hand corner.
| | 06:26 | That'll actually put it out here, let me make my columns, et cetera.
| | 06:29 | And if you take a look at the text, we've got some problems.
| | 06:33 | Okay? Basically what's going on here is this, I placed the Word document.
| | 06:38 | I had no idea what was going on with the Word document.
| | 06:40 | And it looks like they've placed a picture,
they've placed a table, et cetera,
| | 06:44 | and it looks like they actually intended this to be a single column layout.
| | 06:48 | So here's what we'll do.
| | 06:50 | One the text is placed you can always change this.
| | 06:52 | I'm going to actually select this second text frame right here and
basically I can see that it's created multiple pages for me.
| | 06:57 | That's okay.
| | 06:58 | I'm going to delete this text frame right here and I'm going to pull open
this text frame with the bounding point on the right hand side here.
| | 07:05 | Just pull it open so we can go all the way across.
| | 07:07 | And that's looks a little bit better.
| | 07:08 | At least now I can see what they have intended.
| | 07:11 | Now this, if you take a look up top here,
this is what's called an inline graphic.
| | 07:15 | If I select this it's actually in the text, which means it's inline.
| | 07:19 | It came in with the text frame.
| | 07:20 | So if I actually move the text frame itself, that will move with it.
| | 07:24 | So that's what they mean by inline graphics; those will come in.
| | 07:27 | If you also look down here, any tables that were
placed in the Word document automatically come in.
| | 07:32 | And since we told it to retain formatting, look at that.
| | 07:34 | It looks pretty good.
| | 07:36 | Now on a Windows machine, this might look a little bit different;
the table might look a little different, but that's okay.
| | 07:40 | It's the same kind of concept.
| | 07:42 | So let's just take a look on the right
hand side at your Paragraph Styles palette.
| | 07:45 | If you look over there, you're going to notice you now have three
new paragraph styles: Heading 3, Normal, and subhead.
| | 07:52 | Interesting thing here is this, if you look on the
right, you're going to notice this little disc icon.
| | 07:56 | This little disc icon is actually going to tell you that this
paragraph style was brought in from another application.
| | 08:02 | This happens, this little disc happens, when you bring in Word documents,
when you open PageMaker files with paragraph styles already in them,
| | 08:10 | or Quark styles, or Quark pages, excuse me, and the
paragraph styles are automatically brought in for you.
| | 08:14 | So that's what that's telling us.
| | 08:16 | It doesn't mean anything except for the fact that it's
just telling you that it came from somewhere else.
| | 08:20 | I could still edit these.
| | 08:21 | It doesn't really matter.
| | 08:23 | But as far as placing a Word document, when you
accept the formatting, when you keep the formatting,
| | 08:28 | you just have to be prepared that the styles are going to come
in, there may be a conflict with what you already have.
| | 08:34 | Once you place the Word document, it's placed.
| | 08:37 | Basically you're either going to delete the
text itself and place it out here, okay?
| | 08:42 | So this is one way to get text in.
| | 08:44 | You'll notice it flowed automatically.
| | 08:45 | I've got my styles in here, I've got my text going, and
if I place my cursor and text here by double-clicking
| | 08:51 | from my black arrow, I can see that my styles are automatically applied.
| | 08:55 | So this is one way just to place text in a brand new document using
autoflow and placing a Word document so that the styles come directly in.
| | 09:03 | You can take this document and let's close it up.
| | 09:05 | Next section we're going to talk about, we're going to
go through importing Excel workbooks a little bit.
| | 09:09 | We're going to come back to working with Word documents
just a bit in the last section here in this chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing Excel workbooks| 00:00 | I'd like to talk about bringing in parts of an
Excel workbook into InDesign, because that seems
| | 00:05 | to be something that I get a lot of, a lot of questions on anyway.
| | 00:08 | A lot of people are working with tables,
charts, graphs, that sort of thing.
| | 00:11 | What we're going to do in this section here is we're going to go through
and talk about how to just bring in the worksheets themselves.
| | 00:16 | Okay? All right.
| | 00:18 | In the next section in this chapter we're going to go through and actually
talk about placing charts and graphs and all that sort of thing.
| | 00:22 | So first and foremost in your exercise files folder from the Chapter 5
folder, you should be able to see the "brochure.indd" document in there.
| | 00:29 | Let's open that up.
| | 00:30 | I am currently on pages 2-3 and I zoomed out here.
| | 00:34 | If you take a look, we've got some text sitting on the left over
here and we've got a blank area where I want to put a table.
| | 00:39 | Now that table's going to come from Excel.
| | 00:42 | Now this program, InDesign, can actually build tables for you, but
you know sometimes we're going to be getting tables from other people.
| | 00:48 | So here's what I want to do.
| | 00:49 | I want to show you what the table looks like inside of Excel.
| | 00:52 | So I'm going to go over to Excel.
| | 00:53 | And if you don't have Excel on your machine, don't worry about it.
| | 00:56 | I've got a file inside of the exercise
files folder in Chapter 5 for you.
| | 01:00 | So I'm going to go over to Excel here.
| | 01:02 | Take a look in Excel; if you'd like to open
this up you can, it's called "product_list.xls."
| | 01:07 | It's in the exercise folder in Chapter 5.
| | 01:10 | And this thing actually has, if you take a look,
most Excel files actually have three sheets to them.
| | 01:16 | Okay? If you can see I have - this is called a workbook and I'm not a
big Excel user, but you know, I get through it as much as I need to.
| | 01:23 | But take look.
| | 01:23 | I've got Sheet 1 right here.
| | 01:25 | Sheet 1 actually has the table we want.
| | 01:27 | Sheet 2 has some other content on it as well, a little chart out there.
| | 01:30 | But we're going to go to Sheet 1 and we want to pull this into InDesign.
| | 01:33 | Now there are several ways we can do this.
| | 01:35 | I can Copy, Paste; I can also just place directly.
| | 01:39 | I usually find that Copy, Paste works.
| | 01:42 | It's okay.
| | 01:42 | It'll bring in most of the formatting, that sort of thing.
| | 01:44 | But I prefer just to kind of place it directly
in because it gives me some options to do that.
| | 01:49 | So we're going to place the table directly in.
| | 01:51 | So what I'm going to do, I'm going to go back over to
InDesign; you can close Excel if you did have it open.
| | 01:55 | Now go back to InDesign.
| | 01:57 | What I want to do is we're going to place that.
| | 01:59 | So we can open an area for ourselves here.
| | 02:00 | We're going to go up to File>Place, and get that table on the page.
| | 02:03 | So come to File, let's go to Place.
| | 02:06 | Take a look in the Chapter_05 folder, you
should see that "product_list" Excel file.
| | 02:10 | There's some other content in there, but
I want to turn on my Show Import Options.
| | 02:13 | Once again, if you don't want to do that you
can just hold the Shift key down and click Open.
| | 02:17 | It has the same effect.
| | 02:19 | So I'll do that; Shift key down, click on Open.
| | 02:21 | We're placing the Excel file.
| | 02:23 | Now as you place Excel out here, there's a lot of options you have here.
| | 02:27 | The one option that's, you know,
something you just can't do basically,
| | 02:31 | is you can't bring in an Excel file and
say place every sheet on the page for me.
| | 02:35 | So part of the workbook has three sheets as we saw.
| | 02:38 | You can however, place them independently.
| | 02:40 | So I can place Sheet 1 at this point.
| | 02:43 | I can then do another place and say, okay, let's
do Sheet 2 this time and actually do it that way.
| | 02:47 | If you look right down here, when I choose a sheet, let's
say I choose Sheet 2, you're going to see Cell Range.
| | 02:53 | When you pick a sheet, it's basically showing you the cell range itself.
| | 02:56 | Okay? So those are all the used cells inside of the sheet.
| | 02:59 | We're going to do Sheet 1.
| | 03:00 | So let's choose Sheet 1.
| | 03:01 | If you look right here it say Import Hidden Cells Not Saved in View.
| | 03:06 | If you had any hidden cells, some people do calculations,
there's all sorts of hidden cells you can have,
| | 03:12 | those will actually be basically brought
in here if you really want them to.
| | 03:16 | Calculations will not actually work inside of here, you
know, but you can actually bring them in if you want to.
| | 03:21 | So, all right, if you look under Formatting, once we tell
it what to bring it, we can tell it how to format it.
| | 03:26 | Under Formatting you can tell the table to be either Formatted, which
is exactly as it was in Excel, Unformatted which is basically just a,
| | 03:34 | you know, a black stroke table with no color
inside, or Tabbed Text that's got no formatting.
| | 03:39 | Sometimes you just want to get the text out there and
maybe either make your own table or do something with it.
| | 03:43 | We're going to do the Formatted Table.
| | 03:44 | I just want to pull that in as it was.
| | 03:46 | Cell Alignment, if you can override the
alignment of the cells if you really wanted to.
| | 03:51 | I'm going to say keep it at the Current Spreadsheet.
| | 03:53 | If there were any pictures in any of the cells,
inline graphics, those will be brought in as well
| | 03:58 | and those will be placed in the actual cells of the table.
| | 04:01 | So you can do that as well.
| | 04:02 | Now remember with decimal places, if you want
to go crazy and do more than three, go for it.
| | 04:07 | Sometimes you have a call for it.
| | 04:08 | So you actually want to tell it to do more than that.
| | 04:11 | And once again, Typographer's Quotes; it's going to take
your feet and inch marks, turn them into the curly guys.
| | 04:15 | So here's what we'll do.
| | 04:17 | We're ready to go.
| | 04:17 | I'm bringing in the sheet, telling it to be formatted, let's click OK.
| | 04:21 | Now, if you take a look, since we told it
to be formatted, I wanted this to happen.
| | 04:27 | You're going to do this a lot.
| | 04:28 | If you bring in a Word document and you tell it to bring in the formatting
or you bring in an Excel file, something like this is going to happen.
| | 04:34 | It says here that we're missing one or more fonts.
| | 04:36 | Now if you don't get the Missing Fonts
dialogue box, consider yourself lucky.
| | 04:41 | Right now I used Times (T1) and we don't have it.
| | 04:43 | Okay? So what I want to do is we're going to go to
Find Font, click Find Font.
| | 04:47 | It's going to say, where is the font?
| | 04:50 | Look for the yellow yield sign.
| | 04:51 | Take a look inside here.
| | 04:52 | I'm going to see Times (T1), that's having a problem right there.
| | 04:55 | If I hover over it I can actually see Missing Font.
| | 04:57 | What I want to do is - I can't see where it's being used.
| | 05:00 | This is kind of the problem when I bring in an Excel file.
| | 05:03 | Normally you can say Find First and if I do that, it'll
actually show you, but - I can't see the table anywhere,
| | 05:09 | so we're going to have to kind of take it on honor here.
| | 05:12 | So what I want to do is I want to replace it with Warnock Pro.
| | 05:14 | So if we take a look inside here, you can either
find it from the list here or you can type it in.
| | 05:19 | I'll do Warnock Pro Regular.
| | 05:20 | That's fine.
| | 05:22 | Now we're this is kind of a shotgun approach
here so we've just got to be careful with this.
| | 05:25 | And you may have other missing fonts as well.
| | 05:27 | You're going to see them in there.
| | 05:28 | I can see some some of you may not have these
True Type fonts so you're going to actually want
| | 05:33 | to replace those as well any time you see the yellow yield sign.
| | 05:35 | So I'm going to click on Change All.
| | 05:38 | That changed it.
| | 05:40 | Once we - like I said, if you have more than one
font missing you want to do that for each one.
| | 05:44 | If I click on Done I get my loaded text cursor.
| | 05:48 | Take a look and we're going to click and let it go.
| | 05:50 | I'm going to do it up here.
| | 05:51 | If I click, place the text frame, and if you take a look I've
got my table on the page exactly as it was inside of Excel.
| | 05:58 | Now, like I said before, when you place tables
out here you can pick the sheets as you place it.
| | 06:03 | If you keep the formatting it's going to do a really
good job of trying to keep that formatting.
| | 06:07 | It's not always going to be perfect; there's going to
be a couple of things that are going to happen here.
| | 06:10 | Matter of fact, I can see one right here.
| | 06:12 | I'm going to zoom in; Command-Spacebar on Mac, Control-Spacebar on Windows.
| | 06:17 | If you take a look the table right here you're actually
going to see this red dot hanging out right where my cursor is.
| | 06:22 | That means that the text isn't fitting in the cell for some reason.
| | 06:25 | Now this isn't a chapter on tables so I'm not going necessarily
to go over how to edit tables, but if you see something like that,
| | 06:33 | with your cursor selected, with your Text tool selected, I'm just going to
kind of open it up a little bit and see where the rest of the text is.
| | 06:39 | And there we go.
| | 06:40 | I'm going to go back to my black arrow here.
| | 06:43 | I'm going to fit the page in the window here, Command-0, Control-0
Windows, and if you take a look you're going to be able
| | 06:47 | to see, the table's a little big, you know, that's okay.
| | 06:50 | We can fit it in there.
| | 06:51 | One thing I want to do is fit it, we can actually go
to our Type tool again, come out to the side here.
| | 06:57 | If you just click and drag, you're just going to move
that last column, but if I hold my Shift key down
| | 07:02 | and I click and drag I can start to collapse the whole thing.
| | 07:04 | We're just going to have to be really careful about what text is fitting
in here and just kind of open things up so that everything will work.
| | 07:10 | I'm going to have a little bit of a problem with this, but that's fine.
| | 07:14 | So before I actually resize it, I probably want
to change the actual point size on that stuff.
| | 07:19 | Anyway, to get the table in here, it's kind
of like you copied and pasted it in here.
| | 07:23 | It's set, ready to go, looks exactly as you intended it
and we have basically, our Excel table sitting on the page.
| | 07:29 | Now that's working with Excel files.
| | 07:31 | There are several ways that we can work with these and
we're going to talk about that kind of coming up next here.
| | 07:36 | In the next section we're going to go through talking about
placing charts and graphs and kind of how those work.
| | 07:41 | So with "brochure," why don't you go ahead and close this up.
| | 07:44 | We're not going to save it and we're basically
done working with the Excel files.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing charts and graphs| 00:00 | Now, so far in this chapter on Word and Excel workflowworkflows, we talked
about how to actually place a Word document and bring in the styles
| | 00:08 | and also how to place an Excel file and bring in all the formatting
and just, you know, start to work with it inside of InDesign.
| | 00:14 | I've got "brochure" open here.
| | 00:15 | If you go to your exercise files folder in the chapter
5 folder you should see the "brochure.indd" document.
| | 00:21 | It's the same document we've been working with; I've just had you close
it and not save it just so that we can keep this area clear over here.
| | 00:27 | What we're going to do this time is we're going
to bring in another Excel file but we're going
| | 00:31 | to bring in a graph or a chart that we've created in Excel.
| | 00:35 | So what I'd like to do is I want to show you what it
looks like inside of Excel just to give you an idea.
| | 00:39 | So I'm going to go over to Excel, let me go over
over, you take a look, it's "product_list.xls."
| | 00:45 | This is located in your exercise files folder in the Chapter 5 folder.
| | 00:49 | If you don't have Excel in your machine, don't worry
about it; I'm just trying to show you what it looks like.
| | 00:54 | So this is what I actually started with.
| | 00:55 | If you look, this is the same thing we used in the last exercise.
| | 00:58 | If I look down here I can see three sheets.
| | 01:01 | The first sheet is what we use to actually
import the Excel workbook in the last exercise.
| | 01:06 | Sheet 2 is what we're going to use for this next one.
| | 01:08 | Now, here's the thing about InDesign and Excel with graphs and
charts: If you place a graph or a chart, like we have right here,
| | 01:16 | this is actually a chart, and I go to place this sheet from this workbook,
| | 01:20 | what's going to happen is InDesign is going
to totally ignore this chart or graph.
| | 01:25 | It just, it doesn't have the capability to be
able to bring those in easily out of the box.
| | 01:30 | So there's a couple of things we need to do to get it in there.
| | 01:32 | One of the things we can do is we can literally Copy, Paste.
| | 01:34 | It's going to sound kind of archaic but watch.
| | 01:38 | If I'm inside of Excel here, I'm going to click on the chart itself,
I'm going to go up to Edit>Copy, I can see the actual marching ants,
| | 01:47 | I'll go over to InDesign and I will just paste it on the page here.
| | 01:52 | And if you take a look, there is my actual chart.
| | 01:56 | Now if you don't have Excel, like I said, obviously
you're not going to be able to do something like this.
| | 02:01 | If you want to bring in charts and graphs from Excel,
you want to ask the person to be able to save it
| | 02:07 | out in a certain format and we're going to talk about that.
| | 02:09 | So once it's placed inside here, once I've pasted it in here, here's
what I'd like to do - we're going to zoom in a bit just to kind
| | 02:14 | of show you what it looks like; so I'm going to actually use my Command-
Spacebar, Control-Spacebar Windows - zoom in, not looking so hot.
| | 02:21 | Okay. Here's the thing though: it's pasted, so
basically what I did was I took it off the pasteboard.
| | 02:26 | What I want to do is I want to see what it's really going to look like.
| | 02:28 | This isn't the printing resolution, it's not what it's going to print
like, so what we're going to do is we're going to come under View,
| | 02:33 | come down to Display Performance and we're
going to go to High Quality Display.
| | 02:37 | I take a look; that's pretty much what
it's going to look like when it prints.
| | 02:41 | It's going to be doing a pretty good job;
it's still going to be vector artwork.
| | 02:44 | If I zoom in kind of tight here, just to show
you this, it's still going to be vector artwork;
| | 02:48 | it's Excel drawing this so you can't expect
perfect lines but it's going to do a good job.
| | 02:53 | So pasting it inside of here is basically just placing it in its own frame.
| | 02:57 | If I want to, this is a separate graphic, I use my white arrow over here,
my Direct Selection tool, I can still move it within the frame basically.
| | 03:03 | So it is within a graphics frame here.
| | 03:06 | Now, what I want to do is I want to show you your Links palette.
| | 03:08 | Let's see what happened in there.
| | 03:10 | Come under Window.
| | 03:11 | Normally when you get pictures out here or
graphics, you're going to see some kind of link.
| | 03:16 | You open the Links palette, let's just take a look here,
let me pull this off to the side by the actual title bar.
| | 03:21 | I'm going to, down by the lower right hand corner
here I'm going to open this thing up a little bit.
| | 03:25 | If you take a look you can see all the pieces that are in here already.
| | 03:28 | These little icons right here are actually telling me that
these objects are embedded, if you see the tool tip right there.
| | 03:33 | Now when you paste a lot of times from programs, especially
with pictures, charts, graphs, that sort of thing,
| | 03:39 | it's not going to treat it as a linked
graphic because it's not linking anything.
| | 03:43 | And it's not even treating it as an embedded
graphic; it's just kind of there.
| | 03:46 | Okay. So if you need to get it out of here, you can delete it.
| | 03:50 | If you need to put it somewhere else, you're going to
copy it and paste it somewhere else if you want to use it.
| | 03:55 | So that's kind of the state of using charts and graphs using Copy, Paste.
| | 03:59 | Now there's something else we can do and this is going to help you if
you're trying to get a chart or graph from somebody and they don't,
| | 04:04 | you know, you don't have Excel and they
don't want to send you the Excel file.
| | 04:08 | Here's what you can do.
| | 04:08 | I'm going to close up the Links palette here.
| | 04:11 | I'm going to go back over to Excel, let's go back over to
Excel here, now if you have Excel you can follow along.
| | 04:19 | Okay. If you don't, this is actually a good thing
to watch because you can tell someone what to do.
| | 04:23 | If you're trying to get a chart or graph from somebody, you don't
have Excel, you can tell them to actually make a PDF out of it.
| | 04:29 | The PDF is good as gold; you can use that thing to print with basically.
| | 04:34 | So what you can do is you can tell them to either just take that
sheet that they've got and make a PDF out of it or you yourself,
| | 04:41 | if you have Excel, you can kind of clean this up a little bit.
| | 04:45 | Now I know this is not a, you know, a little movie on Excel,
but we're going to go through just a quick thing we can do here.
| | 04:51 | With a chart, if I select it, if I come up under the Chart menu,
and I believe this is going to be the same on Windows and Mac,
| | 04:58 | excuse the difference of Excels here, you may have a
different or an older version or something like that,
| | 05:02 | we're trying to find what's called Location for chart.
| | 05:05 | If I go to Location, take a look, I can tell it
to actually make a new sheet out of this chart.
| | 05:12 | What we're trying to do is we're trying to make a PDF here.
| | 05:14 | Okay. So if you PDF this whole thing, it will get the table up top as well.
| | 05:18 | I just want to get the chart alone.
| | 05:20 | So if I click OK right now it's actually going to generate a whole
new chart sheet right here that I can actually create a PDF out of.
| | 05:27 | Once I go to File>Print I can make a PDF as long
as I have Acrobat and the ability to do that.
| | 05:32 | So if you have somebody that, you know, is trying to
give you a chart or a graph and you don't have Excel,
| | 05:38 | you can tell them to make a PDF out of that sheet or that chart page.
| | 05:42 | So it's kind of a nice, easy way to do that.
| | 05:44 | And if I go back over to InDesign, I take a look over
here, I'm going to deselect and place the PDF file.
| | 05:52 | To do that, we'll go to File>Place, making sure
nothing is selected, PDF file is already generated.
| | 05:57 | It should be in the exercise files folder in
the Chapter 5 folder called "product_list.xls.pdf."
| | 06:03 | There it is.
| | 06:04 | Now we'll go ahead and open it up.
| | 06:06 | I've got to get my Place icon here.
| | 06:08 | If I click and let it go, you can see that it is
basically the same thing as what was inside of Excel.
| | 06:14 | I'm going to go back to my Selection tool, hitting the V key.
| | 06:17 | I'm going to actually resize this thing, so I'm
going to actually do my Command-Shift on Mac
| | 06:22 | and I'll do Control-Shift on Windows,and be able to resize it inside.
| | 06:27 | Now you can see there's a little bit of
difference here between these two, but that's fine.
| | 06:30 | This one up top, when we pasted, it actually had that
border from Excel and placed it inside of here.
| | 06:36 | This one down here did not have the border and you can
see it is pushing right against the edge right there.
| | 06:41 | That's just a small little matter that we can take care of, but both of
these look just great and if I take a look by zooming into this one,
| | 06:47 | Command-Spacebar on this one, you can see that did a really good job.
| | 06:51 | As a matter of fact, I think it did a little bit better
job on the lines than the one that pasted inside.
| | 06:56 | So using a PDF is actually, kind of, it's a really
good way to be able to place things inside of here.
| | 07:00 | And the great thing about this, too, is that the PDF is linked.
| | 07:03 | If I go up to Window, come down to my Links palette and take a look,
let me open that up, I can actually see that the PDF is a linked file.
| | 07:10 | So if somebody were to send you an update for that PDF, you could replace
it within here pretty easily just by telling it to update the link itself.
| | 07:18 | So, you know, it seems like kind of like a work around
when working with charts and graphs but, you know,
| | 07:22 | I've got to do these sorts of things all the time so it's just a good
way to get used to how they work and how things can happen and being able
| | 07:29 | to get things from other people and tell them what you
need exactly and how you can actually go about that.
| | 07:35 | So this has been working with charts and graphs out of Excel.
| | 07:38 | I know I mentioned before but working with Word documents
as well, if you place a Word document and it has a chart
| | 07:44 | or graph built inside of it, that chart or graph will come in.
| | 07:47 | So it will come in with the Word document itself
and it will be right in line with the text,
| | 07:51 | for instance, if it was right here, it would be placed right in line.
| | 07:54 | It will actually be an embedded graphic.
| | 07:57 | So it will be a picture that you can select and
cut out of there or move wherever you want it to.
| | 08:01 | So they will come in from Word.
| | 08:03 | So that basically ends talking about the charts and graphs.
| | 08:05 | What I want to do next in the next section here is
we're going to talk about a Word linking workflow.
| | 08:10 | This will actually parlay into talking about Excel and Word documents
and how we can link them so that the updating process is a lot easier.
| | 08:17 | You can go ahead and close up "brochure."
| | 08:19 | We don't need to save this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| A Word linking workflows| 00:00 | Now for this section, we're going to talk about a Word linking workflow.
| | 00:03 | And basically what that means is if you, let me just put it this
way, let's say you're talking about working with some other people.
| | 00:10 | I used to work at a company where we had copy writers, designers, that
sort of thing, and we all worked on our separate objects, separate things.
| | 00:17 | Copy writers would work on the copy, I'd work on
the design and I'd get the Word document from them.
| | 00:21 | But occasionally there would be changes to the Word doc.
| | 00:24 | Now, as we've seen in a couple of the past exercises, we can
place Word documents and work with them but we can also link
| | 00:30 | to Word documents so that an updating process is relatively easy.
| | 00:33 | That's what we're going to do in this one.
| | 00:35 | So, I've got "brochure.indd" open here.
| | 00:37 | This is an InDesign document.
| | 00:38 | It's in the exercise files folder in the Chapter 5 folder.
| | 00:41 | Open up "brochure."
| | 00:42 | Hopefully yours looks similar to mine.
| | 00:44 | If you see any charts or graphs in the side
over here, go ahead and get rid of those.
| | 00:47 | I want an empty space on the side.
| | 00:48 | And let's reset our workspace just so we're all kind
of on the same page here so, Window>Workspace>Default.
| | 00:54 | Now, one thing I want to do, before we place the
Word document, I want to point out a few things.
| | 00:59 | Take a look over on the right hand side,
open up your Paragraph Styles palette.
| | 01:03 | If you take a look, we've already got some paragraph styles set up in here.
| | 01:06 | Matter of fact, I come over to my text, I am on page
2-3 right now; if you're not on it let's go to it.
| | 01:12 | If you double-click on your text right there and take a look in "The
many flavors of tea," I can basically see that the subhead is applied.
| | 01:18 | Now, here's what we're going to do, we're going to
bring in a Word doc that has some of these inside.
| | 01:22 | We're going to kind of see what happens when that works.
| | 01:25 | So, first things first though.
| | 01:26 | If I just place a text file and place it out
here I'm not going to be able to link to it.
| | 01:30 | So we want to create a link.
| | 01:31 | So we've got to go to our Preferences to do that.
| | 01:34 | So, come up under InDesign in the Mac, come under Edit
on the Windows machine, you'll see Preferences down there
| | 01:41 | and if you take a look, let's come to the Type preferences.
| | 01:45 | Opening that up, if you look at the Preferences dialogue box, take a look.
| | 01:48 | You're going to see, we kind of looked at these in a previous chapter.
| | 01:52 | I want to take a look at one of these.
| | 01:53 | It's extremely important when you're working with Word
documents, etc. If you take a look down here where it says Links.
| | 02:00 | By default when you place a Word document, a
link is not generated, a link is not created.
| | 02:05 | It's sort of like you Copy, Paste the text and get it in here.
| | 02:08 | But, if you really want to, if you want to have a
workflow like this which is suggested for some companies
| | 02:12 | where the copy editors are separate from the
designers, you can actually Create a Link.
| | 02:17 | By checking that checkbox right there, when you place a text file or
a spreadsheet file, Excel, for example, it will link to that file.
| | 02:24 | So, if the original is updated it will update in InDesign.
| | 02:27 | Pretty cool little workflow if you know what's happening.
| | 02:30 | That's the key.
| | 02:31 | All right, now, if you take a look right down here there's
also something nice that you can do when you copy and paste.
| | 02:37 | For instance, like you Copy, Paste from Excel is a chart or something you
could say just bring the Text or All the Information that comes with it.
| | 02:44 | Kind of a nice little feature right there, as well.
| | 02:46 | All right, concentrating on links here.
| | 02:49 | With that turned on, go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:52 | Once we place any text files right now they should link.
| | 02:55 | So let's go to, make sure your black arrow's
selected, click off to the side,
| | 03:00 | let's go up to File>Place. In the Chapter 5, in your exercise files folder,
| | 03:08 | we're going to be able to see "coffee_text."
| | 03:10 | We're going to bring that same document in.
| | 03:12 | I want to show the Import Options so I'm going to Shift-Click on Open,
that's the same thing as clicking on Show Import Options, don't forget.
| | 03:18 | Shift-Click Open, get it out there and we
should see our Microsoft Import Options.
| | 03:23 | Now, we basically did this in the first part of this chapter, but
the first part of the chapter we placed it in a blank document.
| | 03:30 | Now we've got documents which already have Styles inside
of it, plus we're also generating a link for this.
| | 03:36 | If you take a look, once again, I've got all my content out here.
| | 03:39 | Under Preset right here, we have the same thing as last
time, which is "brochure text," if you were following along,
| | 03:45 | and if you were doing all these exercises from the
first part of the chapter you will see "brochure text."
| | 03:50 | If not, you won't have anything under here.
| | 03:53 | Okay, that's fine, don't worry about that.
| | 03:55 | Take a look down here.
| | 03:56 | We're going to take a look at Preserve Styles.
| | 03:58 | We want to keep the styles in there, and
we're going to bring in any Inline graphics.
| | 04:02 | I don't want to bring in any styles we're not using.
| | 04:04 | Now, if you look right here, this is the
important thing: Style Name Conflicts.
| | 04:08 | There is a conflict here.
| | 04:10 | What that means is, when we bring in this
Word document there's a paragraph style.
| | 04:13 | If you take a look it says one paragraph.
| | 04:15 | There's a paragraph style that's basically named the
same thing as something that's inside this document.
| | 04:19 | So, it's our job to kind of figure out what to do.
| | 04:21 | When we bring it in you've got to figure out how it happened.
| | 04:25 | So, take a look at down here, you've got two options.
| | 04:28 | Import Styles Automatically just says let's define how it happens.
| | 04:32 | If you look under Paragraph Style Conflicts,
we have one conflict that's Paragraph.
| | 04:36 | So we've got to take care of this one.
| | 04:37 | If you click on the menu right here and
take a look you've got three things.
| | 04:41 | Use InDesign Style Definition says, anywhere you're using the same
paragraph style that's named the same thing, use what InDesign says.
| | 04:48 | Use its definition.
| | 04:50 | Redefine InDesign Style basically says, use the Word
paragraph style definition, so that'll bring that in.
| | 04:56 | Auto-rename is going to bring it in and let you use
the Word style, but it's going to rename it something.
| | 05:01 | So if it was subhead it might call it subhead1
or subhead copy or something like that.
| | 05:06 | This is a pretty shotgun approach right here.
| | 05:08 | This is a pretty, you know, I'm not going to look at
them, I'm just going to say yeah, let's just do that.
| | 05:12 | You can also customize how this works.
| | 05:14 | And this is usually a better idea if you see conflicts up here.
| | 05:18 | If I come down here to Customize Style Import,
I can actually turn on Style Mapping right here.
| | 05:23 | Just clicking on it basically, it's going
to open up a separate dialogue for us.
| | 05:26 | What happens is, it says okay, here's all the Word styles that
are coming in, here's all the InDesign styles that are out there
| | 05:32 | and this is what's going to happen to the Word styles as they come in.
| | 05:35 | Now, if you look it says Microsoft Word Style,
Normal, InDesign Style, New Paragraph Style.
| | 05:40 | Basically what that means is there's nothing called Normal in here, so it's
just going to generate a new paragraph style called Normal in InDesign.
| | 05:48 | Now, the big ones we've got to look at are down here.
| | 05:50 | If you look at where it says Microsoft Word Style
it says subhead, Indesign Style says subhead.
| | 05:55 | If you take a look, here's what we've got to do.
| | 05:57 | We've got to decide what to do here.
| | 05:58 | If you click on subhead right here in InDesign Style, it's going to
open up this menu, and you get to pick, for each one, what it does.
| | 06:06 | If I say Auto Rename, it's going to rename the Word style coming in, Redefine
InDesign Style is going to redefine the style, based on the Word styling.
| | 06:14 | No Paragraph Style, I can basically assign
it to any style I want to right here.
| | 06:18 | So, this is saying, if I bring in subhead and I want to apply
Headline where subhead was being used, I would choose Headline here.
| | 06:25 | Here's what I'd like to do.
| | 06:26 | I want to Redefine the InDesign Style.
| | 06:28 | So I choose Redefine InDesign Style.
| | 06:30 | What's going to happen is the Word Styling from subhead
is going to apply wherever subhead was used in InDesign.
| | 06:35 | So that's kind of cool.
| | 06:37 | So you only have one subhead style still.
| | 06:38 | Now, if you take a look you've got a button
down here called Auto-rename Conflicts.
| | 06:43 | That's kind of a way out.
| | 06:44 | That'll literally just say, just do like subhead1
and bring in the conflict style sort of thing.
| | 06:50 | We really controlled exactly what it did by redefining the Indesign style.
| | 06:53 | So every time you see a conflict you can go through
and pick out exactly what you want it to do.
| | 06:57 | So, I'm going to click OK.
| | 07:00 | We basically just set up Style Mapping.
| | 07:01 | And it takes a little bit to get used to it, and
if you have a lot of documents that have conflicts,
| | 07:07 | you know, it's going to take you just a few seconds.
| | 07:09 | But, if you bring in the same Word document all the time, or you decide
that you're doing the same thing kind of things and you're doing this like,
| | 07:15 | let's say a newsletter every month, and they have the same
styling, you can Save this Preset and it will save all
| | 07:22 | of the settings you have out here, which is kind of a nice thing.
| | 07:24 | We do that in the first section out here of the chapter.
| | 07:27 | So, we're basically done.
| | 07:28 | We've mapped the styles.
| | 07:29 | Click OK. Take a look.
| | 07:32 | Some of you may have this.
| | 07:33 | I kind of left this font in here to just kind of show some things.
| | 07:37 | If you see the Missing Fonts dialogue box
it means that something's using Times.
| | 07:41 | We'll pinpoint; it don't worry about it right now.
| | 07:44 | If you see the Missing Fonts dialogue, here's what you want to do.
| | 07:46 | We're going to leave it alone because it may be inside of a
paragraph style and we want to change it in the Paragraph Style.
| | 07:52 | Matter of fact, if you look over here you'll
also see that styles are already coming in.
| | 07:55 | So, for right now, let's click OK to get it through.
| | 07:59 | If you take a look you've got your loaded text cursor.
| | 08:01 | What I want to do is, we're just going to
click it right over here and let it go.
| | 08:05 | We could do Autoflow, but I just want to start it on the page here.
| | 08:07 | So, click, let it snap, and put it out there.
| | 08:11 | So, there we go, we've got our text file out here.
| | 08:13 | If you look in the Paragraph Styles palette you
can see we've got Heading 3, Normal, subhead.
| | 08:18 | Now, this is something that happened when we brought
it in, but the conflicting style was basically subhead.
| | 08:24 | We told it to use the Normal styling for
subhead, and overwrite the InDesign style.
| | 08:29 | If you take a look you're going to see, subhead has a disk next to it.
| | 08:32 | Basically what that means is it's using the one that came in from Word.
| | 08:37 | And if you look out on your page right now, if you look at the formatting
for subhead here, and also look at what the subheads used to look like,
| | 08:43 | they look like the same thing now because
we told it to use the Word format.
| | 08:47 | Now, if you look over at the Paragraph Styles palette you'll notice
that the Headline has no disk because there was no difference out there.
| | 08:53 | There was only Headline in Indesign.
| | 08:55 | It didn't come in from Word.
| | 08:57 | So, basically we've just controlled the styles themselves.
| | 09:00 | Now, if you take a look at it, here's what we're going to do.
| | 09:02 | I want to go to my Links palette.
| | 09:04 | So, come under Window, come to Links, if you take a look out here
you're actually going to see, if I open this up, let me drag it around,
| | 09:11 | grab it by the lower end corner here, you can open it up,
you're actually going to notice it says "coffee_text.doc" in there.
| | 09:18 | What this has done is it's actually generated
a link to the original Word file.
| | 09:23 | That basically means that if I go through and I
change this document in Word, it will update in here.
| | 09:30 | It's actually pretty crazy to think about.
| | 09:32 | So we're going to go ahead and do that.
| | 09:34 | Now, here's the thing, if you don't have Word on your machine,
in some ways this is kind of, where it's going to end basically.
| | 09:40 | You can watch this and see what happens, but if you have
Word on your machine you can actually do this workflow.
| | 09:46 | Now, if you're working with a team of people and somebody puts the
Word document out there for you to grab, and you place it in here,
| | 09:53 | if they're going to do the changes in Word that's fine.
| | 09:56 | When they update the Word document you will
see it's updated here in the Links palette.
| | 10:00 | But, for right now, I want to show you the process because I've only
got one machine here, so, if I'm going to update the Word document
| | 10:08 | with "coffee_text.doc" here selected, come down to the bottom, we're going
to see our Edit Original, which is our pencil, I'll click on that.
| | 10:14 | I already have the document open basically inside of Word,
and you can see it says, "Do you want to revert to saved?"
| | 10:19 | I'll say yes, that's fine.
| | 10:22 | And like I said if you have Word you can do
this, if you don't, don't worry about it.
| | 10:26 | You can watch what we're doing here.
| | 10:28 | If you take a look, I'm going to actually zoom out a bit.
| | 10:30 | I'm going to zoom out 75 percent so I can kind of see what's going on here.
| | 10:34 | Now, say, for instance that you're the one that's working
on the Word document and you need to make a change here.
| | 10:40 | This workflow I think works best if you've got a team of people and
somebody's working on the text, somebody's working on the design
| | 10:46 | and you just need to get the text in there and let
them take care of it, the copy writer, let's say.
| | 10:50 | So, say I'm the copy writer or I myself am doing this, I open the
Word doc one day and I suddenly realize that, you know what?
| | 10:58 | It should say "Tea types and more," so
I come in here and I say "and more."
| | 11:02 | If I save this Word document and I close this thing up, now, because
I'm doing this on my own machine here's what's going to happen.
| | 11:11 | I did my little pencil, I opened it up.
| | 11:13 | If I come right back over to InDesign and take a look, it
is going to update automatically for me, the content itself.
| | 11:19 | So, that's basically what it's doing.
| | 11:22 | Now, if somebody had opened it separately I would
see a yellow Yield sign, and I want to show you that.
| | 11:27 | So, what I'm going to do is I'm going out to my desktop, go out to Word.
| | 11:30 | I'm going to open up that file again, just to give you an idea here.
| | 11:36 | If I open it outside of InDesign and I decide that,
you know, it should say "Tea from around the world."
| | 11:42 | Of course this could, you know, you could
do major changes here if you want to.
| | 11:47 | It will reflect flow in InDesign, obviously.
| | 11:49 | But, if I open any Word document separate from InDesign
itself, let's say you had a copy editor doing this.
| | 11:55 | I'm going to say that, I'm going to close it up.
| | 11:58 | I'm going to come back over to InDesign.
| | 12:00 | Next time I go to open InDesign, if I take a look,
normally what it's going to do here is because it's
| | 12:06 | on my same machine InDesign is being smart
enough to automatically update it.
| | 12:10 | Normally what you will see is a yellow
Yield sign right here in the Links palette.
| | 12:14 | That means it's just like a picture.
| | 12:16 | I've actually got to come down and update the link itself.
| | 12:19 | It will bring in the changes.
| | 12:21 | And, if I take a look over here I will see the changes myself.
| | 12:24 | So, kind of a nice little thing we can do here.
| | 12:26 | If you update the styles in Word, those will come in, as well.
| | 12:29 | Now, something else you want to watch out for is this,
I'm going to move over a little bit, spacebar move over.
| | 12:34 | I'm going to take my Links palette and go
ahead and move it off to the side here.
| | 12:38 | I'm going to get my cursor here, I'm going
to place my text cursor and put it out here.
| | 12:42 | What I want to do is, I'm going to actually get into
subhead here and I'm going to change the formatting a bit.
| | 12:47 | So, I cover over to my subhead Paragraph
Style over here, I double-click, take a look.
| | 12:52 | What I'm going to do is I'm going to change some things.
| | 12:54 | So, I come to my Basic Character Formats,
click on that, lets say I don't want Helvetica.
| | 12:59 | Some of you may have had a problem out there with Helvetica, you may
see pink anyway, so, I'm going to do something like use Myriad Pro.
| | 13:05 | So, I'm going to go down here, I'll use Myriad Pro, and maybe
I want to do like a Bold Italic, or something like that.
| | 13:12 | So, I'm changing my subheads to look with Myriad Pro and Bold Italic.
| | 13:16 | If I click OK, take a look, you can see
them change all over the page out here.
| | 13:21 | Now, notice, if you look over the Paragraph
Styles palette, because you brought in a style
| | 13:26 | and it had a disk it means it's just kind of just brought in.
| | 13:29 | You haven't done anything to it.
| | 13:30 | But, once you change something inside of here and you edit that style
that disk will go away saying that you've done something in here.
| | 13:36 | It's sort of like a local style then.
| | 13:40 | Now, here's what I'm going to do.
| | 13:41 | I'm going to go back out and I'm going to go
back over to Word and do some changing here.
| | 13:46 | So, from my Links palette I've got my Word doc right here.
| | 13:49 | I'm going to come to my pencil, Edit Original, I'll click on it.
| | 13:52 | It should open right inside of Word.
| | 13:53 | Like I said if you don't have Word that's
okay you can just kind of watch for right now.
| | 13:57 | I'm going to come down here to one of my subheads.
| | 14:00 | I'll select that.
| | 14:00 | What I'm trying to do here is that I'm trying to make a change
and I want to see what it's going to do inside of InDesign.
| | 14:05 | The text content itself is a big deal.
| | 14:07 | Text content is always going to override.
| | 14:09 | It's going to work so that if you change it in Word it's
going to override what you've done inside of InDesign.
| | 14:15 | The content though, watch this.
| | 14:16 | Let me change the font color, change the font color a little bit.
| | 14:19 | I've got my Formatting palette out here, I'm in Word.
| | 14:22 | Because if you need to find some other way to do this, you can just
change the font size or whatever you feel comfortable with, that's fine.
| | 14:28 | I'm going to save my Word document.
| | 14:30 | I'm just making a change visually to the text.
| | 14:32 | I'm going to come back over to InDesign, take a look.
| | 14:36 | If you look here's what can wind up happening.
| | 14:39 | It says "Edits have been made to the imported version of the doc.
| | 14:42 | You will lose these edits by updating.
| | 14:44 | Do you want to update anyway?"
| | 14:46 | If I say No, it's not going to update.
| | 14:48 | If I click on Yes, take a look, it's going to update for me.
| | 14:54 | Now, if I look out here, this is called a local style, local formatting.
| | 14:57 | It's basically doing it locally.
| | 14:58 | It's not changing my paragraph style for me.
| | 15:01 | Matter of fact, if I hover over this you're
going to see it says color: Orange.
| | 15:05 | So, when you work back and forth with Word, utilizing this
type of system with a linking, you've got to be careful.
| | 15:11 | Because, if you go out and make text changes inside of here,
if it's still linked when you go to update that Word doc
| | 15:18 | from Word it's going to override what you've done in here.
| | 15:21 | When you do styling, styling inside of here is fine.
| | 15:25 | You can do it, you can work with your
paragraph styles; you can do local formatting.
| | 15:30 | But, as we've seen, if you go to update this, it can actually bring
in the styling from Word because we initially told it to bring it in.
| | 15:37 | So, with Word documents, when you do this
linking file format, you just have to be aware.
| | 15:43 | If you go to do a lot of changes out here and suddenly it updates on you,
it may make changes and get rid of some of the things that you've done,
| | 15:50 | so you've kind of got to be careful with things like that.
| | 15:52 | Now, from the Links palette here's one thing we can do.
| | 15:55 | If you have this linking workflow and
there's up to a point where the copy writer
| | 15:58 | or the copy editor has made the changes and they say it's final.
| | 16:02 | What you can do is you can actually cut the link to the Word document
and if you need to do any formatting in here you can do that.
| | 16:08 | From the Links palette, from the Word
document, if you come out to the side out here,
| | 16:11 | the Links palette menu if you take a look you're going to see Unlink.
| | 16:16 | That will actually get rid of the link
and just leave the text in here alone.
| | 16:20 | So, if I click on Link, the Word link is gone,
and if I take a look the text is still there,
| | 16:25 | the formatting's still there, paragraph styles are still there.
| | 16:27 | But it will no longer update when it comes from Word.
| | 16:31 | So, utilizing the Word workflow like this using links is a
great way to be able to work, if you have this sort of workflow.
| | 16:38 | This also works if you place Excel files.
| | 16:40 | So, if somebody updates the Excel file like a table, perhaps, it will
update in here; both the content, as well as the appearance of that thing.
| | 16:48 | So, like I said before, when you work with this kind of thing you
just kind of have to be aware of it, always look at your Links palette,
| | 16:54 | and try not to make too many changes out here because a lot of times
it can override when you bring in the Word document again as an update.
| | 17:01 | So, with "brochure," you can go ahead and save "brochure"
and close this up.
| | 17:05 | This ends the chapter, Working with Microsoft and Excel Workflows.
| | 17:09 | And, next we're going to start talking about long document features.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Working with TypeFootnotes| 00:00 | In this next chapter, we're going to
start talking about long document features.
| | 00:03 | Some of these include things like footnotes and
the ability to merge data within a document.
| | 00:09 | So in this section, we're going to go through and talk about footnotes.
| | 00:11 | I have "brochure" open.
| | 00:13 | From your exercise files folder from the Chapter
6 folder, you're going to open up "brochure."
| | 00:18 | Once again, if you are a monthly or annual subscriber, or you
don't have the CD-ROM, if you upgrade to the Premium subscription
| | 00:26 | or you purchased the CD-ROM, you can actually
have these files to follow along with.
| | 00:29 | Otherwise, you can utilize files that
you've got and just kind of follow along.
| | 00:33 | So what we're going to do is go through and create some footnotes here.
| | 00:36 | Now, footnotes are something that are used a lot when using
longer documents, books, you know, articles, that sort of thing.
| | 00:42 | InDesign gives us a great ability to work with footnotes.
| | 00:45 | Now if you take a look out here, what I want
to do is we are going to add a footnote.
| | 00:48 | I'm on the second page of this document, "brochure.indd."
| | 00:51 | If you look in the first column here, I'm actually
going to see, it says, "The Diary of a Tea Drinker."
| | 00:56 | Let me zoom in so you can see what I'm doing here.
| | 00:58 | Command-Spacebar, drag it across.
| | 01:00 | You take a look, it says, "The Diary of a Tea Drinker."
| | 01:02 | Now what we're going to do is we're going to create a footnote, which is
a reference saying where this from, basically where we pulled it from.
| | 01:07 | So to do that, I'm going to take my cursor, double-click
with my black arrow here, with my Selection tool
| | 01:12 | and I'll actually be able to go to my Type tool here pretty quickly.
| | 01:16 | Place the cursor where you want the footnote.
| | 01:18 | Now, I want to put it right after the title here.
| | 01:21 | Now, footnotes can go throughout a document, you
can have them on one page, it doesn't really matter.
| | 01:25 | And they're relatively easily controlled.
| | 01:27 | They're controlled appearance-wise by Style Sheets and things like that.
| | 01:30 | So, we've got a lot of things we can do with them.
| | 01:33 | So, to put a footnote in here with your cursor in there, come up to the
Type menu, come on down and you're going to see a couple things here.
| | 01:38 | You're going to see first of all Insert Footnote,
you're also going to see Document Footnote Options.
| | 01:43 | Now, Document Footnote Options controls the appearance
and location of your footnotes for the whole document.
| | 01:48 | We're going to just insert one and kind of work with it from there.
| | 01:51 | So, go ahead and click Insert Footnote.
| | 01:52 | If you take a look, it automatically brings you down to the bottom
of the column here, and inserts the actual footnote right there.
| | 01:59 | So, the footnote's at the bottom.
| | 02:01 | If I scroll up just a bit here you can see that right
where my cursor was I now have a footnote marker.
| | 02:06 | And there's a little number right there for me.
| | 02:08 | So, it's actually indicating what's going on.
| | 02:09 | This is actually pretty cool.
| | 02:10 | It's a nice easy way to do footnotes on here.
| | 02:12 | Now, if you've got a longer document yeah,
this may take a little bit longer.
| | 02:16 | But, for us we've got some simple things to do here.
| | 02:19 | Put your cursor down in the footnote down there with your Type tool.
| | 02:22 | And we're just going to, actually, you
know, I'm not going to make you type this.
| | 02:25 | If you come off to the side I'm going to use my Option key,
because my cursor's in there, Alt key in Windows, move over.
| | 02:31 | I've actually got the footnote right here, so we're just going to
copy and paste this, and make it a little bit easier on ourselves.
| | 02:36 | Let me grab all this.
| | 02:37 | So, we could type it in down there, but I'm just going to Copy.
| | 02:40 | I'm a little bit nicer than that so I'll let you just Paste this in.
| | 02:44 | So, place your cursor inside of the footnote right
there, and if I go ahead and paste I can take a look
| | 02:47 | and see that it actually placed the footnote content down there.
| | 02:50 | So, the one is actually referencing the footnote
marker, the footnote place holder up in the text.
| | 02:55 | We can control the look and feel of footnotes, as well.
| | 02:57 | If you take a look, you're going to see
that there's a black line right above here.
| | 03:01 | It's basically a rule above.
| | 03:03 | To control the footnote itself, with your cursor
in this, we're going to come up under Type.
| | 03:07 | If you take a look it says Document Footnote Options.
| | 03:11 | Now, you'll also notice right here that Insert Footnote
has actually changed to Go to Footnote Reference.
| | 03:16 | This is actually kind of neat because, if you had the cursor in a footnote
and you want to find out where that teeny number is up in the text,
| | 03:21 | the actual reference, you could just click this and it will take
you right to the actual reference number and show you where it is.
| | 03:27 | Anyway, let's come to the Document Footnote Options.
| | 03:29 | Go ahead and click.
| | 03:30 | That will open up the Footnote Options dialogue box, if you take a look.
| | 03:33 | It's kind of a big one, I admit, there's a lot in here, a lot to look at.
| | 03:37 | But, we can break it down pretty easily here.
| | 03:39 | When working with footnotes, if you take a look, you've got two things
that you can basically control: you can control how it looks basically,
| | 03:46 | the formatting itself, the position, the style, all that sort of thing.
| | 03:51 | And, you can control the layout.
| | 03:53 | The layout being where it's positioned, you know,
what kind of rule it has that sort of thing.
| | 03:58 | We're going to start with the Numbering and Formatting right here.
| | 04:00 | If you take a look you have a Style associated, which means
you can change the style of the actual footnote marker.
| | 04:06 | So, I can change it to anything I want here.
| | 04:08 | I'm going to keep it at numbers.
| | 04:09 | Of course, you can do it any way you want.
| | 04:11 | You can also start at a different number here.
| | 04:13 | So, if you're on, let's say a separate page
or something like that you could do that.
| | 04:16 | The interesting thing about footnotes is they usually just continue.
| | 04:20 | So you can, they just kind of go 1, 2, 3, 4, that sort of thing.
| | 04:23 | But, you can actually tell it to Restart the Numbering every so often.
| | 04:27 | So, for instance, I know that a lot of times, not by every page you
want to start the numbering, but sometimes if you have a spread is
| | 04:34 | like let's say short stories, you can
say start every Spread over at numbering.
| | 04:38 | Or, if you look right here, if you had set up Section
starts, sections inside of your page numbering
| | 04:43 | in your Pages palette, this will actually follow that.
| | 04:47 | This can be a really good thing for like books and, you
know, longer articles that you've set up sections for.
| | 04:51 | So that's kind of a nice feature.
| | 04:53 | Now, if you take a look, you can also do Prefixes and Suffixes right here.
| | 04:57 | That allows you to do like, you know, if you had like TOC-1 or
something like that, you know, its part of the Table of Contents.
| | 05:03 | Any kind of prefixing you want to do.
| | 05:05 | You can also put it in the Footnote Reference, which is the actual marker,
that little number up in the text, or in the Footnote Text itself, or both.
| | 05:14 | So, if you decide to put a prefix or a suffix, which we don't
really need in this case, we're not going to put it in there.
| | 05:19 | If you look down here at Formatting, this allows you to basically
change the look and feel of the Footnote Reference Number,
| | 05:26 | so that's the number up in the text, or the Footnote Formatting.
| | 05:29 | Footnote Formatting being the formatting
down here at the bottom of the column.
| | 05:33 | Now, if you take a look, the Position right here of
the Footnote Reference Number is basically saying,
| | 05:38 | it actually did a Superscript, which means it pushed it up on the text.
| | 05:42 | If you guys want to do a Subscript you could do
that, which basically pushes it below the line.
| | 05:46 | There's a lot of different ways.
| | 05:47 | I mean, superscript, I believe, is the accepted
format for a footnote reference number.
| | 05:52 | If you look at Character Style, if you had any character styles
set up you can actually apply it to that number if you wanted to.
| | 05:57 | Now, I don't have any set up right now, and that's fine.
| | 05:59 | I usually don't do that because it looks great the way it is.
| | 06:02 | If you look down at Footnote Formatting, we can either apply a
Paragraph Style to the footnote down here, through this dialogue box,
| | 06:10 | or you can go out here and select the text and apply that paragraph style.
| | 06:13 | I, you know, InDesign actually suggests, Adobe suggests that you
do it through here because it controls all your footnotes then.
| | 06:19 | So, it's up to you but if I take a look inside here
I can see that, well, let me do something like this.
| | 06:24 | I'm going to apply something like subhead.
| | 06:26 | Normally you'd set up styles ahead of time.
| | 06:27 | If I click on Preview and take a look, you're actually going to see that
the formatting itself, if I move this dialogue out of the way, has changed.
| | 06:34 | So, any one of these I choose, they're going to get kind of big here.
| | 06:37 | You better watch out for that.
| | 06:38 | Heading 3 is going to be pretty big.
| | 06:40 | So, if I just keep it at a Basic Paragraph style,
something like that, it'll look pretty good.
| | 06:44 | Once again, you can control this with Paragraph Styles.
| | 06:47 | Now, the Separator is actually saying,
this is actually the character for a tab.
| | 06:51 | What's going on here is between the number and the actual
text it's placing a tab for you, so it's pushing that over.
| | 06:57 | Once again, pretty accepted.
| | 06:58 | If you really wanted to you could put something like a different space.
| | 07:01 | I could even type something in here, like
if I wanted, you know, four bullet points
| | 07:06 | or something you could type those right in there and that's your separator.
| | 07:09 | So it's kind of nice.
| | 07:10 | The only thing you've got to watch out with the Separator is if you
go to do another separator like let's say an Em Space or something,
| | 07:16 | take a look out here, I keep switching back and forth.
| | 07:19 | Every once in a while what it's going to do
is it's going to double these up for you.
| | 07:22 | You're going to see it says Em Space, that's the
little hat m, and then you've got tab right there.
| | 07:27 | So you've got to be careful with that.
| | 07:28 | I'm going to get rid of this one.
| | 07:29 | Now that we have the look and feel done, you know, we didn't do
too much to it, that's fine, I want to control the layout itself.
| | 07:36 | So, if you click on the Layout tab up here, and you'll see
that, we actually have some ability to control the layout.
| | 07:42 | Now, this is the layout of the footnote text down here.
| | 07:45 | If you take a look it says Minimum Space Before First Footnote.
| | 07:48 | What this allows me to do is, if I type in a number
here like let's say .2 inches, or something like that.
| | 07:53 | It's going to actually put some space above the line above,
or the rule above right here, which can be kind of nice.
| | 07:59 | In this case, it's the end of the column so it's actually
going to push that next text over to the other column.
| | 08:05 | Space Between Footnotes is a good one if you have
multiple footnotes, which is what we're going to do,
| | 08:09 | we want to put a little space between them so they're not quite so crowded.
| | 08:13 | We'll do that in a little bit.
| | 08:14 | Take a look at the First Baseline, this allows you to actually
control where the first baseline of the footnote sits.
| | 08:20 | If you take a look right here, we have the ability to start it somewhere,
like of the Leading value, the Cap Height, etc. Now, just watch,
| | 08:27 | the Min value right here allows you, if you increase this value,
eventually what it's going to do is it's going to start to push, now,
| | 08:34 | I know it's pushing this rule above up, but technically this text
is at the bottom of the column and it can't open up the column,
| | 08:42 | so it's got to do something here, it's
got to put some space, so it pushes up.
| | 08:45 | So, it's taking the leading value, which is basically the baseline
out here, pushing it down a half an inch from the actual rule above.
| | 08:53 | So that's kind of what it's doing.
| | 08:54 | So you want to give yourself a little space,
I'm going to pull that down just a little bit.
| | 08:57 | That looks pretty good, not too bad.
| | 08:59 | Uh, the Minimum Space Before Footnotes, I might bring
that down just a hair and see what that looks like.
| | 09:03 | Yeah, a little better.
| | 09:04 | So that's the space before, right there.
| | 09:07 | Now, if you take a look down here at Placement Options.
| | 09:09 | Place End of Story Footnotes at Bottom of Text.
| | 09:12 | Basically, what that means is, if I actually set that right there.
| | 09:16 | End of Story Footnotes, that's basically
going to place them at the end of the story.
| | 09:20 | The story is the end of the threaded frames out here.
| | 09:23 | So, if all these frames are threaded together what it's going to try and
do is it's going to try and place all your footnotes out here at the end
| | 09:29 | of the story, which is the last text frame at the bottom.
| | 09:33 | So, you could do that if you want to.
| | 09:34 | I know some articles, some instances that works.
| | 09:37 | In this case, I like to have it right below.
| | 09:39 | Now, if you take a look right here, it says Allow Split Footnotes.
| | 09:43 | This basically means that, this is actually better seen than done, but,
Allow Split Footnotes allows the footnote itself to go across the column.
| | 09:53 | So, in other words, if this was a really long footnote and I wanted
it to stretch across, with this check it will be able to do that; but,
| | 10:00 | under a certain circumstance, and we're going to
see how that works in just a few minutes here.
| | 10:06 | Now, the Rule Above actually controls the line above the footnote itself.
| | 10:10 | So, if I move this over a bit you can
see right here I've got this rule above.
| | 10:13 | This controls the Weight, the Style, the Type, etc. Now, if you take a
look you can actually have a line, this rule go above the First Footnotes
| | 10:20 | or above what's called Continued Footnotes, footnotes that continue on.
| | 10:24 | Now, you don't have to have a rule if you
don't want to, I can turn it on, turn it off.
| | 10:29 | And I can control the size, the weight, the type, everything
I want to do here, which is kind of a nice little feature.
| | 10:35 | Now, the width itself is 1 inch.
| | 10:37 | That's pretty typical.
| | 10:38 | If you want it to be wider, I can change that number right there.
| | 10:40 | I'm just typing in the value.
| | 10:41 | You'll notice I'm clicking on the actual label right here,
and that's selecting the text, then I can type in the number.
| | 10:47 | Then you tab and take a look, it's actually two inches down.
| | 10:51 | So a little bit out of the norm, but that's fine.
| | 10:53 | Now, I've got a little problem down here with my actual
page number, that sort of thing, but that's my own problem.
| | 10:58 | I've got to move that stuff to make it look good.
| | 11:01 | So there we go.
| | 11:01 | So we've actually got the numbering and formatting,
we've got the layout of the footnote itself.
| | 11:04 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 11:05 | I think that looks pretty good.
| | 11:07 | What I want to do is this, if you take a
look out here, I'm going to scroll up a bit.
| | 11:12 | I'm going to come up.
| | 11:13 | You should be able to see the number right now
actually is subscript out here if you take a look.
| | 11:17 | That's because we just set it that way.
| | 11:19 | Like I said, this is a little different way of doing it.
| | 11:21 | Superscript is pretty typical out there.
| | 11:23 | Now, if I select this footnote number right here and I take a look, if
I right-click out here you can actually see, we've got some options.
| | 11:30 | Now, of course, if you're on a Mac that has a one-button
mouse you can select that little placeholder right there,
| | 11:35 | that number, and Contol-Click to get this menu out here.
| | 11:39 | You will see Insert Footnote, or, Go to Footnote Text.
| | 11:44 | We saw before that if we were in the footnote text down below, down here
that we could go straight to the footnote marker, or the footnote number.
| | 11:51 | So it's just another way.
| | 11:52 | So, if I say Go to Footnote Text, it's just going to take
me down to the text on here and put my cursor inside of it.
| | 11:58 | So, with a bigger document you can kind of
bounce back and forth and see where things are.
| | 12:02 | All right, so let's do this.
| | 12:03 | We're going to put one more out here just to give
you an idea of what's called a continued footnote.
| | 12:07 | If you take a look right here, which is 1904,
we're going to place a footnote right there.
| | 12:11 | So, place your cursor where it says 1904, I'm
going to come up to Type>Insert Footnote.
| | 12:16 | You know, if you do enough footnotes out
here, you notice there's no shortcut for this.
| | 12:20 | You could right-click out here where your cursor is.
| | 12:23 | You could also assign a shortcut key to this
Insert Footnote right here, to this command.
| | 12:28 | And that can be done under Edit>Keyboard Shortcuts.
| | 12:32 | So, let's click on Insert Footnote.
| | 12:34 | If I do that it's actually going to place the number 2, you'll
notice it's keeping the same formatting, it's a subscript.
| | 12:39 | Take a look out here.
| | 12:40 | It's actually putting a little space right there, which is kind of nice.
| | 12:43 | And we're going to type in some text here.
| | 12:44 | Now, I'm going just going to literally just type.
| | 12:47 | Don't worry, if we wanted to put this out
here and be really methodical, I could.
| | 12:51 | I just want to show this to you.
| | 12:53 | As I go and type, I know this is a little silly, as I
go and type watch what starts to happen here eventually.
| | 12:59 | Look what's happening to my footnote out here.
| | 13:02 | You can see that the footnotes were pushed up, until
it comes to an actual footnote number right here.
| | 13:08 | Once it comes to the number, these footnotes can't go any
higher, they're not going to be able to go any higher.
| | 13:13 | So, what has to happen is one of two things: the footnotes either
have to continue across up here, or go straight across over here.
| | 13:21 | Now, here's what we're going to do.
| | 13:22 | With your cursor inside of one of these footnotes, come up
to Type>Document Footnote Options, let's open those up.
| | 13:29 | You could also right-click on the text.
| | 13:31 | If you look inside of here, what we're going to do
is we're going to go to Layout tab, click on Layout.
| | 13:36 | And if you look you're going to see Allow Split Footnotes.
| | 13:41 | This right here, when selected, allows
our footnotes to actually split across;
| | 13:45 | which means if you look right here, it allows them to go across the column.
| | 13:49 | This is actually a pretty typical method for doing things like this.
| | 13:52 | So, if I didn't have the Allow Split Footnotes on, if you take a look,
what it's going to do is it's actually going to have to push, like I said,
| | 13:59 | push the footnote over so that it's actually
in the second column over here.
| | 14:02 | And that's a feature that, you know, I don't think that
looks so hot so I might always, I usually keep that on.
| | 14:07 | It's kind of a nice little thing.
| | 14:09 | So there we go.
| | 14:10 | So that's basically being able to work with footnotes.
| | 14:12 | A lot of ways we can do that, a lot of simple ways.
| | 14:15 | A lot of formatting options we have out here.
| | 14:17 | I'm going to click OK to kind of get this out of here.
| | 14:20 | If you take a look, we can, also, like I said,
you can go out here and format anything you want.
| | 14:24 | I can format the actual number, if you want to do these separately.
| | 14:27 | I can maybe make that bold, I can change the size
of it, there's all sorts of things we can do.
| | 14:31 | I can change the color.
| | 14:33 | But, when you go out here and you decide to actually format either
the footnote text or the footnote number you're doing it one by one.
| | 14:41 | So, you're doing it for one at a time.
| | 14:43 | Using Type>Document Footnote Options, you are
actually able to control the footnotes all at one time,
| | 14:49 | utilizing things like paragraph styles and character styles.
| | 14:52 | So, like I said, you could go out here and do that, but
I would suggest doing all your formatting through here.
| | 14:58 | This right here, this Document Footnote
Options, requires that you set up styles first.
| | 15:02 | So that's just something you've got to think about.
| | 15:05 | And I didn't actually mean to go in there, so we'll cancel out of that.
| | 15:08 | So, there we go.
| | 15:09 | We've got footnotes.
| | 15:09 | If you ever want to delete a footnote, the
one thing you can do is you can either,
| | 15:13 | if you take a look right where it says 2, the reference number here,
| | 15:16 | if I delete that number, it will actually delete the footnote itself.
| | 15:19 | So you've actually got to be pretty careful with this.
| | 15:22 | I'm going to Undo that, I'm going to Command-Z, Control-
Z, Windows, and then we've got our footnote back.
| | 15:27 | So, to either delete the footnote, you can delete the
footnote text or you can actually delete the reference number.
| | 15:31 | So it's kind of a nice little feature.
| | 15:33 | These footnotes basically allow you to do all sorts of things.
| | 15:36 | If you have a Word document you bring in, the footnotes that are created
in Word will come in here and they are editable, which is a nice feature,
| | 15:42 | if you tell it to bring the footnotes in when you place the Word document.
| | 15:46 | So footnotes have a lot of features, a lot
of different things we can do with them.
| | 15:50 | They're a great long document feature, something that you can work with.
| | 15:53 | Now, continuing with the long document features, in the next
section we're going to go through and talk about data merge,
| | 15:58 | which is a great, great feature for us to be able to work with.
| | 16:01 | So what we can do is with "brochure," you can
actually close this up, you do not need to save it.
| | 16:05 | And we are basically done with footnotes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Data Merge intro| 00:00 | Another long document feature that we can work with
which is actually kind of a nice automation feature.
| | 00:05 | This could have been on under the automations
section, it's actually data merge.
| | 00:10 | This is a great feature, which if any of you have ever made
labels for anything and you've ever used Word or Excel to do
| | 00:18 | that, you'll know what I'm talking about with data merge.
| | 00:21 | Let's say you're creating labels or you're creating something
like a postcard, something we've got in front of us right here.
| | 00:26 | This "card_merge-final" document is in the
exercise files folder in the Chapter 6 folder.
| | 00:31 | If you'd like to open it up you can, that way you can kind
of follow along and just take a look, otherwise just watch.
| | 00:36 | Data merge allows you to take an Excel file that's
actually a spreadsheet that has data inside of it
| | 00:41 | like people's names, their addresses, pictures, things like that.
| | 00:46 | It allows you to merge them into a document creating multiple documents.
| | 00:50 | So, for instance we're going to create this postcard.
| | 00:53 | This postcard is meant to be mailed out to a number of people.
| | 00:56 | So, instead of generating the postcard over and over again -
you're changing people's names and that sort of thing -
| | 01:02 | or letting like a mail fulfillment house do
this for us, we can do it inside of InDesign.
| | 01:06 | This is brand new in CS2.
| | 01:07 | So, what we're going to do is we're just going to discuss it and then in
the next movie, the next installment we're going to go thru and
| | 01:13 | actually do it.
So, here's what I'd like to do.
| | 01:14 | This is the final version, and I want to show
you kind of what it looks like when it's done.
| | 01:18 | Come under Window up in the menus, take a
look at the Automation section right here.
| | 01:23 | Come to Data Merge.
| | 01:25 | You take a look inside of the Data Merge right here.
| | 01:27 | You're actually going to be able to see
that I have this text file that was set up.
| | 01:31 | The text file we're going to take a look at in just a minute
actually has people's names, addresses, that sort of thing, okay?
| | 01:36 | And, if you take a look I've broken them down into categories,
first, last name, address, city, state, zip, etc, and even a photo.
| | 01:42 | Now, when I created this initial document I went thru and set up some
areas where I could put like their first name, a photo, that sort of thing.
| | 01:51 | As a matter of fact, if I go to page 2 in the Pages palette, so we'll click
on page 2, if you take a look you can actually see that I've got an area,
| | 01:57 | this is a postcard, so I've got an area for
their name, address, zip, all that sort of thing.
| | 02:01 | So, in the next lesson, the next session we're going to
go thru I'm going to show you how to set up the software.
| | 02:05 | For right now I just want to show you what the final piece can look like.
| | 02:08 | Now, first of all I had to set up the text file.
| | 02:10 | My text file is called "merge_data.txt."
| | 02:12 | Now, I'm going to go over to Excel and just
kind of show you what that looks like.
| | 02:15 | So, I'm going to click on Excel here.
| | 02:17 | If you don't have Excel that's okay I'm just
trying to show you what things look like.
| | 02:21 | This is just a simple Excel file, and the way it
works is with the Excel file I set up my columns here.
| | 02:27 | If you take a look I've actually got columns
separated out into what I want: first name, last name,
| | 02:31 | company, etc. And, I also have a Photos column over here.
| | 02:36 | Now, there's specific name you can mention on this stuff, and I'll talk
about that in a little while when we get to our second session here.
| | 02:41 | But, if you look it's got everybody's information.
| | 02:43 | Now, what I want to do is I want this
postcard to be sent to everyone on this list.
| | 02:47 | So, what I do is I created an Excel file here.
| | 02:49 | I actually set it out, or saved it out, as a tabbed delimited
file, went back to InDesign, I brought it in linked to it,
| | 02:57 | and then said let's place the first name here, last name here, etc.
Once I did that, what I can do is I can actually Preview how it looks.
| | 03:04 | Watch what this does.
| | 03:05 | If I turn on Preview it automatically inserts the content for me.
| | 03:09 | Now, if you take a look, we had four records, four
people that we're going to send this postcard to, in that Excel file.
| | 03:14 | If I go thru my arrows here I can actually see
its going to automatically update this content.
| | 03:19 | Now, this is great right?
| | 03:21 | I can print each one out separately, but this takes it a step further
and it allows me to actually generate multiple pages from this
| | 03:27 | and I actually have everybody's name and content in there automatically.
| | 03:30 | Now, I'm going to show you one more thing.
| | 03:32 | I'm going to come back up to the first page, double-click on page
1, and if you take a look you can see it says, "Hello Mark!"
| | 03:38 | This is the typical stuff you see like
on demand printing, that sort of thing.
| | 03:42 | If you look right here I've actually got a picture box.
| | 03:44 | Now, I've got a photo in here, and there's only one photo.
| | 03:47 | Let me take a look.
| | 03:47 | I'm going to go thru here, and let's say Brian's got
the only photo in there.
| | 03:50 | What a handsome looking man.
| | 03:53 | If you look, everybody else does not have a photo.
| | 03:55 | This is a great thing to be able to do because if you want to personalize
something with a data merge you can say here I'm just going to get a collection
| | 04:01 | of folders, put them in the images file and basically link to them.
| | 04:04 | So, that's what we're doing here.
| | 04:06 | So, when I'm ready to go I can actually save this out and get it to work.
| | 04:10 | So, with data merge you've got a lot of
things you can do: setting up an Excel file,
| | 04:14 | getting it to merge into an existing file, and be able to work from there.
| | 04:19 | So, what we're going to do next is we're actually going
to set up the Excel file, we're going to save it out,
| | 04:25 | we're going to come into a non-finalized version of this card
merge, and we're going to go ahead and set up the data merge itself.
| | 04:31 | So, you can close up the "final" one here, and
we're going to start working on the data merge.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Data Merge setup| 00:00 | Now that we've discussed what data merge is, let's
go ahead and actually merge some data into our card.
| | 00:05 | I have "card_merge.indd" open.
| | 00:08 | If you have the files, this is actually in your
exercise files folder in the Chapter 6 folder.
| | 00:13 | You can open that up.
| | 00:14 | I'm on page 1.
| | 00:16 | And if you take a look, what's been set up here is
there's been a little text box put up here for "Hello".
| | 00:21 | And if I go to the second page, I'm going to double-click on
the second page here; there's basically nothing out here.
| | 00:26 | So what we need to do is we need to kind of
set things up just quickly for ourselves.
| | 00:30 | When you do data merge you've got to be able
to have a container that the data goes into.
| | 00:34 | Now, that container can be on a master page if you want it to
be on every page, or you can just draw it directly on the page.
| | 00:41 | So what I want to do is let's go back up to page
1, double-click on page 1 in the Pages palette.
| | 00:45 | We've already got the "Hello" up here and
the text is going to go right in there.
| | 00:49 | But we've got to get a place for our picture out here.
| | 00:51 | So I'm going to come over to my Rectangle Frame tool.
| | 00:54 | Let's just click and draw ourselves a frame
out here, just kind of get it set on the page.
| | 00:59 | It doesn't have to be perfect right now.
| | 01:00 | That's fine.
| | 01:00 | We'll get it set in here.
| | 01:01 | We can always move it in location.
| | 01:03 | All right, so that's where our picture's
going to go when we actually merge our data.
| | 01:07 | Now let's go back down to page 2.
| | 01:08 | I'll double-click or you can scroll.
| | 01:10 | It doesn't matter.
| | 01:11 | And we need to get a text frame out here just so we
can put our name, address, and all that sort of thing.
| | 01:15 | So I'm going to go to my Type tool; press my T to get to my Type tool.
| | 01:19 | I'm just going to - now, if you're setting up a post
card, you know, according to, you know, regulations,
| | 01:24 | you've got to have this in a certain area, that sort of thing.
| | 01:26 | But for right now I'm just going to set out a text
field right here just for ourselves to set in.
| | 01:30 | There we go.
| | 01:31 | So we've actually got our are text field set up.
| | 01:33 | I don't want to be able to see this.
| | 01:34 | You could put a border on it; you could do whatever
you want to, but I just want a text field to go out.
| | 01:39 | All right.
| | 01:40 | Back to the Selection tool.
| | 01:42 | Go ahead and save the file and what we're going to do
is I'm going to take a look at the Excel file itself.
| | 01:46 | Okay? So I am going to go over to Excel.
| | 01:48 | Now if you don't have Excel, it's fine.
| | 01:50 | Don't worry about it.
| | 01:51 | I've already saved the final data file out.
| | 01:54 | So I just want to show you what it's going to look like inside of Excel.
| | 01:57 | So I am going to come over to Excel.
| | 01:58 | If you take a look, I've got the XLS file itself.
| | 02:01 | Now here's the thing about the Excel file,
you've got to set it up a certain way.
| | 02:05 | Okay? Because this is the only way that InDesign's going to understand it.
| | 02:08 | You want to, for each column, you want to put naming up top.
| | 02:12 | Now you can name this just about anything you want.
| | 02:15 | They actually suggest doing uppercase, that sort of thing.
| | 02:17 | So you put the name of the actual column, or the name of the content
container I guess you could say, and then you put the content below it.
| | 02:24 | So each one of these is a record, straight across, inside of a row.
| | 02:27 | So you've got columns which are the actual
containers, and then the rows are the content itself.
| | 02:32 | Now I over here I have a special one.
| | 02:34 | This is called the Photos.
| | 02:36 | This is how you can actually get photographs, get a link to
show up inside of the actual merged document with this data.
| | 02:43 | Now the key to this is you've got to have a picture set
up, and we've got one inside the exercise files folder,
| | 02:48 | got to have a picture set up and you've got to know the path to it.
| | 02:51 | Okay? So that's a big key right there.
| | 02:53 | Now to set this data merged file up, I want to show you something.
| | 02:56 | There is a naming convention with certain things
such as Photos up here and the photo path itself.
| | 03:02 | I want to take you back over to InDesign and I want to show you
a resource that you can look at to be able to help yourself out.
| | 03:08 | Now, when you work with InDesign, I know I'm supposed to
be telling you everything and showing you how to do things,
| | 03:14 | but honestly with naming conventions and path and directories and
things like that, I want to show you a resource you can use.
| | 03:21 | If you come under Help - I don't know how many of you have used InDesign
help in the past or have used it before, but I use it once in a while.
| | 03:27 | It's not too bad.
| | 03:27 | It's actually a separate application.
| | 03:29 | So I am going to click on InDesign Help.
| | 03:30 | It should open it up for me if you take a look.
| | 03:32 | Yours may take a couple of seconds longer here.
| | 03:35 | I'm going to go and look for data merge.
| | 03:36 | I've already typed it in up here, and do a search.
| | 03:39 | Now like I said, I'm not trying to dish you off
here and show you, no, this is where it is.
| | 03:43 | So what I want to do is this, let's see here, here we go.
| | 03:48 | Now, typically the naming convention on things, like I said before,
is just the column name itself, you name it whatever you want.
| | 03:55 | If you take a look inside of here, it's going to actually
give you a couple of tables down here to look at.
| | 04:01 | Now if you look right here, it says there's
one for Windows and there's one for Mac OS.
| | 04:05 | This is why I'm showing you this, because they're different.
| | 04:08 | If you want to have a photo be brought in as a data merge,
you've got to have a folder set up with the picture inside of it.
| | 04:14 | Okay, the picture could be a JPEG, it could be a
GIF, it could be anything you want for the most part.
| | 04:19 | Now the actual column name is going to be the "at"
symbol (@) and the word photos with a capital P. Okay?
| | 04:26 | They're kind of particular about that.
| | 04:27 | You've got to name the column this right here.
| | 04:30 | Now the thing about Excel is if you use Excel
to do this, they actually put it in here.
| | 04:33 | It's kind of interesting.
| | 04:34 | They say that if you put the @ symbol out there inside of a cell,
it's going to give you an error because it thinks it's a function.
| | 04:39 | So what you want to do is you want to type in an apostrophe
before the @ symbol and then the word Photos in capitals.
| | 04:46 | Okay? It's being kind of particular here.
| | 04:49 | So that's one reason why I wanted to show you this.
| | 04:52 | Now another reason I wanted to show you this is because if you've
got a picture and you're in Excel and you're trying to point it
| | 04:57 | to the picture itself, it's usually an absolute link.
| | 05:01 | So you've got to start it from your hard drive type thing.
| | 05:04 | On Windows you're actually going to be using this type of format here.
| | 05:07 | So you'd use the name of your hard drive
which is usually C or something like that.
| | 05:11 | You're going to use backslashes to get to the
actual document itself, to get to the picture.
| | 05:16 | On a Mac I usually start from the hard drive itself and work my way out.
| | 05:21 | So you'll actually, if it's, you know, on your desktop, that sort of
thing you can work that way, but you notice right here it's colons
| | 05:27 | in between each folder instead of backslashes like that.
| | 05:31 | Okay? So I just wanted to give you an idea of what you could do here.
| | 05:34 | This is Adobe Help Center and a way for
you to kind of see the naming conventions.
| | 05:37 | So I'm going to get out of here.
| | 05:39 | I'm going to get out of Adobe Help Center.
| | 05:40 | I don't need that open anymore.
| | 05:42 | I'm going to go back over to Excel and take a look.
| | 05:44 | So as you can see, the little apostrophe kind of goes away,
I've got the @ symbol and Photos and I've got my path right here.
| | 05:51 | So I'm basically set up.
| | 05:53 | Okay? I've got all the content set up.
| | 05:54 | Now the only other thing you've got to do is
you want to save this as a tab delimited file.
| | 05:58 | Okay? I've already got it saved, but to do that I could come usually,
this is Excel as an example, you don't have to use this program,
| | 06:05 | but if I do a Save As and take a look, I've actually got it inside of here.
| | 06:09 | It's called "merge_data.txt."
| | 06:11 | And usually from these programs you can
pick something like Text (Tab delimited).
| | 06:16 | Now once I do that, I'm going to Save it.
| | 06:18 | Like I said, if you don't have Excel, it's already in there.
| | 06:20 | You don't have to worry about it.
| | 06:21 | I'm going to Replace it.
| | 06:22 | That's fine.
| | 06:23 | You get a lot of these things.
| | 06:24 | It says, you know Excel does this sort of thing, it says
you've only got a single sheet, blah blah blah, there we go.
| | 06:29 | Okay. We're basically done with Excel.
| | 06:31 | I want to get back over to InDesign now that we've got our content set up.
| | 06:35 | Now, back in InDesign, here's what we're going to do.
| | 06:37 | We've got our container sitting out here.
| | 06:38 | Now I've got to tell it what data to grab, so what Excel data to grab.
| | 06:43 | So with your Data Merge palette open, if you don't have it
open, come under Window>Automation. You should be able to see it.
| | 06:49 | If you look out here, we've got to actually attach the text document now.
| | 06:53 | So from Data Merge come out to the Data Merge
menu, you're going to see Select Data Source.
| | 06:58 | So if you click on that, it's going to say, okay, where is the file?
| | 07:01 | In the exercise files folder in Chapter
6, you should see "merge_data.txt."
| | 07:06 | Like I said, if you didn't have Excel, it's already done.
| | 07:09 | It's right there.
| | 07:10 | So that's a tab delimited file.
| | 07:11 | Go ahead and click Open.
| | 07:13 | And if you take a look, it's got all the columns in there for us.
| | 07:16 | So each one of these columns have been
separated out into a little container for us.
| | 07:20 | Now, here's how this works, I'm going to come up to the first page.
| | 07:24 | Let's go to the first page.
| | 07:25 | I'll double-click on page 1.
| | 07:27 | I want it to say "Hello" and then somebody's
first name, okay, coming from the Excel file.
| | 07:32 | So what I want to do is this, I'm going to get my cursor right before
the actual exclamation point there, come back to the data merge file.
| | 07:39 | Let me move this over so you can see it.
| | 07:42 | Come over to the Data Merge palette.
| | 07:43 | You're going to see "First Name" with a T next to it.
| | 07:45 | That means that this is text.
| | 07:46 | Now wherever your cursor is, if you double-click,
it's actually going to place the place holder out there.
| | 07:52 | Okay? You can see it right there.
| | 07:53 | That's just a place holder.
| | 07:55 | Now the only thing you've got to concern yourself with is
this text frame has got to be big enough to fit all of this.
| | 08:00 | Okay? So if you have some people with some really big first names,
| | 08:03 | you've got to make sure that this text frame
is wide enough to actually adapt to those.
| | 08:06 | All right.
| | 08:07 | So we've got our first name out here.
| | 08:08 | Now the next thing I want to do is this.
| | 08:09 | We've got our picture frame out here, what
I want to do is I want to get the photo
| | 08:13 | so when we actually find a photo or a
link to photo, I want it to go right here.
| | 08:17 | So what I'm going to do, here's another method for doing this,
I'm going to take the photo place holder and what I want
| | 08:23 | to do is - do you what happened right there when I click on it?
| | 08:26 | It actually puts it wherever my cursor was.
| | 08:28 | I didn't want to do that.
| | 08:29 | I do this a lot.
| | 08:30 | I'm going to go to Edit>Undo Insert Place Holder.
| | 08:32 | Here's what you got to do.
| | 08:33 | I'm going to take photos, I'm going to click and drag.
| | 08:36 | I'm going to drop it on top of the frame I want the picture to go into.
| | 08:40 | So I'll drop it right there.
| | 08:40 | I'll see a plus, and let go.
| | 08:42 | And you'll notice a little marker right there that says photos.
| | 08:45 | Now, you're only going to see this if you have
your frame edges turned on under the View menu.
| | 08:50 | So that's where our place holder's going to go.
| | 08:51 | Okay? Now, let's go down to page 2.
| | 08:54 | I'm going to double-click, take a look.
| | 08:56 | If you look out here I've got my Data Merge palette.
| | 08:59 | All right.
| | 09:00 | Now on the second page, we're actually going to
put the content inside of the text frame.
| | 09:03 | So I'm going to place my cursor inside of
that text frame that we created before.
| | 09:07 | What I'm going to do is, there's a couple ways to do this.
| | 09:09 | You can either drag and drop the actual container or you can double-click.
| | 09:13 | Now I'm just going to double-click here.
| | 09:14 | If you take a look, it's just going to place it right in there.
| | 09:16 | Now it picks up the formatting that was in there from before
and if you can see right here, it looks a little different.
| | 09:22 | We're going to change that, don't worry.
| | 09:23 | We can use Paragraph Styles to do that.
| | 09:24 | Now take a look at the Data Merge palette right now.
| | 09:26 | If you look in there you're going to be able to see that First Name,
all the way to the right, you're going to see numbers over here.
| | 09:31 | This is telling you what pages the container is on, basically.
| | 09:34 | So we've got First Name on the second page and the first page.
| | 09:37 | Kind of a nice little feature there.
| | 09:39 | Okay, now the first name's in there, what
I want to do is we're going to hit a space.
| | 09:43 | Hit the spacebar and I'm going to double-click on Last Name.
| | 09:46 | That's going to put the last name out there.
| | 09:47 | Now I'm going to hit a return.
| | 09:49 | Basically what that does is it kicks us to the next
line and I'm going to do the Company by double-clicking.
| | 09:53 | I'm going to hit a return.
| | 09:54 | I'm going to do Address.
| | 09:56 | I'm going to hit a return.
| | 09:57 | I'll do City.
| | 09:59 | Now we're going to do City, comma, space, State, space, Zip.
| | 10:05 | And of course you could put tabs in here; you could do
anything you want just to kind of separate things out.
| | 10:10 | This content right here is going to be replaced
by the content from the text file of course.
| | 10:14 | So we we're basically done.
| | 10:15 | We basically have our data merge out there.
| | 10:16 | If you take a look out here you're going to see
every page that this information's located on.
| | 10:20 | Each container's on.
| | 10:21 | I'm going to take my Data Merge palette and pull it off to the side here.
| | 10:24 | Now, let's just test this out and see what happens.
| | 10:27 | Once you actually place the place holders or
the containers out here, we can Preview it.
| | 10:32 | If you take a look, you've got a little Preview button down here.
| | 10:35 | Click on Preview.
| | 10:36 | If you take a look, it's going to suddenly insert the content itself.
| | 10:40 | The first time I saw it, I thought this was so cool.
| | 10:42 | It's kind of a neat way to be able to
just throw a document and text in here.
| | 10:45 | Now once you've got the preview on, you
have we have four records, they're called.
| | 10:49 | We have four people that we're going through.
| | 10:50 | So if you take a look at the bottom of the Data Merge
palette, I can actually cycle through each person.
| | 10:54 | And what it'll do is it'll preview it for me, which is kind of nice.
| | 10:58 | I can go back to the very beginning as well.
| | 11:00 | All right.
| | 11:02 | We've got our data merged in.
| | 11:03 | I'm going to go back up to page 1, double-click.
| | 11:06 | Now here's the best part.
| | 11:07 | If you take a look, Preview's still on.
| | 11:09 | It says "Hello John!"
| | 11:10 | What I want to do is this.
| | 11:11 | I'm going to go to the next one here and take a look.
| | 11:14 | I'm going to come back up to page 1,
it jumped down to page 2 for me here.
| | 11:18 | Come back up to page 1 and take a look at what it did.
| | 11:21 | It placed the photo in there directly.
| | 11:23 | So, you know, in this case, it's kind of a, you
know, a cheesy corn-ball little thing to do here, but,
| | 11:28 | I mean you're not normally going to want your
picture on a post card that you're being sent.
| | 11:32 | But you can kind of see some things you can do with this.
| | 11:34 | I mean you can place company logos; you
can do all sorts of things with this.
| | 11:38 | So it basically puts it as part of the record.
| | 11:40 | If I go to the next record here, take a look.
| | 11:43 | It's jumping me down to page 2 again.
| | 11:45 | I'm going to come back up to 1.
| | 11:46 | You can basically see that if there's no picture associated
with that record, it just doesn't show up.
| | 11:51 | So this will not print.
| | 11:52 | So if you didn't put a border on it, basically what would
happen is if I hide my frame edges, if I go to Command-H
| | 11:57 | or Control-H on Windows, pretty much this is what I would see.
| | 12:01 | Okay? So it's kind of a nice thing we can do there.
| | 12:04 | Now that the data is merged there's a couple of things we can do here.
| | 12:09 | One thing I want to do is I want to show you
how to actually change the text if we need to.
| | 12:12 | Okay? So what I'm going to do is I'm going to come back to my
Selection tool.
| | 12:16 | Go ahead and Save the file.
| | 12:18 | I'm going to go back to Excel, and if you
don't have Excel, once again, just watch.
| | 12:22 | You can kind of see how this happens.
| | 12:23 | We've got to be able to go back and forth.
| | 12:25 | If I go back to Excel here and I take a look, let's say that
I decide that, you know what, I got John Smith's name wrong.
| | 12:32 | Okay? It needs to be John Jones.
| | 12:35 | What I can do is I can actually save the file here once I change it.
| | 12:39 | It is still the text file here.
| | 12:40 | I'm just going to Save it As (Tab delimited) Text.
| | 12:42 | So Chapter 6 I'm going to overwrite the original.
| | 12:45 | Text (Tab delimited).
| | 12:47 | Now once again, I'm using Excel as an example.
| | 12:49 | It doesn't have to be Excel necessarily.
| | 12:50 | I'm going to Save it.
| | 12:51 | I'm going to Replace it.
| | 12:53 | Excel's going to give me these nice fun things - and I will close it up.
| | 12:57 | Okay? Close up the text file.
| | 12:59 | It does that a lot.
| | 13:00 | All right.
| | 13:01 | I'm going to come back to InDesign and, take a look.
| | 13:04 | Now here's the thing, I'm going to go down to page 2 to actually see
the last name because I can't see the last name out here on this page.
| | 13:09 | So double-click on page 2 and if you take a look,
you're going to see that Jane Carter, we've got it out there.
| | 13:15 | I'm going to come back to the first record here and take a look.
| | 13:18 | You can see John Smith right there.
| | 13:19 | Now what you want to do is you want to update the actual text file.
| | 13:23 | This text file that we actually merged as data is a link.
| | 13:27 | As a matter of fact let me show you this.
| | 13:29 | I am going to come to Window, come down to my Links palette.
| | 13:31 | If you come to your Links palette, you're going to actually
notice that merged data is a link in the Links palette.
| | 13:37 | So what happens here is that when you update it in any program, Excel
is an example, it will actually automatically update inside of here.
| | 13:44 | Now there's a couple of ways we can handle this.
| | 13:45 | If you take a look, there's a yellow yield sign right there.
| | 13:47 | I could do the update right here in the Links
palette, or you could do it within Data Merge.
| | 13:51 | You don't even have to go to the Links palette.
| | 13:53 | From the Data Merge palette, if you take a look from
the palette menu I can actually see Update Data Source.
| | 14:01 | I can even remove it if I want to.
| | 14:02 | So let's go Update Data Source, click on that, and if I take a
look, what it does is it automatically updates the text file.
| | 14:09 | It takes you out of Preview mode, which is,
you know, just a slight unfortunate thing.
| | 14:14 | I'm going to click back on Preview here and take a
look and you can see that the name has changed.
| | 14:19 | So once you've updated that text file it's automatically linked to
the merged document here and I can change and update at any time,
| | 14:26 | and as long as the number of columns stays the same, we're good to go.
| | 14:29 | Okay? All right.
| | 14:31 | Let me close my Links palette.
| | 14:33 | So that basically actually merges the document together.
| | 14:36 | In the next section what we're going to do is we're going to go
through and talk about how to actually get the document
| | 14:40 | out so you have separate pages, separate files that you can print.
| | 14:43 | So why don't you go ahead and save "card_merge"
and we're going to use this for the next session.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Merging data| 00:00 | Now that we've merged the data in with the actual InDesign file,
we've taken a text file and merged it, what we need to do is we need
| | 00:07 | to actually make the copies, we need to get the actual individual pages
out here, so we need to actually have it so we can print them all.
| | 00:12 | To do that, here's what we'll do, come over to the
Data Merge palette, hopefully you still have this open.
| | 00:17 | If you don't see it, it is under Window, come to
Automation, you should be able to see Data Merge right there.
| | 00:22 | Now, if you are just coming into this, we've actually been working through
this through a couple of steps through this chapter so you might want
| | 00:30 | to start kind of from the beginning of Data Merge Intro
because that way we can kind of get caught up here.
| | 00:34 | So, I've got my "card_merge.indd" file open.
| | 00:37 | We saved it from the last step, which was actually merging the data.
| | 00:41 | So if you look at the Data Merge palette, here is
what we're going to do: we're going to go through
| | 00:44 | and I want to actually create the documents so that I can print them.
| | 00:46 | If you take a look at the bottom of the palette down
here, you're actually going to see Create Merged Document.
| | 00:51 | Now, that's the same thing we're going to do but if you look in the
Data Merge palette out here, take a look at the actual menu on the side,
| | 00:57 | and you're going to be able to see that we have Preview turned
on, that's fine, we can also Create the Merged Document.
| | 01:03 | Okay. Now one thing I do want to draw your attention to is this right here.
| | 01:06 | It says Content Placement Options.
| | 01:08 | This is kind of interesting.
| | 01:09 | We already saw this when we actually did the data merge.
| | 01:11 | If you decide to change it, if I click on this option right
here, and take a look, what it does is it just talks about images
| | 01:17 | and things like that and even Blank Lines for Empty Fields.
| | 01:20 | So, when it merges the data, if there are any pictures in there,
it is going to let you fit them however you want to the frame
| | 01:27 | so when they actually flow in, when they come in, they merge, it's going
to be able to fit, it's going to let you Center the Image in the Frame
| | 01:32 | which is kind of a nice feature and it will create a Link.
| | 01:35 | Otherwise, if you turn that off it is going to embed images for you.
| | 01:38 | Okay. If you look right here it says Remove Blank Lines for Empty Fields.
| | 01:42 | If somebody has an empty field, you know, it
will just remove the line itself, the blank line,
| | 01:46 | for you if you want to. And there is a Record Limit per Document.
| | 01:50 | If you had a database that had like let's say 10,000 names
in it, it might take a little longer then you would expect,
| | 01:57 | so you might want a limit per document,
you can create multiple documents for this.
| | 02:01 | So these are some options we can work with.
| | 02:02 | I'm going to Cancel out here because it looks pretty good so far.
| | 02:06 | And now we're going to merge our document.
| | 02:07 | So if you take a look, I'm going to come to the button down here, Create
a Merged Document, if I click on that what it is going to do is this,
| | 02:13 | it's going to say, "Okay, we are ready to
actually get the content into this document."
| | 02:17 | What it is going to do is, it is going to make multiple copies
of each page depending on basically how many records you have.
| | 02:23 | We've got 4 records, 4 people, so it is going to create
4 copies of each page and put them within this document.
| | 02:29 | So if you take a look, I can say I want All Records, just
one record, and it numbers them one through, in this case, 4.
| | 02:35 | Or you can pick a Range of records you want to do.
| | 02:37 | So let's say I want to do the first 2 people,
I can say 1 through 2 or something like that.
| | 02:40 | And it even gives you a little help down here.
| | 02:42 | We're going to do All Records.
| | 02:44 | Take a look down here, it says Records per Document Page, right
now we're going to ignore this; we can't do anything with this.
| | 02:51 | Okay. All it's going to do is it is going to take your layout, if you
look right here, take your layout, and just create a merged document
| | 02:57 | that has got the text in it and that's what we want basically.
| | 03:00 | Okay. Now if you look down here it says Generate
Overset Text Report with Document Creation.
| | 03:04 | This is a good thing.
| | 03:06 | If you have let's say an Excel file, somebody's address is 14 lines
long or something or it is some super long name and it won't fit
| | 03:16 | in the actual frame, this will give you a warning, it will generate
a warning saying, "Hey, it won't fit for this record," kind of thing.
| | 03:22 | It's good to keep this on.
| | 03:23 | An Alert When Images Are Missing.
| | 03:25 | That's also a good thing to keep on because
otherwise it just won't put the image in the page.
| | 03:29 | This happens when you have a bad link or
you've put the link improperly in Excel.
| | 03:35 | All right, so these are records.
| | 03:36 | We haven't touched anything, all I'm saying
is put all the records in there.
| | 03:38 | If you go to Multiple Record Layout, we cannot touch this because
if you look up top here, because Single Record is selected.
| | 03:45 | Okay. Now Multiple Record Layout is usually only used if you're going to
create something like a label field, like if you're going to create labels
| | 03:52 | or something like that, which is what we're going to
do in a few minutes, so leave this alone for right now.
| | 03:57 | Click on Options.
| | 03:58 | If you take a look, these are the same
options we just saw in the Data Merge palette.
| | 04:02 | Now if you look here, we can fit our images, Center Frame, Link
Images, Remove Blank Lines and put a Limit on number per Document.
| | 04:09 | I think this looks pretty good.
| | 04:11 | Okay. We're okay for right now.
| | 04:13 | So I'm ready to go here.
| | 04:14 | I'm going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 04:16 | Click OK.
| | 04:17 | And if you take a look, here's what is going
to happen: it gives you a warning here.
| | 04:21 | Okay. Something is saying, "No overset
text was generated when merging records."
| | 04:25 | That's a good thing, so I am going to click OK.
| | 04:28 | And here is what it did: it created a brand new document and
it went over, if I take a look at my Pages palette over here,
| | 04:33 | I'm going to open up the Pages palette, lower left hand
corner here, I'm going to click and drag on this bar,
| | 04:39 | if you take a look it basically created pages for us.
| | 04:42 | I'm going to zoom out a bit here just to show you this.
| | 04:45 | I'm going to do Command-minus (-), Control-minus (-) on Windows,
zoom out a bit.
| | 04:49 | And what it did was, it actually for each record,
for each person, it created two copies here.
| | 04:55 | Basically it put the front page and the back page of the postcard.
| | 04:58 | So if I scroll down, I'm using the scroll wheel on my
mouse, you can also double-click to go to pages here,
| | 05:02 | you can basically see that each record has two pages.
| | 05:06 | I can now print this out, I can do whatever I want to
and I can save these as separate files even if I want
| | 05:11 | to do that, or PDF it if you're trying to send it to a printer.
| | 05:15 | So it's a really great way to be able to save your file.
| | 05:17 | Okay. That's being able to merge the actual document.
| | 05:21 | Now if you don't want this, if something happens, you didn't
like it, you can always get rid of this document and start again.
| | 05:26 | As a matter of fact, we're going to take this brand new
document and close it up, we don't want to save this.
| | 05:30 | You could save it, obviously, but I don't want to
save this, and we're back to our data merge page here.
| | 05:35 | Okay. Now, there's one other thing I do want to
show you, which is actually pretty interesting.
| | 05:40 | I want to show you how to make something like a label field.
| | 05:43 | Okay. How to make labels inside of here.
| | 05:45 | I'm going to open up another file.
| | 05:46 | I'm going to go to File>Open and if you take a look in your exercise
files folder in the Chapter 6 folder there is a document called "labels."
| | 05:55 | Okay. I'm going to open that up.
| | 05:57 | It's going to use the same text file as the data merge.
| | 05:59 | So open it up.
| | 06:00 | What I've done here is I've actually got a missing, a modified link
here, and it looks like - if you look - the text file has been updated.
| | 06:07 | So it's automatically telling me something has been done.
| | 06:09 | So I'm going to say let's Fix Links Automatically; that will
fix the modified link, that's going to update the text field.
| | 06:15 | Now I'll move this Links palette out of the way by the title bar there.
| | 06:20 | Now watch this.
| | 06:21 | I've already set this up.
| | 06:22 | What I did was I created a set of guides out here and I kind of looked at
my label sheet and I said, okay, I can do so many here with the spacing,
| | 06:29 | etc. I went and created a brand new document, went under the Layout
| | 06:33 | and said let's create a series of guides
and this is what this is really good for.
| | 06:37 | What it did was by clicking on Create Guides I was actually
able to create 2 columns and multiple rows in this document.
| | 06:44 | So that's basically how I got the columns out there.
| | 06:46 | And then what I did was I actually just set up a text
frame here and put the actual containers inside of there.
| | 06:52 | So I just dragged the containers inside
kind of like we did with the postcard.
| | 06:55 | Now here's the best part.
| | 06:56 | I want to merge this but I want to create a label
document here so I can print this out as labels.
| | 07:00 | Of course I've got to have the label sheet in my printer
and that sort of thing, but I'm going to come down here,
| | 07:06 | it's all set up for us, I'm going to say Create Merged Document.
| | 07:09 | Now here's the difference: when you have a document that has records put
out here, okay, and there's a single record on the page, in other words,
| | 07:18 | you don't have multiple pages in the document, there's only one page,
| | 07:21 | if you take a look, you have the ability to do
something called Records per Document Page.
| | 07:26 | Now if you say Single Record, what it is going to do
is it is going to do like we did with the postcard.
| | 07:30 | It is going to put a single record on a single page.
| | 07:34 | So if I merge this right now, I'm going to have 4 pages in here, one
for John, one for Brian, etc. But I want to make a label field here
| | 07:40 | so what I am going to do is this: I am going to
say let's put Multiple Records on the same page.
| | 07:45 | If you look, it is going to automatically put a page out here and
it's going to just copy this record, this text field that we created,
| | 07:52 | and place it into the single merged page of the document.
| | 07:56 | Now if it required 14 pages, it will make 14 pages for you.
| | 07:59 | If you take a look, let's Preview this, if you click on Preview,
take a look at your page out here, look what it's doing for us.
| | 08:06 | It's automatically taking that one and
placing multiple records on the same page.
| | 08:10 | It just kind of tiles them left to right, top to bottom.
| | 08:13 | Now, it's not quite hitting my guides out here.
| | 08:16 | I use the guides as a reference.
| | 08:18 | So here's what we'll do: click on Multiple Record Layout.
| | 08:21 | If you take a look, now this comes to life
because I've got multiple records on the page.
| | 08:26 | This controls where things sit.
| | 08:28 | The Margins are the page margins and they
should be set up properly right here.
| | 08:32 | Now the only thing I want to do is this: you
can see it says right here, Layout of Records.
| | 08:36 | Rows First or Columns First.
| | 08:38 | If you want to go left to right, top to bottom, you say Rows First.
| | 08:42 | If you want it to go down this way and then across, you say Columns First.
| | 08:45 | Now I click Columns First and take a look, it
will actually put them straight down like this.
| | 08:49 | So it depends on how you want them to print out.
| | 08:51 | Now here's the best part, the Spacing.
| | 08:54 | The spacing is actually going to have to be
done utilizing, if you take a look right here,
| | 08:58 | I'm holding down my Shift key and clicking so I can actually click up.
| | 09:01 | I'm putting, and I forgot to change my picas to
inches here, so you could type in inches if you want,
| | 09:06 | but if you look right here it is actually hitting the space for me.
| | 09:09 | So this is the distance between the columns and the rows themselves.
| | 09:13 | Okay. So it is actually hitting my guides right now, which is kind of nice.
| | 09:16 | So if I had the guides out there as kind of just a way to look, you know,
| | 09:20 | a way to kind of preview it, this is going
to let me actually space things out.
| | 09:24 | So now that I've got it set up, I'm basically done.
| | 09:26 | I'm going to click OK and if you take a look the
overset text was generated, that's the warning I get,
| | 09:33 | it generates a brand new document with my merged information here.
| | 09:37 | All I've got to do is print it out now with
my label sheets and I'm basically done.
| | 09:41 | So, utilizing data merge can be good for a lot of different things:
for labels, for going with the postcard option we had before.
| | 09:48 | I used this just a couple of months ago
here, which is a great feature for me.
| | 09:52 | So, data merge is an excellent tool and
it's a great long document feature for us.
| | 09:56 | You can close up these documents.
| | 09:57 | You don't need to keep them open.
| | 09:59 | And we're basically done with this chapter.
| | 10:00 | We're going to move on next to working with books.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Working with BooksBook workflows| 00:00 | In this chapter we are going to discuss books.
| | 00:02 | And in this first section, we are going to talk just
a book workflowing and just sort of what books are.
| | 00:07 | I want to introduce you to them and get
you a feel for what they can do for us.
| | 00:11 | One thing that a lot of people wind up doing is if you create
documents and let's say that you've got a book, a literal book,
| | 00:19 | or you are working on a magazine, or working on, let's
say, an article with sections or something like that.
| | 00:24 | A lot of times, what you are going to have is a
group of people that are working on each one
| | 00:29 | of these documents, you might want to split it out into sections.
| | 00:32 | Let's say that you have a book, and the book
is three hundred and some odd pages long.
| | 00:35 | If you want to separate that out as chapters,
let's say, you can do that pretty easily.
| | 00:39 | Each one could be a separate document.
| | 00:41 | What I want to do is show you something now.
| | 00:43 | I want to go out to the desktop, in the exercise
files folder, open that up, take a look.
| | 00:48 | We are in Chapter 7 right now.
| | 00:50 | If you look, we actually have, right here, it says, "book_final."
| | 00:54 | Now, what I have done is this.
| | 00:55 | Let's say that we are going to create something like a brochure, we
call it "beverage_brochure" and I've got a team of people working on this.
| | 01:02 | I have a team of copy writers, a team of designers.
| | 01:05 | Now, let's say it's a document.
| | 01:07 | This document is going to be about twelve pages long.
| | 01:09 | But let's say its a couple hundred pages long.
| | 01:11 | If that is the case and you have a team of people working
on this in design document, you don't want to have one file.
| | 01:16 | Because basically what is going to happen is people
are going to get in there and not going to be able
| | 01:19 | to actually access it, you know, multiple people at a time.
| | 01:22 | So, what you can do is separate it out.
| | 01:23 | So what I have done with this twelve page document is
actually I have broken it down into four page segments here.
| | 01:27 | So, I have actually got "coffee_section,"
a "tea_section," and then the cover itself.
| | 01:32 | Now, when you do that, the thing is, though, is that anyone can access
these and once they open one up, let's say I do something like this.
| | 01:38 | I open up the "coffee_section."
| | 01:39 | I'm going to double-click from my desktop here, go to File>Open as well.
| | 01:44 | If I take a look, I'm going to take a look inside here, I
can basically see that I have got some content out here.
| | 01:49 | I have 4 pages.
| | 01:50 | I'm zooming out here right now.
| | 01:51 | Command-minus, Control-minus in windows.
| | 01:54 | This is just a piece, its just 4 pages that someone has.
| | 01:56 | This is the "coffee_section."
| | 01:58 | Now, if I have a team of people working on this I could have
somebody that actually changes things like paragraphs styles in here,
| | 02:05 | or like the numbering system in here, its called 1, 2, 3, 4, and if I
look at the pages themselves, let me zoom back in, Command-0, Control-0.
| | 02:13 | I can see that this is number page 1.
| | 02:16 | The thing is that the "coffee_section" is
not going to be the first page basically.
| | 02:19 | Okay? So, if I kept these as all separate documents, let me
go back on the to my desktop here, I'll click on my desktop,
| | 02:25 | if I kept these as separate documents I would be responsible for
numbering them myself so they are numbered in sequential order.
| | 02:33 | I would be responsible for making sure that all of the colors
are the same, the styles are the same, all sorts of things.
| | 02:38 | Now, that is kind of a big task.
| | 02:40 | What a book does is it allows you to actually organize
things; a book automatically will actually track documents.
| | 02:48 | In other words, you set up your documents first,
you create what is called an InDesign book.
| | 02:52 | An InDesign book has an INDB extension on it.
| | 02:55 | The book is created under File>New.
| | 02:57 | When you create one, basically what it does is
this: I'm going to launch this book right here.
| | 03:01 | So, from the exercise files folder in Chapter 7, I'm going
to double-click within "book_final" here, the book file itself.
| | 03:08 | What this does is it opens up an actual palette.
| | 03:11 | This is my Book palette.
| | 03:13 | Now, if you take a look at this, I have called this "beverage_brochure."
| | 03:16 | Okay? I'm going to show you how to make
one of these, don't worry about that.
| | 03:20 | What you do is you literally associate InDesign documents with the book.
| | 03:25 | So, what I will do is create my InDesign documents
first, I'll just kind of break this up into sections
| | 03:29 | and then what I will do is make the book and
say let's associate each one of these with it.
| | 03:33 | Now what a book does for us is this, anyone can open this book file.
| | 03:38 | Anyone can open up this palette.
| | 03:39 | You can have fifteen people on a team open up
this same thing; they all see the same files.
| | 03:45 | Now, if you want to open one of these files you can actually
double-click on it to open it directly from the palette here.
| | 03:51 | So, if I click on "editorial-cover," double-click on
that, I can actually launch it directly in here.
| | 03:56 | Now, what the book file does is it actually just tracks your files.
| | 03:59 | So, it doesn't move them, doesn't do anything to
them, just says, okay, let's watch these files.
| | 04:02 | If I look at the right over here, when the document
is open, you are going to see a little book.
| | 04:07 | If you have a team of people and a team of people decide to open up -
let's say someone decides to open up "editorial_cover," what happens
| | 04:14 | is this: if somebody else has opened it up, you are going to see a little
book right here telling you that somebody else has it open.
| | 04:20 | If you try and open it, it's going to
say, we are going to open it as Read Only.
| | 04:23 | So, this does a couple of things.
| | 04:24 | It tracks your documents, doesn't move them, just tracks them,
it will also allow you to see if other people have them open.
| | 04:31 | Plus, there is so much more.
| | 04:32 | If you take a look in here, take a look at the numbering right here.
| | 04:35 | How it says, 1-4, 5-8 and 9-12.
| | 04:39 | It has automatically numbered the pages out here for us.
| | 04:42 | So, it's doing it in sequential order.
| | 04:44 | The order in which these documents are placed
in here it the order in which they are numbered.
| | 04:49 | So, if you had a document, let's say a book that was three hundred and some
odd pages long, you can break it down into hundred page sections, fifty,
| | 04:55 | whatever you want to do, or even chapters, and it will number them for you.
| | 04:59 | And that number right here, actually, if you take you take a
look in the Pages palette right here with "editorial_cover" open,
| | 05:05 | it actually changes the numbers out here, which is pretty incredible.
| | 05:09 | So, Book will let us go through and actually
organize documents, number them automatically,
| | 05:14 | track to see who's got it open and some of the best parts of this.
| | 05:18 | If I come out to the side menu out here, if I take a look at the palette
menu, what we can do is we can either Preflight all of the documents,
| | 05:26 | Preflight Selected Documents, you can Package the
documents, which means get them ready to go to print.
| | 05:31 | It will do them all at once for us.
| | 05:33 | You can print them all at once, which is excellent.
| | 05:36 | You can literally walk away for coffee or whatever and just let it print.
| | 05:39 | And the best part about here is it to
something called Synchronize Documents.
| | 05:45 | Synchronize Documents will do this, when you have
a book, if you look in the left hand side here,
| | 05:50 | I'm going to see a little icon, this indicates the style source.
| | 05:54 | If you have one chapter, one document, you can say that all of the
swatches, the paragraphing character styles, table of contents,
| | 06:01 | all that sort of thing are going to be based on this document.
| | 06:06 | If someone changes a swatch in here, I can tell these
documents to Synchronize with the Style Source.
| | 06:13 | So, the rest of the documents, "tea_section,"
or "tea_selection," excuse me, "editorial_cover,"
| | 06:19 | will automatically update the swatches,
paragraph styles, whatever you tell it to do.
| | 06:24 | This is an excellent feature for a longer document,
for a book, a magazine, you know, all sorts things.
| | 06:30 | So, this is basically what a book is.
| | 06:32 | Okay? Now that we have kind of seen what it can do and what it is.
| | 06:36 | We are going to go ahead and make one.
| | 06:37 | We are going to utilize "coffee_section,"
"editorial"cover, and "tea_section" here.
| | 06:41 | We are going to make ourselves our own book.
| | 06:43 | So, I can close up this book right now.
| | 06:45 | It make ask you to save it, it may not.
| | 06:47 | That is fine, don't save it.
| | 06:48 | I can close up the rest of the documents and in the
next movie we are going to talk about setting up a book.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up a book| 00:01 | Now that we've discussed a book workflow,
let's get in and actually make a book.
| | 00:04 | A book is made by going to File>New.
| | 00:06 | Now the only thing I've got to kind of remind
you here is that when we generate a book,
| | 00:10 | you want to have your InDesign documents created to get this to work.
| | 00:14 | Okay, so in other words, if you're creating like a
magazine or something like that or an actual book,
| | 00:18 | you want to set up the individual documents
usually before you make the book.
| | 00:23 | It doesn't have to be but to get this to work
you've got to have documents ready, okay.
| | 00:27 | So, we already set some up; so we're going to go up to File, come down to
New and if you take a look under that you're actually going to see Book.
| | 00:33 | Let's go ahead and click on Book...now here's what we'll do.
| | 00:37 | We're going to put it in your exercise files folder.
| | 00:40 | So, on your desktop in your exercise files folder or wherever
you're exercise folders are, take a look under Chapter 7;
| | 00:47 | we're going to look inside of there; I've got a "book_final" folder in there,
| | 00:51 | that I put, I put the actual final version we
looked at in the last section just to show you that.
| | 00:56 | We're going to actually place the book directly inside of the Chapter
7 folder here and we're going to call this "beverage_brochure."
| | 01:06 | Now, you can name a book basically anything
you want, it doesn't really matter.
| | 01:10 | I usually name it according to what the document is, you know, to kind
of give yourself a heads up and you'll keep the extension on there,
| | 01:16 | it's INDB, making sure that the extension is there.
That way across platform this would actually work.
| | 01:21 | Alright, I'm going to go ahead and Save that.
| | 01:23 | Now, if you take a look it's going to open up a palette for us.
| | 01:27 | Anybody that goes to use this book - you only have to
create the book once, so let's just start there, okay.
| | 01:33 | As a matter of fact if I go back down to my desktop, let me just
show you this, where we saved it, I'm going to go to my desktop
| | 01:38 | and open up my exercise files folder and look in Chapter 7.
| | 01:42 | I take a look: I can see the book right there.
| | 01:44 | Okay, so the book is created.
| | 01:46 | Now if you want to you can put this book on a
server, on a network basically whatever you want
| | 01:51 | to do, okay, so that other people can get at it basically.
| | 01:53 | The only thing that I want to kind of tell
you that you should be doing here is this.
| | 01:58 | The book should be at least near the InDesign
files, okay, to make this work efficiently.
| | 02:05 | It doesn't have to be; I mean you can have the book in a folder, you know,
3 folders away but you want to make sure that they're like on the network;
| | 02:12 | they're both on the network, the book and the files at least,
so it's easier to work so that other people can open these files, okay?
| | 02:19 | If it's just yourself and you're doing something
like this, keep it wherever you want but try
| | 02:22 | and keep it altogether; keep the book and the files together.
| | 02:25 | Okay, let's get back to InDesign here.
| | 02:27 | Now that the book is actually created, one
person is going to add the files to it.
| | 02:32 | So, we're going to actually add the files to track.
| | 02:34 | So, with the book palette open, look at the bottom, you're going
to see a plus down here, this is actually going to add documents;
| | 02:40 | I'm going to click, what it's going to do
is it should take me right back in here.
| | 02:44 | I'm going to go into "book_final," wherever your exercise files are,
I know you can keep them anywhere, in the Chapter 7 folder here,
| | 02:51 | if you take a look we're going to actually add all 3 of these documents.
| | 02:55 | Now you can add them all at once or you can add them 1 at a time.
| | 02:58 | I'm going to do this.
| | 02:59 | I'm going to click on 1, I'm going to Shift, hold down, click on the last
one; that should grab them all and I'm going to click Open to open them up.
| | 03:07 | Now, what's happening here is this.
| | 03:09 | It's not moving them, it's not changing them, it's just
simply saying, "Okay book, track these InDesign documents.
| | 03:16 | Okay, watch them."
| | 03:17 | Now that we've opened them up inside of here, we have actually
associated them with the book itself, with the brochure.
| | 03:23 | So, what you can do is, you know, a single document can be associated with
multiple books but, you know, we're probably not going to do that, so.
| | 03:32 | So, once you add the documents themselves,
you take a look here you're actually going
| | 03:35 | to see all the page numbering here, it
has auto numbered the documents for us.
| | 03:39 | So, right away we're ready to go.
| | 03:41 | Now, you'll notice how it added them though.
| | 03:43 | It added them in the order in which they appeared
in the folder because I grabbed them all.
| | 03:47 | Now, if you don't want that to happen, we're going to talk
about page numbering in the next couple of sessions here.
| | 03:53 | So, for right now we're leaving these out here.
| | 03:56 | The book is basically created.
| | 03:57 | You can keep the book open, it opens as long as InDesign is open
and you're going to want to open it when you open InDesign, okay.
| | 04:04 | So, that is basically creating a book.
| | 04:05 | As long as you've got the files set up and
you've got the book created, they're added,
| | 04:09 | they're associated, you can start working with the book itself, okay.
| | 04:12 | So, with this section we've actually set up the book.
| | 04:15 | In the next one what we're going to do is we're
going to talk about the actual page numbering,
| | 04:19 | how we can do that across documents and by themselves.
| | 04:21 | So you can keep the book open and we're
going to get on to the next section here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Page numbering across book documents| 00:00 | Now that we've set up a book in the last section, we're
going to go through and learn how to actually number pages
| | 00:07 | and what InDesign does to a book, to the book documents themselves.
| | 00:10 | So, if you're joining us at this point, make sure that you go back to the
first section out here which was right after the book workflow, that movie,
| | 00:18 | go through that, let's talk about it and make sure that you make the book
because we're going to be utilizing it through the rest of this chapter.
| | 00:24 | So you might want to go back to the beginning here and kind of start over.
| | 00:27 | All right, now that we have "beverage_brochure" as a book, if you've
closed it from the last movie you might want to open this back up.
| | 00:34 | It should be in your exercise files folder in the
Chapter 7 folder and we named it "beverage_brochure.indb."
| | 00:40 | so you might want to open that back up.
| | 00:42 | Now that we've got the book open, if you take a look
we've got all of our documents associated with the book.
| | 00:47 | Like we said before, you can see the page numbering
over here: 1 through 4, 5 through 8, 9 through 12.
| | 00:52 | Now, when these documents were first set up,
I didn't do anything to the numbering systems.
| | 00:57 | I just made four pages in each document, saved
them and we associated them with the book.
| | 01:01 | Here's what we're going to do.
| | 01:03 | When we come to "editorial_cover" I'm going to double-click to open that up.
| | 01:06 | That's the thing about books.
| | 01:07 | Once you have the book open InDesign wants
you to open the files through the book.
| | 01:11 | You don't want to go behind its back to
do that, because some things can happen.
| | 01:15 | So, I will double-click "editorial_cover," and that will launch the file.
| | 01:19 | Now, a couple things to note here, like we saw in the
first movie; if you look, you're actually going to see,
| | 01:23 | I've a page icon right here, this book icon telling me the document's open.
| | 01:27 | Now, I know it's open, I've got it open.
| | 01:29 | But, if somebody else had it open I'd see a
book like that once I open the book file itself.
| | 01:33 | All right, now that this is open, take a look at your Pages palette.
| | 01:38 | In the Pages palette, what I can see is the numbering system.
| | 01:41 | Take a look at this, you can see 5, 6, 7, and if
I scroll down I should be able to see 8 down here.
| | 01:47 | What InDesign did for us was, because this "editorial_cover," this
document is the second one in order here, it automatically looked
| | 01:56 | at how many pages were in "coffee_section" here, 1 through 4, and it
said, okay, we're just going to continue that page range as 5 through 8.
| | 02:04 | So, it went to the section start up here.
| | 02:06 | If you take a look at the section start, this little arrow,
I'm going to double-click on it and take a quick look.
| | 02:11 | It automatically went in and said, let's start the page numbering at 5.
| | 02:15 | So, it's doing it for us.
| | 02:16 | This is one of the great feature about
Books, being able to autonumber pages for us.
| | 02:20 | All right, I'm going to Cancel that.
| | 02:21 | So, if I were to open up this "tea_section"
document right here, double-click,
| | 02:26 | I could see that it's actually automatically
numbered at 9 through 12 right here for us.
| | 02:30 | So, it's kind of a nice feature, this is great.
| | 02:32 | This is why we use Books.
| | 02:34 | All right, now I'm going to close these documents, close each one.
| | 02:37 | If you take a look, in your actual book here, what I'm
going to do is this, this is a free floating palette.
| | 02:44 | By the lower right hand corner, you can actually
see this little bar down here, this little ripper deal.
| | 02:48 | I'm going to open it up just a little bit
so we get a little room for ourselves.
| | 02:51 | Now, here's the thing, let's say we decided that, you know what?
| | 02:56 | This "tea_section" that we've created here
needs to go above the "editorial_cover."
| | 03:00 | The cover needs to be last.
| | 03:03 | This order in here actually matters.
| | 03:05 | If you look in here they're all sort of like layered on top of each other.
| | 03:08 | The first one right here, this "coffee_section," and sorry for the
tool tips; the first one here, which is 1 through 4, is 1 through 4.
| | 03:15 | So, what it does is it automatically numbers them straight down.
| | 03:17 | So, if I want "tea_section" to go in front of "editorial_cover" and
I want "tea_section" to be 5 through 8 instead of 9 through 12,
| | 03:23 | I can literally grab the document, pull it
straight up and re-order these basically.
| | 03:28 | If I let go right now, and take a look, it's going to take
a second because it's actually changing the section start.
| | 03:33 | But, if you see, "tea_section" is now pages 5 through 8.
| | 03:36 | So, if I double-click to open that document and if I take
a look out here, you can see right in your Pages palette
| | 03:43 | on the right hand side over here that it's now page 5 through 8.
| | 03:46 | Matter of fact, if I come to page 6 here and zoom in,
just to show you, it is, in fact, page 6 on the page.
| | 03:53 | Now, these automatic page numbers are something I
did on the Master page just to show the page numbers.
| | 03:58 | Of course, we don't have to do that to get this numbering to work.
| | 04:00 | So, that's a great thing.
| | 04:02 | We can go through and number the document for ourselves.
| | 04:04 | So, what I'm going to do, I'm going to close up that
document, "tea_section" again here, close up that document.
| | 04:08 | And, you know what?
| | 04:09 | I decided "tea_section" should go down at the bottom here.
| | 04:12 | So, what I'll do is I'll click and drag it down, drop it below.
| | 04:14 | It's going to auto number the pages for us and we're basically ready to go.
| | 04:18 | Now, so that's the numbering system.
| | 04:20 | If you want to, you can add documents in the mix here.
| | 04:22 | Let's say we decided that, you know what, I forgot
to add a section, or we later decided to add a table
| | 04:27 | of contents or something like that, as a separate section.
| | 04:30 | If you want to you can add documents later.
| | 04:33 | If I click the Add Documents, the plus down here, and take a
look, we're going to go back into another exercise files folder.
| | 04:39 | So, from your exercise files go to Chapter 6.
| | 04:42 | We're going to actually put "brochure" in here.
| | 04:44 | So, just choose "brochure."
| | 04:46 | Go ahead and click Open.
| | 04:47 | If you take a look, it's just going to add it to the section on here.
| | 04:52 | So, it's going to add it to the document.
| | 04:53 | Now, I decided "brochure" should be pages 5 through whatever this one is.
| | 04:58 | So, what I'm going to do is I'm going to take "brochure" and pull it up.
| | 05:00 | I'm changing the order of the documents in the
book here, which will change the page numbering.
| | 05:05 | So, you can see right here, it's 1 through 4, 5 through,
and if you take a look see how it says "Sec1:" right there?
| | 05:11 | That's just because it's Section Start with Start.
| | 05:13 | I'm going to show you that.
| | 05:14 | So, technically it's 5 through 8, 9 through 12, 13 through 16.
| | 05:18 | So, as you can see, you can add as many documents as you want.
| | 05:21 | It's not locked in, you can change the
numbering and, I'm basically ready to go.
| | 05:25 | Now, of course, I don't want "brochure" in there, so let's take that out.
| | 05:28 | If you decide that you don't want a section
in here, you don't want a document associated,
| | 05:32 | you can take it out of the mix and it
will just re-order or renumber the pages.
| | 05:36 | So, with it selected come on down to the bottom down
here, the minus will actually remove a document.
| | 05:40 | So, click on the minus down here.
| | 05:42 | That will remove that document from the ordering
and all the rest of the numbers will work for us.
| | 05:46 | So, that's kind of nice to do.
| | 05:49 | All right, now let's do this.
| | 05:51 | I'm going to open up, if you take a look, "coffee_section."
| | 05:53 | Let's open that up.
| | 05:54 | Double-click on "coffee_section."
| | 05:57 | Now, suppose we want to do this.
| | 05:59 | Let me zoom out a little bit here.
| | 06:00 | I'm going to do Command-Minus, Control-Minus on Windows.
| | 06:04 | Suppose that I decide that one of these pages
needs to be the Table of Contents, for instance.
| | 06:09 | So, this first page needs to be Table of Contents.
| | 06:12 | Now, we've got a lot of text out here and what I'd probably have to do
is I'd have to do a Copy>Fit, and I'd probably have to add another page
| | 06:18 | to the Text & Flow, but, for the sake of argument we're just going to go
up here and we're going to actually pretend this is the Table of Contents.
| | 06:23 | So, what I want to do is I'm going to
double-click on page 1 here to get it open.
| | 06:29 | Now, I'm noticing something about my book here that is not quite right.
| | 06:34 | Technically, we added these pages out here, we added these
documents and "coffee_section" is first, so that is page 1.
| | 06:39 | But, as I look at page 1, this is not my cover.
| | 06:42 | So, I'm realizing that this is not right.
| | 06:45 | "Tea_section" actually contains our cover.
| | 06:47 | So, what I want to do is this, we're going to come to our book, we're going
to actually change "tea_section" and make "tea_section" the first section.
| | 06:54 | So, I'm going to take the book, actually down here, the document, "tea_sec-
tion" and I'll drag it straight up, I'm going to drop it at the very top.
| | 07:00 | That's going to make "tea_section" our first document here.
| | 07:03 | And if I take a look, "coffee_section" is automatically renumbered.
| | 07:07 | You can see it's now 5 through 8 over here, and it's basically ready to go.
| | 07:11 | What I'm going to do is, let's close up "coffee_section."
| | 07:13 | It's going to ask you to save it.
| | 07:15 | This happens a lot when you work with books.
| | 07:17 | Unless you name these properly you're going to realize
that you need to have them in the proper order.
| | 07:22 | Let's double-click on "tea_section," open that up, and if
I look, I'm going to scroll up here, there's my cover.
| | 07:27 | So, this technically should be page 1.
| | 07:30 | All right, now that we're on the proper page here,
let's suppose that I want to make this down here
| | 07:35 | where it says "Flavors," on page 2, I want to make this a Table of Contents.
| | 07:39 | Here's what we'll do.
| | 07:40 | On the Pages palette, double-click on page 2 to get
it in the window here, and I'm also going to Fit it.
| | 07:45 | So I'm going to do Command-0, Control-0 in Windows.
| | 07:48 | Now, what I want to do is this, I know we've got a
lot of text here and I'll probably have to Copy>Fit
| | 07:51 | and get the right text, but just for right now let's do this.
| | 07:55 | Take these two columns.
| | 07:56 | I'm going to select them by either dragging across or Shift-clicking.
| | 07:59 | Go ahead and delete them.
| | 08:00 | I'm going to hit Delete.
| | 08:02 | It'll push that text.
| | 08:03 | All the text is flowing together.
| | 08:04 | It's going to push the text over here.
| | 08:05 | Like I said, we'd have to get rid of some of this
text, I know, but, that's fine for right now.
| | 08:09 | Now, suppose that we want to make this a Table of Contents.
| | 08:13 | The numbering order over here is 1 through 4, 5 through 8 and 9 through 12.
| | 08:18 | What we can do though, is we can actually still use our
page numbering, and our section starts in the documents
| | 08:23 | and the actual book will take note of that and keep them.
| | 08:27 | So, for instance, on page 2 here, I want to make
this Roman numeral ll, or something like that.
| | 08:32 | So, when I'm on page 2 here, I'm going to double-click
to make sure on the Pages palette, on the actual icon.
| | 08:37 | On the icon itself let's right-click - if you have a
one-button mouse like a Mac mouse, you can Control-click -
| | 08:43 | come to Numbering and Sections Options, and here's what we'll do.
| | 08:46 | In this section here, all I want to do is change the look and feel.
| | 08:49 | So, I'm going to say, I want to make this Roman numerals.
| | 08:51 | So, Style.
| | 08:53 | Now, if I wanted to change the numbering itself.
| | 08:54 | Let's say I wanted this to be page 4, page 8,
whatever you want, and you could do that too.
| | 08:59 | So let's just change the Style to Roman numerals.
| | 09:02 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 09:03 | And, if I take a look it actually just put a section marker out here.
| | 09:07 | Now, what's going on here is this; if you look in the book
you're actually going to see it says 1 through Sec 1:lV.
| | 09:14 | Now, what does that mean?
| | 09:16 | Sec 1:lV, come back to the "tea_section" here in the Pages palette,
come up to the marker up here, the start of Sec 1: double-click on it
| | 09:24 | and if you take a look, this is something
that confuses me and confuses a lot of people.
| | 09:28 | If you look down here at Section Prefix, every time you
create a new numbering and section option, new section,
| | 09:34 | a new way to look at your page numbers, it does this prefix thing.
| | 09:37 | That's just simply saying that, you know what, if you have
two page number 2s this is how it's going to differentiate
| | 09:43 | when you print, or when you go to actually put them out there.
| | 09:46 | You don't have to keep this if you don't want to, you really don't.
| | 09:49 | But, I'll keep it in there for right now.
| | 09:51 | So I'll click OK.
| | 09:52 | Now, here's the thing, you're going to notice that if
I scroll down on my Pages palette here, all my pages,
| | 09:58 | continuing down through this document, are now Roman numerals.
| | 10:01 | I don't want that.
| | 10:02 | I just want this second page to be Roman numerals.
| | 10:05 | So, what I'm going to do is I'm going to come to page 3 here.
| | 10:07 | I'll double-click on page 3 to get to that page.
| | 10:10 | We've got to put another section out there and
say, let's just do regular numbering on that one.
| | 10:15 | So, we're going to stop the previous one.
| | 10:16 | So, right-click on the Page icon, we're going
to come to Numbering and Section Options.
| | 10:21 | Once again, one-button mouse, you can Control-click right on the page
icon of 3, click on Numbering and Section Options, take a look.
| | 10:29 | The only thing we're going to do is this, I'm saying let's Start
a Section, Automatic Page Number, we'll continue the numbering.
| | 10:35 | Don't touch that, I don't want to change it.
| | 10:37 | And if you look right here it's going to
say Style: 1, 2, 3, 4, regular numbers.
| | 10:41 | It does it automatically, which is kind of cool.
| | 10:43 | Now, if you look at Section Prefix it's going to
automatically throw this Sec 2: thing out here.
| | 10:48 | Since the numbers are going to be the same here
you could technically get rid of this thing.
| | 10:52 | I could get rid of that.
| | 10:53 | That's just for printing basically.
| | 10:56 | If I click OK right now, and take a look, its saying 1,
2, 3, but this one actually has Roman numerals on it.
| | 11:05 | Now, if you look over at the Book palette over
here you're now going to see it says 1 through 4.
| | 11:10 | I got rid of that Sec 2: there, so it's actually telling me 1 through 4.
| | 11:14 | Sometimes keeping that Sec 1, Sec 2: thing can actually be a good thing.
| | 11:19 | Because, in the Pages palette and in the
Book palette you can see a change happening.
| | 11:23 | Let's go ahead and save the "tea_section" document here.
| | 11:26 | We now have an actual number out here that is Roman numeral ll.
| | 11:30 | So, just because it's numbering the pages in the book doesn't mean
you can't number them on the pages themselves as special sections.
| | 11:36 | So, go ahead and close up "tea_section."
| | 11:39 | And, basically that's working with page numbering.
| | 11:42 | Now, in the next section we're going to go through we're
going to talk about how to synchronize these book chapters;
| | 11:46 | how to actually get all the colors and styles and everything the same.
| | 11:49 | So, we're going to keep the book open and
we're going to move on to the next section.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Synchronizing book documents| 00:00 | If you're just joining us at this point, I would suggest
going back to the beginning of this chapter, Working With Books,
| | 00:04 | and starting to work through so you can get up to this point.
| | 00:07 | We're building on each session here, each movie we're going through.
| | 00:11 | So, go back to the beginning and get started with it that way.
| | 00:14 | Now, as you're following along here make sure that you've
got the "beverage_brochure.indb" book still open, or,
| | 00:19 | if you have closed it, you can go to your exercise files.
| | 00:21 | Where you saved it was in Chapter 7.
| | 00:23 | So you can open that back up.
| | 00:24 | It's called "beverage_brochure.indb."
| | 00:27 | Now, with it open, last time we went through and talked
about the page number itself, and how that works.
| | 00:32 | This time I want to talk about synchronizing a book.
| | 00:35 | Now, as far as I'm concerned, using the page number is a great feature.
| | 00:39 | It will autonumber pages for us, we're good to go.
| | 00:41 | But, you're also going to be able to synchronize documents.
| | 00:45 | And this is what I tend to use more in a book.
| | 00:48 | Synchronizing documents literally means if they're all part of the
same general document, in other words, these are just sections.
| | 00:54 | If we're going to print them as one big document
you want all of the styles to be consistent.
| | 00:59 | You want all the swatches to be consistent,
etc., that's where synchronizing comes in.
| | 01:04 | Synchronizing allows us to pick what's called a kind
of a master document, or what they call a Style Source.
| | 01:10 | You can see it right here in the Book palette.
| | 01:12 | Pick a style source.
| | 01:14 | If you change swatches, styles, anything in that document
the rest of these documents can update, based on that,
| | 01:20 | to change to match it.
| | 01:22 | Now, here's what I want to do.
| | 01:23 | We actually, in the last section here, we went through
and we changed the ordering of the pages right here.
| | 01:28 | You're going to notice that we have a
little style indicator right here.
| | 01:30 | What I'd like to do is I'd like to make the first section,
called "tea_section," what they call the Style Source.
| | 01:36 | So, to do that, come to the left in that gray box.
| | 01:38 | If I just click, I'm going to get this
document as the Style Source; which means,
| | 01:43 | if we synchronize, the rest of the documents
will follow this document's lead.
| | 01:47 | So, here's how it works.
| | 01:49 | If I open up "tea_section" - we're going to double-click.
| | 01:51 | Go ahead and open up "tea_section" there.
| | 01:52 | That'll open up the document.
| | 01:54 | Let's move the Book palette out of the way here.
| | 01:56 | I'm going to get this out of the way.
| | 01:58 | Now, here's what we're going to do, we're going to change our styles.
| | 02:00 | Just to give you an example.
| | 02:02 | When you synchronize documents in a book, if I take a look at the Book
palette over here, you can synchronize the colors, table of contents.
| | 02:09 | You can synchronize any styles, all sorts of stuff.
| | 02:12 | We're going to do a style to give you an example here.
| | 02:15 | So, let's say for instance that, I've got my headlines right here.
| | 02:17 | I'm going to double-click to get my cursor in there.
| | 02:19 | What I'd like to do is, go ahead and select that text by double-clicking.
| | 02:23 | I'm going to change that color right there.
| | 02:25 | Open up the Paragraph Styles palette just to take a look.
| | 02:28 | You can actually see that this is a Headline.
| | 02:31 | So what we're going to do is this, I'm going to double
click on Headline, open up the Paragraph Style Options here.
| | 02:37 | Now, there's all sorts of ways we can do this.
| | 02:39 | I'm just doing it this way because it seems to be the easier way.
| | 02:42 | If you look on the left-hand side at all your
options you're going to see Character Color.
| | 02:46 | We're just going to literally change the
color and maybe we'll change the font.
| | 02:49 | So, right now we've got this brownish looking color right here.
| | 02:52 | And, what I want to do is, you should hopefully all see a blue in here.
| | 02:56 | I'm going to pick a blue, or, pick a color you want.
| | 02:58 | It doesn't really honestly matter.
| | 03:00 | I'm going to turn on Preview.
| | 03:01 | Unfortunately, since we have the text selected
it's showing you the inverse of that color.
| | 03:06 | That's fine, we just have to trust it's going to be blue.
| | 03:09 | Next thing I want to do is change the font.
| | 03:11 | Left-hand side, let's come to Basic Character Formats.
| | 03:14 | You should see the font family, we're at Myriad Pro.
| | 03:16 | I'm going to change that something different.
| | 03:18 | Let's say I want to do a Warnock Pro.
| | 03:21 | You can find it from the list on the side, or I can type it in directly.
| | 03:25 | If I do Warnock Pro, there it is.
| | 03:26 | I'm going to come down to Font Style, open that
up and let's actually do something like this.
| | 03:32 | Now, there's all sorts of things we can do.
| | 03:33 | I'll try a Subhead and see what that looks like.
| | 03:35 | Okay, little too big.
| | 03:38 | Subhead is actually great, it's actually a subheading.
| | 03:40 | And, because this is an open type font it does give
you the ability to do things like Display, Subhead,
| | 03:45 | etc. We'll do the Subhead and I want to decrease the point size here.
| | 03:50 | So, I'm going to use my arrows to the right, you know what?
| | 03:52 | These are a little small here.
| | 03:53 | I'll do 72.
| | 03:54 | You've got to be careful with this.
| | 03:56 | Once you change the actual size of text, or change
the font, you can see it right here it's changing.
| | 04:02 | But, when you go to actually synchronize the rest of the documents and
make all these styles match, you have to be careful it's all going to fit.
| | 04:11 | So, I'm always trying to watch out for that, especially with headlines.
| | 04:14 | So, I'm going to decrease the size of this headline right here.
| | 04:17 | I can actually use my arrow keys.
| | 04:18 | With this size selected, if you click on the
actual tag over here, I can use my arrow keys down.
| | 04:23 | If I use my shift key it can actually go up or down, a little faster here.
| | 04:27 | So I'll get it around, you know, normally we're going to pick
a size, but - let me pick a size, it might be a little easier.
| | 04:33 | Let's do 60 point, that's fine.
| | 04:35 | That looks pretty good.
| | 04:36 | So, we've changed the font, we've actually done the color and the size.
| | 04:39 | So, I'm going to click OK.
| | 04:42 | That has updated the Headline style.
| | 04:44 | Okay, so we've actually updated the headline.
| | 04:46 | So this document is done.
| | 04:47 | Now, what I'd like to do is I'd like to make the
rest of the documents match this headline change.
| | 04:52 | So, here's what we will do.
| | 04:54 | Save "tea_section."
| | 04:55 | I'm just going to do a File>Save, Command-S, Control-S in Windows.
| | 04:59 | Go ahead and close it up, Command-W, Control-W in Windows.
| | 05:03 | And, you should see your Book palette still open here.
| | 05:05 | I'm going to click on the Book palette and open it up.
| | 05:07 | Pull it over here.
| | 05:08 | Now, take a look, "tea_section" has been changed.
| | 05:11 | That is the Style Source.
| | 05:13 | Here's what we're going to do.
| | 05:16 | If you want to synchronize all the documents in here,
make them all the same basically, what you want to do is,
| | 05:21 | I'm going to come down here to the bottom and click to Deselect.
| | 05:25 | Because if you have one of these selected and you tell it to
synchronize, it's only going to synchronize that selected document.
| | 05:30 | So, I'm going to do them all.
| | 05:31 | So click out here to deselect, come down and you can see the
button called Synchronize styles and swatches with Style Source.
| | 05:39 | Now, you've got to be careful.
| | 05:40 | Honestly, when you synchronize it's actually too easy to do.
| | 05:45 | And, if you're going to have a team of people working on this, you've got
set somebody that's in charge of the Master document, the Style Source.
| | 05:53 | That's probably the best way to do it.
| | 05:55 | And, you also want to tell people not to work with this
button, because anybody can actually synchronize at any time.
| | 06:01 | Now, before we synchronize we want to do this, I want to set what
it's going to change, I want to set what it's going to synchronize.
| | 06:07 | So, from the actual palette menu on the side here, from
the Book palette menu, come down to the bottom down here.
| | 06:12 | You're going to see, we've got the Synchronize Book option.
| | 06:15 | Now, it's the same thing as the double arrows out there in the palette.
| | 06:17 | But, we're going to do Synchronize Options in here.
| | 06:20 | This is going to change what's going to be able to synchronize.
| | 06:22 | So, click on that.
| | 06:23 | You take a look.
| | 06:25 | Synchronize Options dialogue box opens up and what you can
do is you can tell it everything you want it to synchronize.
| | 06:31 | This is, as a matter of fact, everything that will
synchronize if you actually itself to synchronize.
| | 06:35 | You look, if you have any Object Styles those will do it.
| | 06:38 | Table of Contents, if you built one, the styles will actually update.
| | 06:41 | Character Styles, Paragraph Styles, any Trapping Presets or Swatches.
| | 06:46 | So, it's kind of a nice thing we can do here.
| | 06:49 | All we did was we changed an actual paragraph style here.
| | 06:51 | So, I know that, it doesn't really matter if the rest of
these are checked because that's the only thing I changed.
| | 06:55 | A lot of times you want to make sure that these are turned off
so that you're only updating or synchronizing what you've done.
| | 07:01 | Now, I could turn them all off or on by clicking on this one up here.
| | 07:04 | So, just make sure they're all on, that's fine, we didn't change that.
| | 07:07 | And if you take a look at this button here
that says Synchronize, I can either click OK
| | 07:11 | and go out to the palette to synchronize, or we can do it right here.
| | 07:14 | So, I'm going to click on Synchronize and what it's going
to do is it's going to go through and do it for you.
| | 07:19 | Now, the thing about synchronization is it just does it.
| | 07:22 | It doesn't ask you, Are you sure you want to do this?
| | 07:25 | So, it says it's been completed successfully.
| | 07:28 | I usually keep this open so I know what happened.
| | 07:30 | Don't click this.
| | 07:31 | If you want to you can.
| | 07:33 | I click OK.
| | 07:34 | Now, nothing out here tells me that I have synchronized the document.
| | 07:37 | This is the thing.
| | 07:38 | You just want to be careful with other people working on these.
| | 07:42 | Just to make sure it worked,
| | 07:44 | I'm going to open up another document here.
| | 07:45 | Let's double click on "coffee_section," that should open the
document and if you take a look at one of the headlines here,
| | 07:52 | you will see that the actual headline style has changed.
| | 07:55 | So it's synchronized with the "tea_section" document.
| | 07:58 | This is a great feature when you're trying
to match sure all the swatches are the same,
| | 08:03 | all the Styles are the same, Character, Paragraph, Object Styles even.
| | 08:08 | So, that's a good way to update.
| | 08:10 | That's called Synchronize.
| | 08:12 | Now, I'm going to close up "coffee_section" here, so go ahead and
close up "coffee_section," under the Command-W on Mac, Control on Windows.
| | 08:20 | And, basically synchronization, like I
said, that's kind of how we can do it.
| | 08:23 | If you come out to the side here, like I said
before, we've got several options we can work with.
| | 08:27 | If you want to Synchronize just particular documents,
or just Selected Documents, you can do that too.
| | 08:33 | Suppose that from the first document here you're like well,
I've got different sections out here that I want to work with.
| | 08:39 | So, I've got the "tea_section" and the "coffee_
section" and "tea_section" should look the same.
| | 08:44 | So, what I can do is I can say the "tea_section" is the Style source,
I can select this document here and if I come out to the side
| | 08:50 | and say just Synchronize this Document, it'll leave
"editorial_cover" alone.
| | 08:55 | So, it will actually keep the headline the same.
| | 08:57 | That's before we had done this.
| | 09:00 | This is a great way for you to be able to have different
looking sections, like in a magazine or in a book, for instance.
| | 09:07 | When you come to a different section you can take the one
document you want to use as a style source, click to the left,
| | 09:13 | set that document as the style source, and then select all the documents in
here that are going to be synchronized when this document is synchronized.
| | 09:20 | So, it's a great way to be able to do that.
| | 09:22 | So, you can do sections.
| | 09:23 | You can do the whole book at once.
| | 09:25 | And there's a lot of different things we can do there.
| | 09:27 | All right, go ahead and set the Style Source back to "tea_section."
| | 09:31 | I'll click on the left there; that sets the style source.
| | 09:34 | And if you take a look at the bottom down
here, one last thing I want to do.
| | 09:37 | When you start working with this, the book itself,
it's always open as long as you have InDesign open.
| | 09:43 | If you come up top, now on a Mac we're going to see this red dot here,
and in Windows we'll probably see the X in the upper right-corner.
| | 09:49 | But, if you close this book it's actually going to ask you to save it.
| | 09:53 | It's a book file, so it's got to be able to save.
| | 09:56 | Now, every once in a while what I do is, if you come down
here to this little disk icon that let's you Save the book.
| | 10:02 | So, I'm going to click on that disk.
| | 10:04 | Go ahead and click on that.
| | 10:05 | All it does is it saves the book for you.
| | 10:07 | Saving the book means, if I've re-ordered pages, or set a different
style source or something like that, it keeps that in here.
| | 10:15 | So, next time I open the book it remembers it.
| | 10:17 | Kind of a nice little thing we can do.
| | 10:20 | All right, that's working with synchronizing documents.
| | 10:22 | So, next thing we're going to do is we're going to talk
about preflighting, printing, all sorts of things.
| | 10:26 | So, go ahead and keep the book file open,
and we'll get started on our next section.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Preflighting a book| 00:00 | Now that we've created the book, we've gone through and we did a
little synchronization, we went through and actually numbered them just
| | 00:06 | to make sure that the numbering system is working and
that it's in the right order, we're going to go through
| | 00:09 | and we're going to start to actually get this book out of here.
| | 00:12 | Now there are several things we can do.
| | 00:14 | We can preflight a book just to check to make sure that all the links
and fonts are good, we could package a book which is good for printing
| | 00:20 | or even going to the web, we can print the
book, and we can PDF it, which are pretty great.
| | 00:25 | Now up to this point, if you're jumping in in this section, you want to
make sure you go back to the beginning of this chapter and work through it
| | 00:31 | because we're utilizing a book file that
kind of started back in the second section.
| | 00:36 | So I'd go back to the beginning of the chapter to kind of get started.
| | 00:40 | Now if you take a look, I've got the "beverage_brochure" book open.
| | 00:43 | If you've been following along through each one of
these sessions, you want to make sure you go back
| | 00:46 | to your exercise files folder in the Chapter 7 folder.
| | 00:50 | You can actually open up the "beverage_brochure.indb,"
and we should have it out there.
| | 00:55 | With the book open, what we're going to do is
we're going to actually preflight the book.
| | 00:59 | Usually when you're working on the files,
like we said, the process, create the book,
| | 01:04 | you can open close through here the documents,
you can order, you can synchronize as you work.
| | 01:09 | You can add documents or even delete documents as you go along.
| | 01:12 | Now when you're getting close to getting that thing done and printing it
or doing whatever you're going to do with it, you want to preflight it.
| | 01:18 | Okay? Now to preflight, there's a couple of ways we can do this.
| | 01:22 | If you click on one of the documents here, let's say.
| | 01:26 | If you come out to the "beverage_brochure," the Book palette menu
here, you're going to be able to see Preflight Selected Documents.
| | 01:34 | Now this is allowing you, whichever one's selected out here,
just to check it, check the fonts, all that sort of thing.
| | 01:39 | I am sure a lot of you have already done preflighting on documents.
| | 01:41 | Now if you want to preflight the whole book just to check and make
sure everything's good for everything, click in the gray area out here.
| | 01:47 | Now once again, if you don't - the palette's kind of tight here.
| | 01:49 | You can open it up, click in the gray area to deselect.
| | 01:52 | Once you've deselected, come back to the
palette menu and it will say Preflight Book.
| | 01:56 | So click on Preflight Book.
| | 01:58 | What's going to happen here is this, it's going to
run through each document.
| | 02:02 | Now an interesting thing's happening here.
| | 02:04 | First of all you get the Preflight dialogue box.
| | 02:07 | You also look at your Book palette over here,
you'll notice that on the right of each document,
| | 02:12 | you're actually going to see this little book icon here.
| | 02:15 | What it's doing is to preflight the document it's
actually opening these documents behind the scenes.
| | 02:20 | Okay? Now to preflight the whole document - this is going to kind of
set up for everything here - if you want to do the whole thing,
| | 02:26 | you've got to make sure that none of these documents are
open, otherwise it will most likely skip that document.
| | 02:31 | Okay? So it's just a good thing to do.
| | 02:34 | Like I said, if everybody's out of the documents,
you can even, you know, find out who's in it
| | 02:37 | and have them close it, that sort of thing, and preflight the file.
| | 02:41 | Now once you run a preflight, if you take a look, it's actually checking
our Fonts, our Links and Images, our Colors and Inks, et cetera.
| | 02:47 | What we're looking for is just like any preflighted document, we're looking
for any kind of yellow yield sign sitting right down here in this column.
| | 02:53 | If you do see one, we've got some possible warnings.
| | 02:57 | Okay? It's the same thing as a typical preflight.
| | 02:59 | If I look through here it's just amassing all the content
for all three of these documents, all the fonts being used,
| | 03:06 | all the links and images, okay, all the colors and inks, et cetera.
| | 03:09 | It's a good way to check to see if somebody's using
spot plates and things like that, or spot colors.
| | 03:14 | Now once you've preflighted, if you've, you know, figured out that
nothing's wrong, you can either Cancel and just go about your work,
| | 03:21 | you can create a Report which is actually going to generate
a little text file that you can actually send to somebody
| | 03:26 | or send with the files, or you can go directly to Package.
| | 03:30 | Now if you encounter warnings, okay, the
yellow yield signs back in Summary here.
| | 03:34 | If you click back in Summary, if you see any yellow yield
signs in here, you're going to have to take care of those.
| | 03:40 | Okay? Basically what's happening is the Preflight dialogue
box is just like a report card saying here's what's going on.
| | 03:45 | If you want to fix those things, you will pinpoint where they're at,
select for any fonts, et cetera and pinpoint where they're at.
| | 03:52 | And if I look, it's actually going to say that I've got the file Name
right here, I have the Font itself, and where it's First being Used.
| | 03:57 | Okay? I can go back to that document, fix the
operation, fix whatever it is, the font, the color,
| | 04:03 | et cetera, and then preflight it again and check it.
| | 04:06 | Now if you want a report, like I said, you can actually click on Report.
| | 04:09 | It's a great thing to do.
| | 04:09 | If you want to package, click on Package.
| | 04:12 | Okay? And what we're going to do is we're just going to generate
a report because we're going to package in the next section.
| | 04:16 | So click on Report.
| | 04:18 | It's going to say, okay, we're going to create ourselves a little report.
| | 04:20 | I'm just going to just set this right on your desktop, wherever you want.
| | 04:24 | You can see what it's going to save it as basically.
| | 04:26 | It's going to save it as a report little text file.
| | 04:29 | So I'm going to click Save and basically we've created a report.
| | 04:34 | I'm going to click Cancel.
| | 04:35 | It looks like there's no real problems with these so far.
| | 04:37 | Click Cancel.
| | 04:38 | Take a look.
| | 04:39 | The files have closed.
| | 04:40 | And let me show you exactly what it generated.
| | 04:42 | I'm going to go out to my desktop.
| | 04:43 | You can see the text file right here.
| | 04:45 | I'm just going to double-click and hope it opens
in something that I can use.
| | 04:49 | Here we go.
| | 04:50 | All right.
| | 04:50 | Take a look.
| | 04:51 | It says "ADOBE INDESIGN PREFIGHT REPORT."
| | 04:53 | Now it's giving you all the information about the file itself, any Plug-
ins, any Fonts used, Colors, Links; hopefully I'm not making you sick
| | 05:03 | by scrolling, Print Settings, everything you've got.
| | 05:06 | This is a great file that you can send off to the printer just so they
can kind of take a quick glance and see what's going on with the file.
| | 05:11 | All right, now let me close that out.
| | 05:13 | Let me get back over to InDesign.
| | 05:15 | That's how you can preflight either separate
documents or the whole book at once.
| | 05:20 | So that basically concludes preflighting.
| | 05:22 | We're going to next talk about how to actually
go through and package a book.
| | 05:26 | So keep the book file open and we'll see you back here in a minute.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Packaging a book| 00:00 | Now we're going to package a book.
| | 00:02 | Now this actually entails being able to gather all of the content from
each one of these documents and send it off either to a printer to be able
| | 00:10 | to be printed, or to be able to send it to the web to
be able to go to go live with it, so Adobe GoLive.
| | 00:16 | Now once again, if you're following along, if you're just jumping in in
this section right here, you want to make sure you go back to the beginning
| | 00:21 | of the chapter because that way you can kind of start.
| | 00:23 | We're building throughout.
| | 00:24 | If you don't have your book open right now,
go to your exercise files in Chapter 7.
| | 00:29 | If you started from the beginning you should
be able to see "beverage_brochure.indb."
| | 00:32 | And let's open that up.
| | 00:35 | Now if you take a look, we've got the book file open.
| | 00:36 | Now let's say we're ready to print this thing.
| | 00:38 | I want to get it out, and I want it collected all together.
| | 00:40 | Okay? Of course the book is just tracking these documents.
| | 00:44 | Okay? Within each of these documents, if you're linking a
font or pictures or whatever, you've got to get it all together.
| | 00:50 | Okay? So we can package.
| | 00:51 | Now, once again, click on "tea_section" right here.
| | 00:54 | Let's select that document.
| | 00:57 | In the book file here you're going to notice we've got it selected.
| | 00:59 | Come out to the Book palette menu on the side out here.
| | 01:02 | If you take a look, after we Preflight, we can also then Package.
| | 01:07 | Now if you take a look, it says Package on the
right-hand side over here on this other menu,
| | 01:11 | it says Selected Documents For GoLive or Selected Documents For Print.
| | 01:15 | So you can actually gather this stuff up from this single document, all
the links to it in a single folder for GoLive for the web or for print.
| | 01:22 | Now you notice it says Selected Documents.
| | 01:24 | If you have one chosen, it's only going to do those documents.
| | 01:27 | If you want to do them all, let's say I decide I want to
take all these documents, collect them all independently,
| | 01:32 | and put them in one single folder, I will deselect, clicking
out here, come off to the side, and say Package Book For Print.
| | 01:41 | So you'll see a big difference there.
| | 01:42 | All of these things tend to change depending on what you have selected.
| | 01:45 | So let's do this.
| | 01:46 | We're going to Package for Print.
| | 01:48 | So, Package Book For Print.
| | 01:49 | What it's going to do, as soon as you click that it's
going to go through and actually preflight the files.
| | 01:54 | Now this is kind of a nice thing.
| | 01:55 | It does preflighting for us.
| | 01:56 | If it were to run across an error, let's say you
were to have a missing font or something like that,
| | 02:00 | you might see a "possible errors were detected" kind of thing.
| | 02:04 | You could then go in and check out the Preflighting
Instructions and see what's going on with the file
| | 02:08 | and go back and fix it, but it didn't find any problems for us.
| | 02:12 | Okay? If you did find problems, you can just go right through it,
| | 02:15 | okay, Come right into this and just say Package.
| | 02:18 | Now what happens is, it's going to create this little Instruction file.
| | 02:22 | When you preflight, this is what you're actually making.
| | 02:24 | So if you decide to actually save that
little instruction file, that's what this is.
| | 02:28 | In the Instruction file here, this is kind of cool, there's a little
separate text file, you can put like your company info and everything.
| | 02:33 | So I can say my contact here.
| | 02:35 | I'm going to say "brian wood" is the contact.
| | 02:37 | You could put your company, I could say "lynda.com";
you could put your address, phone, et cetera.
| | 02:41 | It's going to put it in this little text file.
| | 02:43 | Now once you fill this out, you don't have to obviously, but once you
do we want to go through and actually get the document out of here.
| | 02:49 | So we're going to actually go through and package it.
| | 02:51 | So click on Continue.
| | 02:54 | Take a look.
| | 02:54 | It's going to say Create Package Folder.
| | 02:56 | Now in this dialogue box, here's what we are going to do.
| | 02:58 | I'm going to set it on the desktop.
| | 03:01 | Okay? You can set it wherever you want to.
| | 03:03 | I'm going to put it on the desktop so I know where it is.
| | 03:05 | Here's what it's going to do.
| | 03:06 | It's going to actually take the book itself and if you
look up top it's going to say something like Save As.
| | 03:11 | Okay? It'll look a little different on Windows.
| | 03:13 | You'll see "beverage_brochure Folder."
| | 03:15 | It's going to create a folder for us.
| | 03:17 | Now when it packages, it's going to grab the book file
itself, copy that, and put that into this new folder.
| | 03:25 | It's going to copy each document independently, copy that into
the new folder it's creating, and make a single links folder
| | 03:33 | and a single fonts folder for all of your links and your fonts.
| | 03:36 | So what we're going to do is take a look down here.
| | 03:38 | We're going to get it to go, but let's take a few seconds
here to talk about this stuff down at the bottom.
| | 03:43 | If you look, it's going to say Copy Fonts.
| | 03:45 | Now if you want to send this to somebody else so that they
can actually print it out, you want to do something like this.
| | 03:51 | Now (ExceptCJK), that stands for Chinese, Japanese, Korean.
| | 03:55 | It will not actually grab those.
| | 03:56 | You're going to have to do those manually, Copy, Paste in your folder.
| | 03:59 | Copy Linked Graphics, any graphics you have it'll copy
into this new folder and put it into a links folder.
| | 04:06 | Update Graphic Links.
| | 04:07 | That means when it copies all the files into this new folder,
it's going to put the pictures in there as well, the graphics,
| | 04:13 | and it's going to update the links to each independent
InDesign document, which is a nice little feature.
| | 04:18 | And if you look down here, you're going to see
Use Document Hyphenation Exceptions Only.
| | 04:22 | If you did any hyphenations and you did stuff for a certain
document, you basically want to be able to turn this on.
| | 04:28 | You want to turn this on.
| | 04:29 | Okay? If you don't know, you could leave it off.
| | 04:32 | All right?
| | 04:33 | Include Fonts and Links From Hidden Document Layers.
| | 04:36 | If you have any layers in this document and you've
hidden them by turning the eye off on the layer,
| | 04:41 | you could say, let's grab all the content from those layers as well.
| | 04:44 | We're not going to do that; we don't have any.
| | 04:46 | And View Report is going to open up that little text file that we
actually entered our name and address and all that sort of thing.
| | 04:53 | Okay? So we don't have to do that if you don't want.
| | 04:55 | If you look down here, Instructions will get us back to the
previous dialogue box where we entered our name and info.
| | 05:01 | So we don't want to do that.
| | 05:02 | We're ready to package this thing.
| | 05:04 | So take a look down at the bottom.
| | 05:05 | You're going to see something like Save, there's a button down there.
| | 05:08 | Go ahead and click.
| | 05:09 | Now you're going to be faced with the Font Alert dialogue box.
| | 05:14 | Now the Font Alert dialogue box is something that you should look at
and read and, you know, discuss with a lawyer, that sort of thing.
| | 05:22 | Just kidding.
| | 05:22 | Basically what you've got to do is just it's just telling
you that a lot of fonts have licensing restrictions.
| | 05:27 | If you want to print this thing you can - it'll collect the fonts.
| | 05:30 | It'll copy them for you and send them
off, but you've just got to be careful.
| | 05:33 | You can't just share fonts and let other
people use them and kind of take over them.
| | 05:38 | So what you could do is, if you see right here you can click Back.
| | 05:41 | Now on the Windows machine these two buttons
are reversed, but if I click Back,
| | 05:44 | it'll actually take me back here and then
I could actually say don't copy my fonts.
| | 05:48 | Okay? Now back in this dialogue, I forgot to mention something.
| | 05:52 | In the Create Package Folder dialogue box, the Mac says
Save As, but I believe it's Folder on the Windows machine
| | 05:58 | and it should be located somewhere down here I think.
| | 06:01 | And instead of, on the Mac it says Save, on the Windows it says Package.
| | 06:05 | Okay? So it's kind of the same thing.
| | 06:07 | So I'm going to click on Save, or Package on Windows.
| | 06:10 | I don't really you know, this dialogue
box, you can, you know, fling it left.
| | 06:13 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 06:15 | There it is.
| | 06:15 | It's going through and packaging right now.
| | 06:17 | It's going to look at it's kind of printing.
| | 06:19 | If there were any missing anything, any missing fonts, any
missing pictures that would need to be fixed before I did that.
| | 06:26 | Now let me show you what it did.
| | 06:28 | I'm going to click onto my desktop.
| | 06:29 | I should be able to see the folder hanging out here.
| | 06:31 | I told it to go to the desktop.
| | 06:33 | So by double-clicking on the folder, taking a look
inside, you'll see that it actually packaged or collected
| | 06:39 | and copied the book file itself, each document separately.
| | 06:43 | It didn't make one single document out of them.
| | 06:46 | It created an Instruction file for us to open or your,
you know, print service provider, whoever's doing this.
| | 06:51 | If there were any pictures on these files, it would
create a links folder that the links would go into.
| | 06:55 | And it created a Fonts folder.
| | 06:56 | So if I click on the Fonts here and take a look, there
are all of my fonts in there; "otf" being open-type fonts.
| | 07:02 | So there is the package.
| | 07:04 | Basically ready to send off to your printer.
| | 07:06 | I could StuffIt, ZIP it, do whatever I wanted to do, put it on a CD,
| | 07:10 | however you want to get it to your printer,
and your printer will have each page out here.
| | 07:13 | Okay? So let me close this up.
| | 07:17 | So that that's basically packaging it that way.
| | 07:19 | Now let's go back over to InDesign.
| | 07:20 | I want to pop back over to InDesign.
| | 07:22 | Like I said, you can package individual
documents themselves or the whole book itself.
| | 07:28 | Now, if you come back out in your Book palette
out here, come back to the Book palette menu.
| | 07:33 | Come back to Package.
| | 07:35 | You're going to see Book For GoLive.
| | 07:37 | Now what this is going to do is this is actually going to
generate both XML and PDF and a couple of other things.
| | 07:45 | It's going to create some information that you can take to Adobe GoLive,
which is basically their web program, and you can open it up in there
| | 07:53 | and actually generate a web page from this when it creates the package.
| | 07:57 | Okay? I just want to show you this really quickly.
| | 08:00 | If I click Book For GoLive.
| | 08:02 | Click on that.
| | 08:03 | It's going to say, where do you want to save the package right here?
| | 08:06 | Okay? Now, we're not going to go this far.
| | 08:09 | I just wanted to show you this.
| | 08:11 | It's going to generate a little package that
you could take directly over to GoLive.
| | 08:15 | You could open it up and you will see
the page itself, each page independently.
| | 08:20 | And you could go through and literally drag it into
GoLive page and actually generate an HTML page.
| | 08:24 | Now it sounds really simple and pretty straight-
forward, but there's actually a lot to it.
| | 08:30 | And if you stick around long enough and go to that
chapter, there is a chapter on Publishing for Go Live.
| | 08:34 | So I'm going to Cancel out of here.
| | 08:36 | I don't want to do that.
| | 08:36 | I just wanted to show you that the option was there.
| | 08:39 | So that's basically packaging.
| | 08:41 | You got to make sure that all your documents
are good to go, everything's ready and set,
| | 08:45 | and that you've got everything all in order and ready to package.
| | 08:48 | So once you do that, you're basically done.
| | 08:50 | The next thing we're going to do in the next section here, we're going to
go through and we're going to talk about how to actually print a book.
| | 08:55 | This is one of my favorite features inside of here.
| | 08:58 | So, you can leave the book file open and we'll come
back and talk about printing in the next section.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing an entire book| 00:00 | Continuing on working with books here; with "beverage_brochure.indb"
open from the previous exercise we've been doing,
| | 00:06 | and if you haven't been following along, if you jumped into this point,
make sure you go back to the beginning of the chapter and start from there.
| | 00:12 | Now, with the InDesign book open from the exercise files
Chapter 7 folder, we've got our documents out here.
| | 00:18 | What I want to talk about is just printing the actual book.
| | 00:21 | Now, to be perfectly honest with you, all this stuff we've done
so far, this synchronizing, page numbering, it's phenomenal.
| | 00:27 | But as far as I'm concerned, the printing
is probably the best part in here.
| | 00:31 | I used to work at a company where we did large catalogs
and every single spread was a separate document
| | 00:37 | because we had so many people that had their hands in there.
| | 00:40 | So, we'd have an 80-something page catalog and
it would literally have, you know, 47 documents.
| | 00:46 | So a book would have to control all those.
| | 00:48 | For me to print all those out at once would be a pain in the neck.
| | 00:51 | So what I did was, through the book you
could print basically the whole thing.
| | 00:55 | To do that, with the book open, if I click out here in the blank
area to kind of deselect everything, take a look down at the bottom
| | 01:03 | and you're actually going to see the printer icon down here.
| | 01:05 | This says Print the book.
| | 01:06 | Now, if you click it it is just going to do that, it's going
to open the Print dialog box and let you print the book.
| | 01:11 | If you decide that you want to print just, let's say, a section or just one
of the documents, I could just select the document like "tea_section" here,
| | 01:19 | come down here and it's going to say Print the book, but it
will actually print that section, so that document for you.
| | 01:25 | Okay. As a matter of fact, if you want to test it or prove it to
yourself, if you come to the Book palette menu on the side here,
| | 01:31 | take a look, it's going to say Print Selected Documents.
| | 01:34 | If you didn't have anything selected it would say Print Book.
| | 01:37 | Okay. So here's what we'll do: I want to deselect, to do everything.
If you click on the print icon here, just print and let it go,
| | 01:44 | what it is going to do is it is going to open up your Print dialog box.
| | 01:46 | Now, I'm on a Mac; yours is going to look most likely
completely differently, you know, you've got different printers.
| | 01:52 | You know, if you're on a Windows machine it is going to
open up a Print dialog, but it's going to look different.
| | 01:56 | Your job is simply to get to your printer, set up your number of
Copies you want, set up the, you know, everything else you want,
| | 02:04 | basically the Marks and Bleeds and all that sort of stuff.
| | 02:07 | Okay. So we're not going to go through every option here.
| | 02:09 | There's nothing really special we have to do.
| | 02:11 | If we print a book, all it's going to do is it
is going to print one document after another.
| | 02:15 | One of the only things you can do is if your printer actually
lets you collate, which ours isn't letting us do that,
| | 02:22 | you could tell it to collate by checking collate and that will
actually take each document and put them as a single document
| | 02:29 | when it is done printing and then make
another one, keep collating those together,
| | 02:33 | you could reverse the order if you really want to print in reverse order.
| | 02:36 | Sometimes that's necessary.
| | 02:38 | Other than that, you're going to choose your printer and
go ahead and print the document, number of copies and all.
| | 02:42 | You'll notice that we can't pick a page range, basically.
| | 02:44 | Okay. Because we said print the whole book;
it's just going to ahead and print it out.
| | 02:49 | Now if you have a Print Preset set, which is what we're going to talk
about in a later movie, you can basically choose that if you want to.
| | 02:56 | Otherwise, you go through all of your settings
inside of here and start to work with it.
| | 02:58 | So if I click print right now, which I'm actually not going to
do, if I click Print, it is going to go through and print the book.
| | 03:06 | Okay. And the great thing is it looks like it is a single
document because all the page numbering is correct.
| | 03:10 | So what we'll do is I'm just going to Cancel
out of here. That will print the book.
| | 03:14 | Like I said, if you want to print an individual
document, you just choose it.
| | 03:17 | Now, you can also open a document.
| | 03:20 | Like for instance, if I have "editorial_cover"
open here, if I double-click on "editorial_cover,"
| | 03:24 | if you have that open you can just go
to File>Print and print that document.
| | 03:27 | That's fine.
| | 03:28 | That's totally cool.
| | 03:28 | You can do that, too.
| | 03:29 | But it just gives you the option, it affords
you the ability to do that inside of here.
| | 03:33 | Now one thing I'm going to suggest, I'm going to
close up "editorial_cover"; I don't need that open.
| | 03:38 | So go ahead and close "editorial_cover."
| | 03:41 | Now, what I suggest is, if you are going to print
the document, you want to preflight it first.
| | 03:47 | In a previous section in this chapter we talked about preflighting a book.
| | 03:50 | You want to preflight it because that will catch any errors.
| | 03:53 | If you have errors with any one of these like missing fonts, if you have
missing images, graphics, that sort of thing, every time it goes print,
| | 04:01 | every time it opens a new document to print
it, it is going to give you warning dialogs.
| | 04:04 | Okay. So you want to make sure you preflight by coming
out to the side with nothing selected, Preflight the Book,
| | 04:09 | make sure everything is good and then you can print the book.
| | 04:12 | It's a good thing to do.
| | 04:12 | Okay. Because it is kind of a bummer when you go to walk away
for lunch to print the whole book and suddenly it stops at
| | 04:19 | the first dialog box that says, "You're missing a font."
| | 04:22 | Anyway, that is printing a book.
| | 04:23 | Kind of a nice feature right there.
| | 04:25 | So, that's talking about printing a book.
| | 04:27 | Next thing we are going to do is we're going to
go through and talk about how to export as a PDF.
| | 04:31 | So keep the book file open for the next exercise.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting a book to PDF| 00:00 | Continuing with our book theme, let's talk about how to take
a book and take all the documents and generate PDFs out of them.
| | 00:06 | Now as a book file, all of these are separate documents.
| | 00:09 | But there's a couple of good things we can do inside of here.
| | 00:11 | Let's say you need to get it to the printer and you want to make it look
like it's a single document, okay, now to do that you can make a PDF
| | 00:20 | and the PDF will actually string all of these together as a single file.
| | 00:24 | You could also PDF them independently if you really wanted to do that.
| | 00:27 | So that's kind of a nice thing to do.
| | 00:28 | So what we're going to do is we're going to generate a PDF out of the whole
book itself so we'll string all these together into a single PDF file.
| | 00:36 | From the Book palette menu out here, if you take a look, you
are actually going to see that we have Export Book to PDF.
| | 00:42 | Now, this is one way you could do it and once
again if you have no document selected to do that,
| | 00:47 | we're going to make sure we click out here,
that's going to say Export Book to PDF.
| | 00:50 | If you have any selected documents, it's going to say
basically Export Selected Documents to PDF kind of thing.
| | 00:57 | Okay. A nice easy way we could do this, we could click here or if you
come down to the printer down here, I do this enough to where if I hold
| | 01:04 | down the Option key on Mac, Alt key on Windows, and I click on
this print icon, it turns into a Create PDF button basically.
| | 01:10 | Okay. So I'm going to hold down the Option key on Mac,
Alt on Windows, click on the printer icon down there,
| | 01:17 | if you take a look it's going to take us to the Export dialog box.
| | 01:19 | So it's going to actually automatically export a PDF for us.
| | 01:23 | Now, that's because we had nothing selected, it's
going to do everything, it's going to be all the pages.
| | 01:27 | So I'm going to set this on the desktop; you can put it wherever
you want in the exercise files folder, etc. And don't forget,
| | 01:33 | if you're just joining us at this point, you want to make sure that you've
actually gone through the initial part of the book process here starting
| | 01:39 | from the beginning of the chapter here to get this book.
| | 01:41 | All right, now that we're on our desktop
here, what I want to do is save this.
| | 01:45 | Okay. Now, in Save As up here, you can name it whatever you want.
| | 01:48 | If you're on a Windows machine, you'll see
file name and usually it's down here somewhere.
| | 01:52 | You can change the name of the file, whatever you want to do.
| | 01:54 | It usually names it according to the book
name, which is fine; I'm fine with that.
| | 01:59 | So we're going to generate a PDF.
| | 02:00 | So go ahead and click Save.
| | 02:01 | It's going to take you right to the Export Adobe PDF dialog box.
| | 02:06 | Now, you can pick any one of the Adobe PDF Presets that you want.
| | 02:10 | Okay. Now, the Adobe PDF Presets are basically talking
about how or where this thing is going to be used.
| | 02:16 | Usually we're going to either, if we're going to send this off
to print, usually we're going to something called Press Quality,
| | 02:21 | that actually includes things like color management, etc. If you're just
going to print it out on your local DocuWriter or something like that
| | 02:28 | or your local ink-jet printer by your desk, you
can just use High Quality Print and that's fine.
| | 02:34 | Smallest File Size.
| | 02:36 | That actually is not the smallest file size you can get but anyway that's
for web usually or screen presentations or email, that sort of thing.
| | 02:43 | And PDF/X up here, this is actually a subset, this is
specific for printing, usually for ads and things like that.
| | 02:49 | Okay. So we're going to do Press Quality.
| | 02:52 | Now, if you take a look down here, you're going to notice that you
can't pick pages because it's just going to do the whole book as one.
| | 03:00 | If you really want to, you can actually make these Spreads.
| | 03:03 | Now, I would kind of possibly warn against this, okay, Spreads
are going to take two pages next to each other, two spreads,
| | 03:12 | and actually generate one page, one PDF page, out of them.
| | 03:16 | Sometimes your printers don't like this, okay, so I usually
will turn off Spreads and let them take care of that.
| | 03:21 | It depends on what your printer wants you to do.
| | 03:23 | Also, with a book, if you're trying to kind
of thread all these together into one PDF,
| | 03:27 | if you turn on Spreads sometimes it can have some interesting effects.
| | 03:30 | Okay. So we're going to leave that off.
| | 03:32 | If you look down at Options down here, you're going to be able to see that.
| | 03:35 | I want to basically View this right after Export.
| | 03:37 | Okay. That way we can see it.
| | 03:40 | Everything else applies.
| | 03:41 | If you've chosen a PDF preset, you are pretty much set.
| | 03:44 | You could go through all the settings on the left hand side here, and
this isn't a movie about PDFs but you could go through and set things
| | 03:50 | up for yourself and it will do it for the whole document.
| | 03:53 | I'm basically ready to go.
| | 03:54 | Okay. So we're going to click down here on Export.
| | 03:56 | Click on Export.
| | 03:57 | It's going to actually generate the PDF for us.
| | 04:00 | Now, if you take a look, it's automatically opening Acrobat.
| | 04:03 | It might take a couple of extra seconds
for you because I already had Acrobat open.
| | 04:07 | But if I look inside of here, typically what is going to happen
is you're going to see the document looking something like this.
| | 04:12 | Let me zoom out of it.
| | 04:13 | I can see my minus sign up here.
| | 04:15 | I'll zoom out of it and I've got what is called single page.
| | 04:17 | You're going to see four views down here at
the lower right hand corner of your screen.
| | 04:22 | Now, this is saying that you've got the latest version of Acrobat.
| | 04:26 | If you don't, you might not see these buttons.
| | 04:28 | If I do Continuous, it will show me the pages continuously
stringed down and this one right here, this button right here,
| | 04:35 | actually allows me to do continuous facing pages so I can
actually see the document as it is meant to print as facing pages.
| | 04:42 | So I can basically see that it has built the whole thing, put it all
together, I'm using my scroll wheel here, you can use the scroll bar, too.
| | 04:47 | And you kind of see everything happening here.
| | 04:50 | Once again, I'm in Acrobat.
| | 04:51 | If you don't have Acrobat, if you don't have Reader, something
like that, the PDF should be generated and you should be able
| | 04:56 | to send it off to your printer and be pretty much set.
| | 04:59 | So let me close this up.
| | 05:00 | I'm going to come back over and, by the way, I
can see my PDF sitting out on my desktop out here.
| | 05:05 | I'll come back into InDesign and that's
how you can generate a PDF out of here.
| | 05:09 | The one thing you do want to do though is usually
what I do before I actually create a PDF is,
| | 05:15 | and we've already done this in a previous section here,
I will usually Preflight the Book before I make a PDF.
| | 05:22 | Now, preflighting is going to check, like I said
before, the fonts, images and all that sort of thing.
| | 05:26 | If you don't and you go to export the PDF, the book to PDF,
you might come up with some warning dialogs saying that, "Hey,
| | 05:31 | this document has missing images," and that sort of thing.
| | 05:33 | So you'd have to take care of that before you made the PDF to
make sure that this thing is going to basically print properly.
| | 05:39 | Like I said before, if you wanted to just make a PDF out of one of
these, I could select the actual section I wanted, the document I wanted,
| | 05:47 | come down to your print icon, Option on Mac, Alt down on Windows, click,
| | 05:52 | and it will actually generate a PDF named by
the book from just that individual document.
| | 05:57 | Okay. We're not going to go ahead and do
that so I'm going to Cancel out of here.
| | 06:00 | I just wanted to show you that.
| | 06:02 | You could also come to the Book palette menu on the side and if you have
a document selected you will then see Export Selected Documents to PDF.
| | 06:11 | So, with books we've seen a lot of different things we can do.
| | 06:14 | There's a couple of features we haven't talked about
quite yet and we're going to hit that in the next section.
| | 06:18 | But for right now, we're going to keep the book open and in the next
movie we're going to talk about just a few more features that we can use
| | 06:25 | with books, things like just creating a book to synchronize documents.
| | 06:29 | Also, how to open older books from previous versions of InDesign.
| | 06:33 | So, I'm going to keep the book open and we'll see you in the next video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Book extras| 00:00 | The last thing I'd like to talk about when using books is just a couple
things that I find really helpful that are kind of nice inside of here.
| | 00:07 | They're a little bit hidden features.
| | 00:09 | First things first, if you ever are given a book or if you've
actually had a book from a previous version of InDesign, let's say from CS
| | 00:15 | or from version 2, you can open those up directly inside of InDesign.
| | 00:19 | So I can just go to File>Open and open the book file up.
| | 00:22 | It will update the book file for me.
| | 00:26 | As you open each individual document, it's
going to try and update that individual file.
| | 00:31 | So it'll update the CS2 basically if you're working in CS2.
| | 00:35 | Now if you want to, as you open a book from a previous version, when
you open the book, before you actually add the documents themselves,
| | 00:44 | what you can do is if you come off to the side here, come up
to the palette menu of the book you've created, like I said,
| | 00:50 | it's before you've actually added the documents, take a look down
here and you'll see something called Automatic Document Conversion.
| | 00:56 | If you click on that, if you select that, if I choose that option,
I'm going to come back out here and take a look, it's turned on.
| | 01:03 | Now what that means is if I add documents to this book
right now and they're older versions - they're not CS2 documents,
| | 01:11 | they're CS or version 2 - if I open or synchronize
or, you know, whatever, do anything to this book,
| | 01:19 | it's going to automatically update them for me
and overwrite the old versions.
| | 01:23 | Otherwise, if you don't turn this on when you've opened up
a previous book version from another version of InDesign,
| | 01:29 | what's going to happen is the first time you open one of these or
synchronize or do anything, it's going to go through each document
| | 01:35 | and say okay, let's Save As and let's give it a new name.
| | 01:37 | And that's really annoying.
| | 01:39 | So like I said, if you're going to create a brand new book
or you're going to open a book from a previous version,
| | 01:44 | make sure you turn on Automatic Document Conversion
before you go ripping into the files at all.
| | 01:48 | Okay? So it's kind of a nice little thing you can do.
| | 01:50 | Now the last thing I want to share with you
is this, I use books in a different way.
| | 01:56 | Okay? A lot of times I'm not trying to create large documents.
| | 01:58 | As a matter of fact, what I do, I do a lot of training.
| | 02:01 | So I go through and I actually have a lot
of handouts and things that I generate.
| | 02:04 | Now all those handouts I create for different programs,
let's say for InDesign and Illustrator and all of that,
| | 02:09 | I am always wanting to have the same styles, the same colors, et cetera.
| | 02:13 | Now if I attach those handouts to a book, it's going to try
and auto number them for me and I don't want to do that.
| | 02:18 | All I want to do is use like the synchronize
feature in here to get all the colors the same.
| | 02:22 | So here's what we can do.
| | 02:24 | First of all let's do this, I'm going to disassociate
each one of these documents from this book.
| | 02:29 | Okay? We could break - we could make a new book and then
actually put them in here again, but this is easier I think.
| | 02:36 | So what I am going to do is if I come out here and I Shift-Click
between all of these, you're going to see the minus sign under it.
| | 02:40 | So you're going to disassociate them.
| | 02:42 | It's going to say, don't track them with this book.
| | 02:44 | So I am going to do that and it's going to be completely blank.
| | 02:46 | So we're kind of starting from scratch here.
| | 02:48 | So pretend we just created a brand new book.
| | 02:49 | If I want to actually take documents and just use the synchronization or
the printing or the PDF feature for others, I am going to come off on
| | 02:58 | the side after I create the book, before I add documents,
I'm going to come down to Book Page Numbering Options.
| | 03:04 | Click on that.
| | 03:04 | And what this is going to do is it's going to
let me control the page numbering out here.
| | 03:09 | Now, if you look in here, you're going to see Page Order.
| | 03:13 | Typically what it does, and what we've seen so far throughout
this whole process here is that it literally just continues.
| | 03:19 | Okay? So it says 1-4, 5-8, you
know, 9-12, kind of thing on the page numbering.
| | 03:24 | Now if you wanted to, you could say Continue on
the next odd page, if you really wanted to do that.
| | 03:28 | That's kind of interesting, or the next even page.
| | 03:31 | Different scenarios, different situations for that.
| | 03:33 | Most likely we're going to do Continue from previous doc.
| | 03:37 | Now this is probably one of my favorite options right down here.
| | 03:40 | When you add documents to the book, it's going to
Automatically Paginate it.
| | 03:44 | If you just want to use like the print the
whole thing or PDF the whole thing, et cetera,
| | 03:49 | this is a great way to do this or even just make all the styles the same.
| | 03:53 | I can turn off Automatic Pagination, I'm going to click OK.
| | 03:57 | Now this is after I've created the book but before I've added by documents.
| | 04:02 | So once I do that I'm going to add my documents.
| | 04:04 | Click on the plus.
| | 04:06 | Now from your exercise files folder in the Chapter 7
folder we're going to open up all three of these documents here.
| | 04:12 | We're going to put these in here.
| | 04:13 | Okay? So what I'm going to do is I'm going to select all three of these.
| | 04:16 | I'm Shift-Clicking from one to the last.
| | 04:19 | This will do all of them at once.
| | 04:21 | Now we disassociated them from the book so they're
all kind of just sitting there by themselves.
| | 04:25 | I'm going to click Open.
| | 04:27 | And if you take a look at the page numbering inside
of here, it should have worked; hopefully it did work.
| | 04:34 | If you look, it's going to say 1-4, 1-4, 1-4.
| | 04:38 | You didn't touch the page numbers.
| | 04:41 | I do this all the time for my handouts.
| | 04:43 | So if I have a handout for InDesign and a handout, let's say, for
Illustrator, I've made a change on my headlines in the InDesign handout
| | 04:50 | and I like that and I want to take it to all my handouts, I'll turn
off the pagination, basically get out there and say just turn it off,
| | 04:59 | and I'll go through and just add them to
it and it will not automatically paginate.
| | 05:02 | That way I can do the synchronization.
| | 05:04 | If I deselect here I can do the synchronization and it'll still work.
| | 05:07 | I can PDF the whole thing; I can print
it, package it, whatever I want to do.
| | 05:12 | So that's a great way to control those page numbers.
| | 05:14 | All right.
| | 05:14 | We've been through a lot of different things with books.
| | 05:16 | There's a lot you can do with them.
| | 05:18 | And there's a lot of interesting things we can
do as well, like table of contents and index.
| | 05:22 | If you want to learn more about that, go to the actual
individual sections for that, like tables of contents
| | 05:27 | and index so you can learn a little bit more about it.
| | 05:30 | You can go ahead and close up this book and we'll move
on to the next chapter talking about tables of content.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Tables of ContentsPreparing for a TOC| 00:00 | In this section we're going to discuss how to work with Table of Contents.
| | 00:03 | Tables of Content basically allow you to auto generate
one of these, utilizing things inside of your document.
| | 00:10 | So if you've got a longer document, or you need to get a shorter
document like a newsletter, and you want to kind of quickly make a Table
| | 00:16 | of Contents; it's not that bad once you get the correct setup going.
| | 00:20 | Now here's what we're going to do, I going to open up a file here from
the Exercise Files Folder, the Chapter 8 folder inside of there,
| | 00:28 | and we're going to open up "brochure_toc_final,"
and you should be able to get that open.
| | 00:31 | Hopefully you don't have any problems with
links or missing fonts, that sort of thing.
| | 00:36 | And if you're just kind of joining us here, if you're a monthly or
annual subscriber you probably don't have access to these files.
| | 00:43 | I mean if you want to use your own files you can
go ahead and do that and just kind of follow along.
| | 00:47 | But if you'd really like to follow my steps exactly,
and you want to use the same files I'm using,
| | 00:52 | I mean I suggest you upgrade to the Premium
subscription, or even purchase the CD-ROM to get them.
| | 00:57 | All right, now that we have this "toc_final,"
this is the final version of what we're going
| | 01:01 | to be doing throughout this chapter, and
this is the final version of the TOC.
| | 01:04 | If you look on the left-hand side, I'm on page 2 of "brochure_
toc_final," and I can see the Table of Contents built on the left.
| | 01:12 | Now here's the way a Table of Contents is built.
| | 01:15 | Okay, it's auto generated by end design, but how does that work?
| | 01:18 | If I take a look under Layout menu, take a look
down here you're going to see Table of Contents,
| | 01:22 | you're going to see Update Table of Contents,
and Table of Contents Styles.
| | 01:27 | Now to build a table of contents, I'm going to go right to Table of Contents.
| | 01:30 | But hang on, there's a couple of things we've
got to do first to get this to work, okay?
| | 01:35 | First and foremost, I'm going to come back to the page here, to generate
an automatic Table of Contents we have to set up Paragraph Styles.
| | 01:42 | Paragraph Styles are basically how it works.
| | 01:45 | If you take a look at the Table of Contents on the left over
here, you're going to notice it says, "Flavors" right here.
| | 01:50 | Then it says, "The many flavors of tea,"
and there's a page number right there.
| | 01:53 | Now if you were to look over at the text on the right hand page over
here, on page 3, you would see "Flavors," "The many flavors of tea."
| | 02:01 | Now the way this works is basically by
setting up Paragraph Styles, like I said.
| | 02:04 | If you double-click on top of "Flavors" here to get
your cursor in there, and I'll get it in there.
| | 02:09 | Take a look on the right hand side over here; hopefully you
have your workspace set up so you can see your Paragraph Styles.
| | 02:14 | Open your Paragraph Styles by clicking on the tab, and if you look
inside of there again you'll notice that we've got Headlines set up.
| | 02:20 | Now Headline is applied to all of our headlines.
| | 02:22 | And if I come and put my cursor inside of "The many flavors
of tea," you're going to notice that it says, "Subhead."
| | 02:28 | So what I've done ahead of time here is I've
actually gone and differentiated the Headlines
| | 02:33 | from the Subheads and set up Paragraph Styles to kind of set that up.
| | 02:37 | Now when you build the actual Table of Contents, what it's going to do is
you're going to say, Okay, anytime you find a Headline let's grab the text
| | 02:44 | from the actual document and put it inside the Table of Contents.
| | 02:47 | Anytime you find a Subhead do the same thing; grab the text,
copy it, we're going to put it inside the table of contents.
| | 02:54 | So that's how it's going to locate the content
for the actual Table of Contents.
| | 02:57 | So with that said, we're going to get started and start building our own.
| | 03:01 | So you can go ahead and close up "brochure_toc_final," and with the
next step we're going to take, start building our Table of Contents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing a TOC| 00:00 | Now what we're going to do is we're going to update the table of
contents to reflect any content changes we've made on the page.
| | 00:05 | So with "brochure_toc" still open and with it starting
from the beginning here of the Table of Contents chapter,
| | 00:11 | I'm going to come into the text and we're going to
change this up a little bit.
| | 00:15 | With your Selection tool, double-click on a subheadline here.
| | 00:19 | I want to change "The many flavors of tea" to "The many flavors of coffee."
| | 00:22 | Let's change the word "tea" to "coffee."
| | 00:25 | There we go.
| | 00:27 | Now, I'm going to come down to "Regional flavor rules," bring your cursor
down there, and we're going to change that up a little bit as well.
| | 00:33 | I just want to call it "Flavor rules," for instance.
| | 00:36 | So double-click on "Regional," delete that, and I want to
get rid of the space and actually capitalize "F" for "Flavor."
| | 00:42 | There we go.
| | 00:43 | So we've got "Flavor rules."
| | 00:45 | Now that we've made some changes to the actual subheads
or headline, we can update the table of contents.
| | 00:52 | Now if you've made changes to the body copy out there, you know, it's
not really going to make that much difference to the table of contents.
| | 00:59 | The only way it's going to make a difference
is if I add a lot a lot of copying here
| | 01:03 | and suddenly one of these subheads gets pushed to another page.
| | 01:06 | The page number will update.
| | 01:07 | So here's what we have to do.
| | 01:09 | To update your table of contents, you
have to select your table of contents.
| | 01:14 | In other words, with the Selection tool, click
on the text frame that encases your table
| | 01:19 | of contents or with the Type tool place the cursor inside.
| | 01:23 | Once the cursor's inside, if I come up to Layout, come
on down, you're going to see Update Table of Contents.
| | 01:29 | Select that.
| | 01:30 | It's not going to give you much warning here,
it's literally just going to do it.
| | 01:34 | So the table of contents has been updated successfully.
| | 01:36 | If I click OK it's been updated.
| | 01:38 | "The many flavors of coffee," "Flavor rules."
| | 01:41 | Same page numbers, et cetera.
| | 01:43 | So it's kind of a nice easy way to do that.
| | 01:45 | Now like I said before, if we want to change anything
about our table of contents, for instance, "Flavors,"
| | 01:50 | the headline, "Varieties" and "Coolers" have a page number.
| | 01:53 | I decide I don't want that.
| | 01:54 | Let's say I don't want a page number.
| | 01:55 | We've got to get rid of that.
| | 01:58 | With the cursor inside, come to Layout.
| | 02:02 | This time, instead of saying Update, we
haven't made any changes to the text,
| | 02:05 | we're going to come straight to Table of Contents,
click on Table of Contents.
| | 02:08 | It's going to open up the Table of Contents dialogue and what
we're going to do is we're going to choose the Headline up here.
| | 02:14 | I'm going to come down and I'm going to say I do not want a page number.
| | 02:17 | So under Page Number here we're going to say No Page Number.
| | 02:20 | Now there's no preview for this and it's going to
automatically update or replace the table of contents.
| | 02:26 | So click OK.
| | 02:28 | Take a look.
| | 02:30 | After a while this dialogue box gets a little annoying.
| | 02:33 | You can tell it not to show again, but I think it's
a little comforting to know this actually happens.
| | 02:37 | So I'm going to click OK and there's my table of contents.
| | 02:41 | So updating a table of contents, if you move pages, if you shift
things, if you do anything like that, or if you add text, et cetera,
| | 02:49 | you'll want to make sure that you update your table of contents.
| | 02:51 | That's going to be kind of a key.
| | 02:53 | So why don't you go ahead and save the file.
| | 02:55 | As far as updating table of contents that's about all we have.
| | 02:57 | Next thing we're going to do is we're going to
talk about how to actually generate a style
| | 03:00 | so that you can create multiple tables
of content across different documents.
| | 03:04 | So we can keep this document open for the next exercise.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Building a TOC| 00:00 | Now that we've discussed how to actually,
TOC is set up or table of contents is set up,
| | 00:05 | we're going to build one from scratch using a similar
document to what we had open in the last section.
| | 00:10 | So from your sample files folder in the Chapter
8 folder, go ahead and open up "brochure_toc."
| | 00:14 | We don't have a table of contents in this
one, so we're going to go ahead and build it.
| | 00:19 | What I have done though, if you look out in the text out here, I'm going to
double-click with my Selection tool here just to get my cursor in there.
| | 00:26 | I have already set up Paragraph Styles.
| | 00:29 | Now I'm assuming at this point that a lot of you have used
paragraph styles at least a little bit or a lot, I don't know.
| | 00:36 | But I've set up Headline styles and Subhead
styles for all the text I have out there.
| | 00:40 | As a matter of fact, with your Type tool, if
you click inside of each one of these subheads,
| | 00:43 | you'll notice it says Subhead as well as the headlines themselves.
| | 00:47 | Now what I also did was I went ahead and I actually, if you look in the
Paragraph Styles palette on the right-hand side, if you don't have it open,
| | 00:53 | you can click on it to kind of open it up again, I went ahead and
generated two styles that are going to be used for the table of contents.
| | 01:01 | Now I kind of guessed at these.
| | 01:03 | I figured out, you know what, we're going to have some
headlines in the table of contents and some subhead content.
| | 01:08 | So they're going to be underneath each other basically.
| | 01:10 | The subhead's going to be underneath the headline.
| | 01:12 | So I went and generated 2 table of content styles that
I can use when I build the actual table of contents.
| | 01:18 | So as the text is pulled out, it'll autoformat
it for me using these styles I've created.
| | 01:23 | It's just, it's thinking ahead.
| | 01:24 | You know what I mean?
| | 01:25 | You don't have to.
| | 01:26 | You can do it after the fact, that's fine.
| | 01:27 | But just to think ahead a little bit's kind of nice.
| | 01:29 | And you'll see why once we get into building it.
| | 01:32 | Okay? So what I'm going to do is I'm going to close up Paragraph Styles,
click on the tab there to kind of get that thing to go back
| | 01:38 | on the side and we're going to go ahead and build this.
| | 01:40 | Now we're building a table of contents for this single document.
| | 01:43 | All right?
| | 01:44 | This single document, if you take a look, if I look in the Pages
palette on the right-hand side, I am going to scroll down a little bit
| | 01:49 | in the Pages palette, you'll notice that this has 8 pages.
| | 01:52 | Now a table of contents is generally build from a single document.
| | 01:55 | What we're going to do towards the end of this chapter here is we're
going to talk about how to build a table of contents across a book.
| | 02:02 | So for right now we're going to do it across this document.
| | 02:04 | So with our Paragraph Styles set up we're
going to go ahead and actually create it.
| | 02:08 | You don't have to have anything selected.
| | 02:10 | I can go to my black arrow, click off if I want to.
| | 02:13 | All I do is I usually have a page in the document ready
to accept the table of contents, kind of a blank area.
| | 02:19 | And once again you don't even have to do that.
| | 02:21 | You don't have to have a text frame at all.
| | 02:22 | It's going to generate it for us.
| | 02:23 | It's kind of nice.
| | 02:24 | So let's get started here.
| | 02:25 | Come under Layout.
| | 02:26 | You take a look down here you're going to see Table of Contents.
| | 02:30 | Now this is how we generate our first one.
| | 02:32 | Click on Table of Contents; take a look inside of here.
| | 02:35 | This Table of Contents dialogue box, and actually here, let me
get it back where it was, this Table of Contents dialogue box,
| | 02:41 | when you first open it up, it's going to look something like this.
| | 02:45 | Now, let's break this down.
| | 02:46 | If you look up top you're going to see TOC Style.
| | 02:49 | Okay? You're not going to have any in here to begin with.
| | 02:52 | It's called Default.
| | 02:53 | When we set up a table of contents and we get it to look the way we want
it, we can save the style by clicking on Save Style and next time we go
| | 03:01 | to build a table of contents we can basically
use that style, which is kind of nice.
| | 03:04 | So for right now we don't have to deal with TOC Style.
| | 03:07 | If you look at Title, this is the actual text that's going to
be put at the very top of the table of contents itself.
| | 03:14 | So if you want it to actually say Table of Contents
on the page, you can type in "Table of Contents."
| | 03:18 | That's fine.
| | 03:19 | And we can - when it puts that text out there - we can style
it using any paragraph style that we have in our side
| | 03:25 | of our Paragraph Styles palette in this document only.
| | 03:28 | Okay? And as you can see right here, I've actually
generated, right there, you can see TOC Title.
| | 03:33 | I'm going to go ahead and use that style.
| | 03:34 | It's something I generated ahead of time.
| | 03:35 | Like a said, you can do this ahead of time or you can
come back in here later on after you've created them.
| | 03:41 | All right.
| | 03:42 | Now let's get to building the main document here, the main TOC.
| | 03:45 | If you look, here's the way it works.
| | 03:47 | On the left-hand side you've got something called Include Paragraph Styles.
| | 03:49 | On the right you've got Other Styles.
| | 03:52 | Other Styles are all of the styles in your document,
all the paragraph styles you have in your document.
| | 03:57 | Now here's what we've got to do.
| | 03:58 | We've got to tell InDesign what text to grab and
how to actually present it in the table of contents.
| | 04:05 | So you may see No Paragraph Style in here.
| | 04:08 | If you do, here's what we're going to do; we're going to remove that.
| | 04:10 | Okay? This list should be blank.
| | 04:13 | So with No Paragraph Styles selected, click Remove.
| | 04:15 | Normally when you start this, you're not going to see anything over here.
| | 04:19 | And that's a good thing.
| | 04:19 | You want to make sure, as a matter of fact, to
begin with you don't see anything over here.
| | 04:23 | So you can select those to remove them.
| | 04:25 | Now if you look over here, you're going to see all your styles.
| | 04:27 | Here's what we do.
| | 04:29 | I want to have the Headline and the Subhead paragraph styles.
| | 04:33 | I want to grab that text and actually put it in the TOC.
| | 04:35 | So I am going to select Headline.
| | 04:36 | I'm going to click Add.
| | 04:38 | What it's doing is it's saying okay, any time you find the
headline paragraph style, copy that text and put it in the TOC.
| | 04:45 | Next thing we're going to do is we're going to say okay, any time you
see Subheads, let's add that to our include paragraph styles.
| | 04:51 | And if you take a look, as it adds them, it's
actually removed from other styles right here.
| | 04:57 | That's because you can't put it twice in the list over here.
| | 05:00 | Okay? If you look at this list over here, the Include
Paragraph Styles, here's what's going on; take a look.
| | 05:06 | Click on Headline and Subhead, you're going to see
that Subhead is kind of nested underneath Headline.
| | 05:11 | The way this appears right here is how it's
actually going to appear in the table of contents list.
| | 05:16 | So Subhead will be a subset or nested under Headline.
| | 05:20 | So it's actually doing it for us which is kind of nice.
| | 05:24 | Now, now that we've picked out the text that's going to be in the table
of contents, if you come down here we're going to try and style it.
| | 05:30 | Okay? Now by default what I did before was
I clicked on a little button over here.
| | 05:35 | By default you're just going to see Style Subhead
or Style Headline or something like that.
| | 05:40 | Okay? Come off to the right.
| | 05:42 | I want to click on the More Options button here.
| | 05:45 | And if you see Fewer Options, the button right there, that's good.
| | 05:49 | Okay? If you look down here, when you click More Options, you've got
a ton of formatting you can do to all this text that's pulled out.
| | 05:56 | Now take a look at this.
| | 05:58 | Subhead selected.
| | 05:59 | Go ahead and click on Subhead.
| | 06:00 | If you look down here it says, okay, all the Subhead text is pulled out.
| | 06:04 | We can do this.
| | 06:04 | The Entry Style literally says, as it copies all the subheads out
and puts in a table of contents, let's style it a certain way.
| | 06:12 | Click on Same style right there.
| | 06:13 | If you were to just keep the same style, it would apply
the Subhead style to the subhead text that's pulled out.
| | 06:18 | It sounds kind of weird, but that's what it would do.
| | 06:21 | Now I've already created two paragraph styles ahead of time here.
| | 06:24 | So just, I'll just kind of guess to see what it would look like.
| | 06:26 | So I created one called toc-subhead.
| | 06:29 | So when subhead text gets pulled out, we're going to apply that one.
| | 06:33 | Now, if you look right here it says Page Number.
| | 06:35 | We want the subhead to be pulled out.
| | 06:38 | I want to put a tab, and then we're going to put a number in there.
| | 06:40 | Okay? The number is going to be the page number it's on.
| | 06:43 | If you look under Page Number here, it's going to say After Entry.
| | 06:46 | If you click on that pop up menu, you're going to see you can put
the page number Before or even have No Page Number if you want.
| | 06:52 | I want to put a page number after so I'll say After Entry.
| | 06:55 | And if you look, it says Between Entry and Number.
When it puts the text out there and then goes
| | 07:01 | to put the page number, it's going to automatically put a tab between them.
| | 07:05 | If you click on the right arrow over here you can put a Bullet, a
Space, a Dash, you know, all sorts of stuff, whatever you want to do.
| | 07:11 | I'm going to keep it Tab.
| | 07:12 | That's what a tab means right there.
| | 07:13 | That's fine.
| | 07:15 | Now, if you look right here where it says
Page Number, look straight across to Style.
| | 07:20 | This is kind of interesting.
| | 07:21 | You can actually style the page number using a character style
sheet you've already set up or a character style you've set up.
| | 07:28 | We don't have any.
| | 07:29 | Okay? I could always come back in here later and do this.
| | 07:32 | That's the great thing about it.
| | 07:33 | And if you want to style the tab or the character you have here, you
can apply character style to that Between Entry and Number character.
| | 07:41 | It gets a little far in here so we don't need to do this right now.
| | 07:45 | Now, Sort Entries in Alphabetical Order, when it puts the
entries out here it's actually going to do an alphabetical sorting.
| | 07:51 | It's going to put it from A to Z out here which, as
far as the table of contents, that's kind of weird.
| | 07:55 | I usually don't do something like that.
| | 07:56 | There are special cases, but not in this case.
| | 07:59 | If you look right here where it say Level 2,
Level 2 literally means it's going to be subset.
| | 08:05 | It's going to be a child of the one above it.
| | 08:08 | Now you can change this order here.
| | 08:09 | So take a look right here.
| | 08:10 | I can go up or down and look what it does to my Subhead up here.
| | 08:13 | It basically means that they're both going to be
pulled out, going to be as a first level it's called.
| | 08:18 | If I increase its value, it's going to go underneath.
| | 08:21 | This allows you to kind of switch things up.
| | 08:23 | As a matter of fact, if you look up here, Headline is first,
so it's always going to go Headline and then all the Subheads
| | 08:29 | until it finds another headline and all the subheads.
| | 08:32 | It's just going to keep doing that repeating pattern.
| | 08:34 | If you wanted it to go find the subheads first and then the
headlines and then put those in the table of contents that way,
| | 08:39 | you could actually take these and reorder them if you want to.
| | 08:43 | Okay? When you make the table of contents
this way, it's going to look really weird.
| | 08:47 | So I'd probably not want to do that.
| | 08:49 | So I'll pull that back out and keep it Headline, Subhead,
repeating pattern.
| | 08:54 | Now looking down to the Options down here; if you're going to create
a PDF out of this, you can actually auto-generate PDF bookmarks.
| | 09:01 | These are actually little links that are in the
PDF that people can click on and go to that page.
| | 09:06 | You know, we're not going to create a PDF
that's going to be used for other than printing.
| | 09:09 | So I don't need that.
| | 09:10 | Run-in is allowing, if there's any text, it's actually being flowed
and it's outside of the text box itself, it can actually include that.
| | 09:19 | Okay? Include Text on Hidden Layers.
| | 09:22 | If there's any hidden layers in here you can
do that as well and we don't want to do that.
| | 09:25 | We don't need to do that.
| | 09:26 | The other things are actually grayed out
here because we don't have them included.
| | 09:30 | So we basically just set up our table of contents.
| | 09:33 | What I'm going to do is we're going to click OK.
| | 09:35 | So go ahead and click OK.
| | 09:36 | It's going to come out here and you're going to
get your loaded text cursor.
| | 09:40 | Now, this is why I said to have a page
ready because you've got your text cursor.
| | 09:43 | If you don't have a page, what you can do is, if I use my
spacebar right now and move over, I could drop it on the pasteboard
| | 09:50 | and then when I have a page I could copy it out there.
| | 09:52 | But since we already have the page set up,
we're going to set it on this page.
| | 09:56 | So upper left-hand corner of the margin
guides, go ahead and click and let go.
| | 09:59 | And if you take a look, we've got our text out there.
| | 10:02 | Now, we've got a few problems going on here.
| | 10:04 | It doesn't look all that hot.
| | 10:06 | Okay? This is why the whole styling thing comes in.
| | 10:09 | You've got to style this to look pretty decent.
| | 10:11 | Now I decide that, you know, this doesn't look all that great.
| | 10:14 | As a matter of fact, I see a plus down there.
| | 10:15 | It's not all fitting.
| | 10:17 | You can, if you want to, come out here to this text and select it
and apply paragraph styles, but I would not suggest doing that.
| | 10:25 | I would not do that this way because we're going to actually
update the table of contents later and any time you update it,
| | 10:31 | it's going to look in the table of contents settings
and override all the stuff you did out here.
| | 10:36 | So what you want to do is you want to go
back to the settings to do all of this.
| | 10:39 | So with the black arrow I'm going to click on the text frame.
| | 10:42 | You could leave your cursor in, it doesn't matter.
| | 10:45 | Come back up to Layout.
| | 10:46 | Take a look down here at the bottom.
| | 10:48 | You're going to see Table of Contents, but
now we can see Update Table of Contents.
| | 10:52 | So now that we've built one, we don't have to build it again ever.
| | 10:55 | We're going to have it update it for us
when we make changes to the document.
| | 10:59 | For right now I want to make it look better.
| | 11:00 | So we're going to go back to Table of Contents.
| | 11:04 | Now this is where if you decided you didn't set up styles to actually style
your subheads or headlines and you went out here and did it, you know,
| | 11:12 | and saved them as paragraph styles, you
could now come back in here and apply them.
| | 11:17 | Now if you take a look, I'm going to click on Headline up here.
| | 11:19 | Okay? We didn't apply the right style to it.
| | 11:22 | If you look right here, it's applying just Headline to itself.
| | 11:26 | So I'm going to come to Entry Style here, come on down.
| | 11:28 | I've actually created a toc-headline for us.
| | 11:30 | I'll do that.
| | 11:33 | And let's take a look and see what this looks like.
| | 11:34 | Now, if you look right down here at the bottom,
it's going to say Replace Existing Table of Contents.
| | 11:40 | Because it's been built, it's going to do that for us automatically.
| | 11:42 | So go ahead and click OK.
| | 11:45 | Take a look.
| | 11:45 | It says it's been updated successfully.
| | 11:47 | This is going to become your best friend
because you want to see that happen.
| | 11:50 | If I click OK, take a look at your table of contents.
| | 11:53 | It looks a little better.
| | 11:54 | All I did was change the paragraph style in the actual definition for
it and it automatically updated for me to make it look pretty good.
| | 12:02 | Like I said, what I usually do is I'll do something like
this: if I hold the spacebar down and move over I'll actually,
| | 12:08 | even before the table of contents, what
I'll do is I'll come to my Type tool.
| | 12:11 | If you click and drag yourself a little text
frame, I'll actually just like, type out here.
| | 12:16 | I'll go like, "headline, subhead."
| | 12:19 | This is my own personal workflow.
| | 12:20 | You don't have to do this, but and I'll go in and I'll
literally set up styling for all of this for each one
| | 12:25 | of these and generate or make paragraph styles for them.
| | 12:28 | That way, when I make the table of contents, I've
got the styles created that I can apply to them.
| | 12:33 | So, you know, it's just something you can do.
| | 12:35 | Okay? All right.
| | 12:36 | I'm going to go ahead and fit this page back in the
window, Command-0, Control-0 in Windows.
| | 12:41 | And we've at least got a table of contents built.
| | 12:43 | Now, that's going to be it for basically building
the table of contents in one single document.
| | 12:48 | The next thing we're going to do is we're going to talk about how to edit
the TOC and how to actually update the table of contents as well.
| | 12:54 | So go ahead and save this document much
we're going to keep it for the next session.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating and saving a TOC style| 00:00 | Now that we've built the table of contents and successfully updated
it, what I want to do is talk to you about how to save the style
| | 00:06 | from the table of contents so that it can be used again and again.
| | 00:09 | It's kind of a nice little feature to be able to work with.
| | 00:12 | Now make sure that you're got "brochure_toc" open from the last exercise
| | 00:16 | or the last step we worked on, which was
actually updating the table of contents.
| | 00:20 | With this open, what we're going to do is we're
going to talk about saving a style for it.
| | 00:23 | Now a lot of times when you build a table of contents,
you're going to build it for a single document and, you know,
| | 00:29 | it's probably going to be pretty specific to
that document how you build it.
| | 00:33 | If I do a book for instance, and I want to do a TOC for that,
you know, it's going to be different from a magazine, let's say.
| | 00:39 | Okay? But sometimes you're going to create the
same kind of documents over and over again
| | 00:42 | and you're going to want to create the same types of table of contents.
| | 00:45 | For instance, if you were doing a monthly newsletter, that sort of thing.
| | 00:48 | A lot of times what people will do is they'll actually use a template
| | 00:51 | or they'll just do a Save As, that sort
of thing, or create a brand new document.
| | 00:55 | Now, when we work with tables of content, what we can
do is we can go through and save the style, it's called.
| | 01:01 | Take a look under Layout up in the menus up
top and you're going to take a look at the bottom.
| | 01:04 | It's going to say Table of Content Styles.
| | 01:08 | Go ahead and click on that.
| | 01:09 | If you take a look, you can actually create as
many, what are called styles, as you want to.
| | 01:16 | These styles are literally the definitions for a table of content.
| | 01:21 | Okay? Now you can make these, but they're
only saved with this independent document.
| | 01:26 | So if you go to save these, they're only with this one.
| | 01:28 | All right?
| | 01:29 | But the good thing is we can save the one that's in here and
then export it, or get it to another document if you want to.
| | 01:36 | Here's how we do that.
| | 01:37 | Cancel out of here.
| | 01:39 | Easiest way to save what is called a style, or save all the
settings for a table of contents, is to come to the Layout menu,
| | 01:45 | click back on Table of Contents, and if you look in here,
you're going to be able to see we have all our settings set up.
| | 01:51 | What I want to do is this: if you come over
on the side here, you're going to see Save Style.
| | 01:55 | Click on Save Style.
| | 01:56 | It's going to allow us to give it a name.
| | 01:59 | Let's say that this is our "coffee brochure" style.
| | 02:02 | I might call it something like, if I can spell
it correctly, there we go, "coffee brochure."
| | 02:08 | If I click OK, what it does is it takes all
this formatting here and saves it as a style.
| | 02:13 | Now it's only good for this document.
| | 02:15 | Okay? If we were to make another table of contents in here, we could
have generally three, four, ten different styles if you really wanted to.
| | 02:21 | But we've got the one.
| | 02:22 | So I'm going to click OK.
| | 02:26 | Now, if you take a look, here's what's going to happen.
| | 02:28 | It's a nice little surprise.
| | 02:30 | It automatically gives you your loaded text cursor.
| | 02:32 | It's saying okay, let's make another table of contents.
| | 02:35 | I am going to get to my Hand tool and what I am going to do
is I'm going to kind of let it go on the side over here.
| | 02:39 | I am going to click and let it go.
| | 02:40 | It's basically just a copy of what we've got here.
| | 02:44 | You just, you live with it.
| | 02:45 | It's something that it does.
| | 02:46 | Okay? So I'm going to delete this.
| | 02:47 | We don't need it.
| | 02:48 | It was just telling it, okay, you want to build a style, that's cool.
| | 02:51 | Let's do it.
| | 02:52 | So we saved our style.
| | 02:53 | Now, here's what we can do.
| | 02:55 | We come under Layout, come to Table of Contents
Styles again on the bottom of the menu down there.
| | 03:00 | You're going to notice you have your "coffee brochure" style.
| | 03:03 | Now if you look, you can actually create a new style from here.
| | 03:07 | So what it'll do is if I click New right now, so go ahead and click
New just to take a look, it's just going to open this dialogue box.
| | 03:12 | I could basically grab anything in here, generate the table of contents as
I wanted it to be generated, save it out as a name, and I've got it to use.
| | 03:21 | Cancel out of here.
| | 03:22 | We can also open an existing table of contents style.
| | 03:25 | So if you have "coffee brochure" in here, I could click Edit.
| | 03:29 | What it'll do is if you click Edit, it'll just open up the style here.
| | 03:32 | I can change a few things and click OK and it will save it and it will up-date my table of contents for me because I'm using "coffee brochure" here.
| | 03:41 | We're not going to do that either so go click Cancel.
| | 03:43 | You could Delete a style, you could even Load a style from somewhere else.
| | 03:47 | Okay? So that's what we're going to do.
| | 03:49 | Now, what we want to do is we've got our
"coffee brochure" style in this document.
| | 03:54 | We're going to create a brand new document and we're going to say
I want to use the "coffee brochure" style in that new document.
| | 03:59 | So here's how we do that.
| | 04:01 | Cancel. Now, I'm going to create a brand new document.
| | 04:05 | So let's come up to File, come on down to New>Document.
| | 04:12 | Create a Facing Page document, eight and a half by eleven, that's fine.
| | 04:15 | And let's do 4 pages to start with under Number of pages.
| | 04:18 | Go ahead and click OK to get it out there.
| | 04:21 | Now if you take a look, we've got a 4 page document.
| | 04:25 | Let's say that we decide to build a table of contents in this.
| | 04:30 | Now, here's the thing.
| | 04:31 | If we come under Layout, come down to the bottom, click on Table of
Contents Styles, you'll notice that there are no styles in this document.
| | 04:38 | The styles you create are for each independent document.
| | 04:42 | But what I would really like to do is I'd
like to load the one from "brochure_toc."
| | 04:46 | So if I click Load, it's going to say, okay,
which document do you want to pull it from?
| | 04:51 | If you go into your exercise files folder,
Chapter 8 folder, you'll see "brochure_toc."
| | 04:55 | Let's click on that.
| | 04:57 | I will open that up and it should pull in the "coffee brochure" style.
| | 05:02 | Okay? Now that's assuming that you had, when we
did the last couple of steps that you actually went
| | 05:08 | through and we saved the file and we got it in there.
| | 05:10 | You should be able to see "coffee brochure" show up.
| | 05:12 | If it didn't show up, you can Cancel out of here, go back
to the "brochure_toc," make sure it was saved in there.
| | 05:18 | Now that we've got it, if I click OK right
now, take a look, I can use that basically.
| | 05:23 | So if I want to generate a table of contents,
if I come to Layout and go to Table of Contents,
| | 05:28 | what it's going to do is it's going to keep this same
formatting for me, everything as we had before.
| | 05:32 | So if we look right here at "coffee brochure,"
it's basically the same stuff we had.
| | 05:37 | Now the only issue with using a table of contents style in a brand
new document is that you have to have the same paragraph style names.
| | 05:46 | So it's got to be able to pick up Headlines and Subheads, same thing.
| | 05:49 | Now I could just pull the styles across using
my Paragraph Styles palette, or, you know,
| | 05:54 | honestly what I like to do is to kind of circumvent this a little bit.
| | 05:58 | If I'm going to do brochures over and over again, month to
month, I'll actually create something like a template out of the brochure
| | 06:05 | and it automatically has the table of contents in there, the style.
| | 06:08 | So I can just change the contents itself.
| | 06:10 | So that's one thing you can do.
| | 06:13 | So anyway, just be aware that if you do pull a style
in, you need to have the same actual paragraph styles.
| | 06:18 | So working with table of contents styles is one way you can generate
the same type of table of contents between separate documents.
| | 06:26 | It's also a way you can take your table of contents, like if I
go back to "brochure_toc" here, I've got it open in the background,
| | 06:33 | if you want to actually generate it a little differently, you
could try a couple of different flavors, no pun intended here.
| | 06:39 | So I can actually in Layout up here, come to Table of Contents right
now, I could try and, you know, do some different things in here,
| | 06:46 | save that as a style, and maybe call it like "coffee
brochure," you know, "different styles" or something.
| | 06:51 | And you can flip-flop between the two different TOC
styles to give yourself a different look and feel.
| | 06:56 | So it there's a couple things you can do with TOC styles.
| | 07:00 | Cancel out of here, in the Table of Contents dialogue box.
| | 07:02 | You can go ahead and save the "brochure_toc," close that up,
and we're basically done actually working with the TOC styles.
| | 07:09 | The next thing we're going to do is talk about
creating a table of contents for a book.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a TOC for a book| 00:00 | In this last section on table of contents we're going to talk
about how to generate a table of contents across a book file.
| | 00:07 | Now you've got to kind of know how to
work with books to actually to do this.
| | 00:11 | So if you haven't worked with books yet and you're jumping right
to this section, I would suggest you go back to the Books chapter;
| | 00:17 | go through that just to kind of familiarize yourself with the books.
| | 00:21 | Now from the exercise files folder in Chapter
8, we're going to go ahead and open up a book file.
| | 00:26 | So I am going to go to File>Open, Command-0, Control-0.
| | 00:30 | From the Chapter 8 folder of the your exercise
files I'm going to see a "book_final" folder in there.
| | 00:35 | And we're going to open up the actual INDB file, this book right here.
| | 00:39 | So I'm going to click Open to get that open.
| | 00:42 | And you should see the "beverage_brochure" Book palette pop out here.
| | 00:48 | Okay? Now hopefully you don't see any yellow yield signs out here.
| | 00:52 | If you do, what you want to do is you want to select
all of these right now and you want to get rid of them.
| | 00:59 | So we're going to click minus to Remove and then we can add all those
documents back by selecting Add documents and then choosing them.
| | 01:06 | Once again, if you haven't used books in the past, make sure
you go back to the Book chapter to familiarize yourself with it.
| | 01:11 | Now if you take a look at the book here, this was prebuilt.
| | 01:14 | I'm kind of noticing a little problem right here.
| | 01:16 | The pages or the documents are kind of out of order a little bit.
| | 01:19 | This "tea_section" should be at the very top because
this "tea_section" actually has the front cover on it.
| | 01:25 | So here's what we'll do.
| | 01:25 | Just click on the "tea_section" here.
| | 01:27 | We're going to drag it straight up.
| | 01:29 | So that's going to change the page ordering or page
numbering inside of here, and there's "tea_section."
| | 01:34 | I also want "tea_section" to be the actual style source.
| | 01:37 | So at the left of "tea_section" I'm going to click
to make it the style source.
| | 01:41 | That way we kind of set things up and we're ready to go with the book.
| | 01:44 | Now, we're going to make a table of contents across all of these documents.
| | 01:47 | We're going to make one table of contents.
| | 01:49 | So here's how it typically works.
| | 01:51 | You create the book, you go through and add the documents, you
set it up, you paginate it, you do everything you need to do,
| | 01:57 | and usually towards the end of building this
thing I'm going to set up my table of contents.
| | 02:01 | So I will open the document that is going to contain the table of contents.
| | 02:04 | And this is usually, in this case it's called "tea_section."
| | 02:07 | Double-click the "tea_section" icon there,
the whole thing, you will open it up.
| | 02:12 | Now, I'm going to move the Book palette out of the way.
| | 02:14 | Click and drag the title bar up there, the
actual bar on top and move it out of the way.
| | 02:18 | Now if you look inside of here, I'm going to
scroll up a little bit, spacebar down.
| | 02:22 | I should be able to see, here's my front cover and we actually
have the rest of the pages down here; spacebar scroll down.
| | 02:28 | What we need is we need a couple of pages for our table of contents.
| | 02:31 | Okay? Now, the couple of pages we're going to add
here are going to kind of throw off our page count.
| | 02:36 | We've got to have it be a total of 16 according to the rules of printing.
| | 02:40 | So what we're going to do is we're going to add four more pages here.
| | 02:43 | So what I want to do is select page 1, double-click on page
1, come to your Insert Page icon here, the Create New Page deal,
| | 02:52 | hold down your Option key on Mac, Alt key on Windows.
| | 02:55 | Click on the page icon and it's going to say okay, let's insert some pages.
| | 02:59 | Let's actually do, let's see here, we've got a total of four pages.
| | 03:03 | We basically have to add four more pages to do this.
| | 03:06 | Okay? So I am going to click on 4.
| | 03:08 | So we're going to add four more pages after page 1.
| | 03:11 | And if you take a look at the master page, let's base it on A-Master.
| | 03:14 | So Master A is on that page.
| | 03:17 | Click OK once you get that set.
| | 03:19 | And if I zoom out, Command-minus on Mac, Control-minus on Windows,
I should be able to see the space for my table of contents.
| | 03:29 | Okay? Now, this is probably going to be
way too big for our table of contents.
| | 03:33 | We could probably get rid of some of the pages,
but when we zoom back into the second spread here.
| | 03:37 | Come to pages 2-3 and we're going to build
a table of contents on here.
| | 03:42 | Now, by opening one of the actual documents in the book we're
going to go through and say, let's build a table of contents
| | 03:48 | out of the whole book; so it's going to do it across all the documents.
| | 03:51 | So with this document open and with the area for our table of
contents set, we're going to go build ourselves a table of contents.
| | 03:58 | Come up to the Layout menu, click, down to
Table of Contents, click on that to open it up.
| | 04:03 | It'll open up the Table of Contents dialogue box.
| | 04:06 | Now we're just going to go through and, in the past couple
of sessions we went through we talked about how to work
| | 04:10 | with saving a TOC style; those styles are per document only.
| | 04:14 | Okay? And we're just going to quickly build one for ourselves here.
| | 04:18 | So basically what we do is I get rid of
everything in Include Paragraph Styles right now.
| | 04:22 | So with No Paragraph Style selected I'll click Remove, get rid of that.
| | 04:27 | We're going to put our Headline in here and our
Subhead just like we did in the past lessons here.
| | 04:31 | So click on Headline.
| | 04:32 | I'll click Add to pull it over.
| | 04:34 | Click on Subhead to pull it over as well.
| | 04:36 | Click Add.
| | 04:37 | Now if you're having kind of a hard time following this, if you jumped
right to this, make sure you go through the whole chapter on table
| | 04:42 | of contents because we've discussed all of this in the previous sessions.
| | 04:45 | So we've got Headline, Subhead.
| | 04:47 | Last thing we're going to do here is to style them.
| | 04:50 | Click on Headline.
| | 04:51 | Take a look down here under Entry Style.
| | 04:54 | I've already set up a couple of paragraph styles for us.
| | 04:56 | One's called toc-headline; we're going to apply that.
| | 05:00 | And for the headlines, when they show up
out here, I don't want to see a page number.
| | 05:04 | So click on After Entry and say No Page Number out there.
| | 05:08 | Click on Subhead up here so we can style it.
| | 05:11 | Come down to Entry Style and we're going to say toc-subhead.
| | 05:14 | So that's going to actually apply that paragraph
style to any subhead text that's in there.
| | 05:19 | Page Number After, that's fine with a tab.
| | 05:22 | Here's the key to this whole thing.
| | 05:24 | Come down here.
| | 05:25 | You're going to see Include Book Documents.
| | 05:28 | It's going to include all your book documents
if you check that box right there.
| | 05:32 | That way the table of contents is going to be generated
from all the text throughout all of these documents
| | 05:36 | and the actual TOC is going to be placed on this page we have open.
| | 05:41 | So we're good.
| | 05:42 | The only other thing actually is, if you look up top at the Title, if
you want it to be "Contents," it could be "Table of Contents," whatever.
| | 05:48 | I'll keep it "Contents."
| | 05:49 | I've got a paragraph style already set up called "TOC Title."
| | 05:52 | Let's use that and it looks like we're good to go.
| | 05:56 | Click OK.
| | 05:58 | Take a look.
| | 05:59 | Sometimes it may come up with an Overset Text warning thing.
| | 06:02 | What I want to do is, if you take a look, this
document already has some text frames out here.
| | 06:07 | You can see your parentheses inside of the actual icon there.
| | 06:11 | What we'll do is we'll hold down the Shift key to get it to autoflow and
just click on the left column of page 2 here; that'll get it to flow.
| | 06:19 | Now if you take a look, we've got them across, admittedly it looks kind
of silly, so what I might do is I might take this text frame on the right,
| | 06:28 | just pull it off on the right-hand page, onto page
3, and we're just going to open up both of these.
| | 06:32 | So if I open up both of them, then go all the way across.
| | 06:36 | Now it's going to pull a lot of text back when I open this one up.
| | 06:39 | And there's our table of contents.
| | 06:40 | Like I said, admittedly, too many pages out here, but
the table of contents is now generated across the book.
| | 06:47 | It works the same way as any other table of contents.
| | 06:49 | If anybody updates any of these pages in here, if they update any of them,
what you're going to have to do is you're going to have to select the
| | 06:56 | table of contents from this document, come up to
Layout, and choose Update Table of Contents.
| | 07:02 | Like I said, that's if any of the text has
been changed in any of these documents.
| | 07:07 | So to create a table of contents across books, all you've got to do is
remember, paragraph styles have to be in each one of these,
| | 07:13 | they have to have the same thing, like for instance, Headline and Subhead.
| | 07:16 | That way you'll ensure that it's going to work for you.
| | 07:18 | Okay? So with the correct styles in all the documents and with choosing
one document for the table of contents, you can generate it automatically.
| | 07:26 | Now if you were working with a team of people, let me move
the book up here, if you're working with a team of people
| | 07:30 | and people are constantly getting into these documents and doing
things and changing things, every once in a great while, you know,
| | 07:37 | before you go to publish this thing, PDF, et cetera, you're
going to have to remember to update a table of contents.
| | 07:42 | Okay? So it's just something you've got to remember to do.
| | 07:44 | But with that, we've just automatically
generated a table of contents across a book.
| | 07:48 | Just remember, open one of the documents from the book
to get it to work, check the check-box in Layout>
| | 07:54 | Table of Contents, that tells it to do it across the book.
| | 07:58 | So that basically ends working with table of contents.
| | 08:00 | There's a lot of things we can do with these.
| | 08:01 | Hopefully you've seen a lot of potential with them.
| | 08:04 | In the next chapter, we're going to go through
and start talking about indexing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. IndexingPlanning an index| 00:00 | Now in this chapter we're going to talk about indexing.
| | 00:03 | Indexing is is kind of a big animal that a lot of
people tend to shy away from just because it seems
| | 00:08 | to to be pretty complex and a lot of things going on.
| | 00:11 | People tend to open up the dialogs and all of the
palettes and everything and just kind of shy away from it.
| | 00:17 | I know I did.
| | 00:19 | But we're going to go through and talk about how to
actually plan an index and then we're going to go through
| | 00:23 | and actually build a smaller index just
to give you an idea of how it can work.
| | 00:28 | Okay? So when you're trying to work on an index or create an
index, generally an index is basically a summary of your page
| | 00:36 | or a way to find information in your document basically.
| | 00:40 | Now I've got a couple of files open here.
| | 00:42 | I've got one called "brochure_final."
| | 00:44 | If you're actually following along here, if you have the Premium
subscription or you have the CD-ROM, you should have access to these files.
| | 00:50 | If not, you probably want to upgrade to the Premium
subscription or you want to buy the CD-ROM itself.
| | 00:56 | That way you can kind of follow along and use these files I've got.
| | 00:59 | Otherwise, if you've got your own files you can try and do that.
| | 01:02 | All right.
| | 01:03 | Now if you have the files in the exercise files folder in
Chapter 9, you should be able to see "brochure_final."
| | 01:08 | This is going to be the final version of the index.
| | 01:11 | I'm on page 2-3 right now and what I'd like to do is we're
going to go ahead and scroll down after you get the file open.
| | 01:16 | I am going to scroll down.
| | 01:17 | I am in the Pages palette here, and let's go down
to the last page, page 8, and take a look.
| | 01:23 | What I have done is I've actually generated
a pretty small index for this document.
| | 01:27 | I mean, it's a smaller document in general,
but I've generated an index for this.
| | 01:32 | An index inside of InDesign allows you to pick key words,
phrases, things like that, and actually generate, you know,
| | 01:40 | page calls, basically saying, you know, like "Coffee" is on page 4.
| | 01:43 | A certain type of coffee called "Arabic" is on page 4 as well.
| | 01:47 | I can even go on down and do things like a "See also."
| | 01:51 | Like if I have an author right here and I want
to say "See also" Thomas, I can look at Thomas
| | 01:55 | and see where he is basically, okay, or where that person is.
| | 01:59 | Utilizing indexes is a great way for people
to find information in your document.
| | 02:04 | Now when you're going to create an index, the one thing you want to do
is you kind of want to make sure that you have a list of topics set up.
| | 02:11 | Okay? I usually go through and try and pick all my topics.
| | 02:15 | As I go through the document itself I'll look and
see what the big things I'm talking about are.
| | 02:20 | Like for instance, I've got a whole section here on "Coolers."
| | 02:23 | Okay? Over here I've got a section on "Tea Types."
| | 02:26 | These are going to be topics for you.
| | 02:28 | Okay? And when you dig deeper, such as in "Tea Types" here or we're
going to be able to see that we have different tea types, basically.
| | 02:34 | So you can see "Oolong Phoenix Bird" right here.
| | 02:37 | Now I'm always trying to kind of figure out what to do as
far as how I want to generate the index, that sort of thing.
| | 02:43 | A lot of people will go through and just kind of do it and get it done
basically, just by actually looking at their document and start working.
| | 02:49 | Now one thing you want to do before you actually
go ahead and jump into an index is you want
| | 02:55 | to consider how people are going to be looking at your document.
| | 02:57 | Okay? You know, when I go to indexes, typically,
I'm scrolling down here to the last page.
| | 03:02 | When I go to indexes, most indexes to me make sense.
| | 03:05 | Okay? If I'm looking for how to ferment coffee or something,
I might go to "F" for ferment and you I see it right there.
| | 03:12 | But sometimes you're going to have things a little different.
| | 03:14 | Now you want to consider how people are going to look at your
file and how people are going to want to search on things.
| | 03:19 | Just kind of sit and think about that for a second.
| | 03:21 | Another thing is to try and keep things simple.
| | 03:23 | And you want to figure out, do you want to actually
have like under these categories, like A, B, C, D,
| | 03:28 | et cetera, how many levels do you want to have under there?
| | 03:31 | I mean you can have, like you can see right here.
| | 03:33 | Let me zoom in a little bit.
| | 03:34 | You can see under "Coffee" here that, I know the formatting isn't
that great, but under "Coffee" I've got three different kinds here.
| | 03:40 | I've got "Arabic," general "coffee," and "Decaf."
| | 03:43 | Now, I could go subset underneath that and break it
down further, but you've got to figure out how simple
| | 03:48 | or complex you want to make the actual index itself.
| | 03:50 | Okay? So considering how people are going to look, how simple
or complex it's going to be; also before you generate the index,
| | 03:57 | what you want to do is you want to make sure that your
document itself is pretty much in its final form, okay,
| | 04:03 | pretty close to it because it's going to be a little bit harder.
| | 04:05 | You've got to add the new content later on.
| | 04:07 | So I usually generate the index towards the last
stage, okay, the last step in the process.
| | 04:13 | And before you generate it you want to double, triple-check what
you've done in the index and then you can generate the index itself.
| | 04:19 | Because InDesign's going to auto generate the index for you.
| | 04:22 | So those are just some kind of general broad strokes,
helpful hints, to kind of work with an index.
| | 04:28 | We're going to go ahead and in the next session here, we're going to
go through and actually create the index using a brochure file.
| | 04:34 | So I can close up "brochure_final" and we'll get onto the next session.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an index| 00:00 | Now we can start generating an index using the "brochure.indd" document.
| | 00:04 | So from the exercise files in the Chapter 9
folder, go ahead and open up "brochure.indd."
| | 00:11 | This file doesn't have an index built in it,
so this is kind of a starting point for us.
| | 00:16 | Once you get it open, now I am going to scroll down and go
to page 8 and take a look at the bottom down there.
| | 00:20 | You should see no index generated.
| | 00:22 | All right.
| | 00:23 | I'm going to come on back up to page 2-3.
| | 00:25 | I will double-click in the Pages palette to get there.
| | 00:28 | And once we have a document set up, we've basically got all the content
we need out there and it's, you know, this is an 8 page document.
| | 00:34 | I mean, if it's 100, 200, 500 page document,
you're going to have a lot of text in there.
| | 00:39 | All right?
| | 00:40 | Usually what I do, like I said before, I just develop a topic
list or something like that, and we're going to talk about that.
| | 00:44 | So first things first.
| | 00:46 | Let's get the Index palette open.
| | 00:48 | Come under Window, come down to Type and Tables and you will see Index.
| | 00:54 | All right, if you take a look at the Index palette,
basically what we have is this: we've got two sections here.
| | 00:59 | We've got Reference and Topic.
| | 01:01 | If you click between the two, you're not really going to notice
a difference in anything down here, it's kind of interesting.
| | 01:07 | Here's the difference though; when you go to build an
actual index, you are going to have a list of topics.
| | 01:13 | The topics themselves are usually like the anything
that's like under A, under B, under C, et cetera.
| | 01:19 | So animals under A might be a topic.
| | 01:22 | In this case, since we're doing the theme coffee, tea might
be a topic, drinks might be a topic, coffee might be a topic.
| | 01:28 | So these are all things that are going to be topics.
| | 01:30 | A reference is actually something in the page out
here that's being referenced by a page number usually.
| | 01:37 | So for instance, if I have if I take a
look over here, I'm going to zoom in a bit.
| | 01:40 | I'm on page 3.
| | 01:41 | I'm going to zoom in a bit and I see right here it says Arabic coffee.
| | 01:45 | What I might do is actually have a topic called coffee
and then actually have a reference to Arabic coffee
| | 01:52 | and that would actually put a page number such as page 3.
| | 01:55 | So it might say under see here, it might say coffee and then below
that it might say Arabic with an actual page three next to it.
| | 02:03 | That's called a reference.
| | 02:04 | Now the topics themselves, like I said, are
just generic categories that things can go into.
| | 02:09 | The reference, what happens is, if I do something like Arabic coffee
out here and I decide to put that in there and actually reference it,
| | 02:16 | I'm going to actually place something called an index marker on the page.
| | 02:20 | The marker is going to say, okay, if I select text
and I say let's create a reference to this text,
| | 02:26 | InDesign's going to pick up the text right here
and allow me to put it into a topic category.
| | 02:31 | So if I create a topic category of coffee, I can put that in there.
| | 02:34 | So that's a nice easy way to do that.
| | 02:35 | Okay? So we have topics which are generic and
references which are basically more specific.
| | 02:41 | Now when we generate an index there's a couple things we can do here.
| | 02:44 | I'm going to go back to my black arrow here and deselect.
| | 02:47 | Come to the Topics, click on Topic.
| | 02:49 | If you take a look, we've got a bunch
of buttons down at the bottom down here.
| | 02:52 | These are all buttons that allow us to actually if you
look at this one right here, this is Generate the index.
| | 02:56 | Okay? Once we're all done we're going to do that.
| | 02:58 | That's going to automatically create the index
for us and let us place it on the page.
| | 03:02 | This page right here, this icon, actually
allows us to Create a new index entry.
| | 03:06 | So when we want to create a new topic we
can click there and just create a topic.
| | 03:10 | Now sometimes when you create an index you're
going to be creating it from a rather large document.
| | 03:16 | Let me fit my pages back in my window here.
| | 03:18 | So, if you have a bigger document and you're trying to create an index
for it, there is an easier way to do this possibly by importing topics.
| | 03:26 | If you have a document from before that you've created
an index in or even as least created topics in,
| | 03:31 | what you can do is actually import those
topics from the previous InDesign document.
| | 03:36 | Now, if you go to the Index palette menu, you'll
actually notice something called import topics.
| | 03:41 | This allows you to pick an existing InDesign document that has a
topic list in it to be able to actually bring those into this document.
| | 03:48 | That way you don't have to quite start from scratch.
| | 03:51 | So like I said, for larger documents you can do something like that.
| | 03:53 | You can set up the topics outside.
| | 03:55 | Now in here we've got - it's kind of a smaller
document so we're going to do it right inside of here.
| | 03:59 | Okay? So what I want to do is we're going to
actually start by creating a few topics.
| | 04:03 | So with Topics selected in Index here, what we're going to
do is we're just going to kind of do this by ourselves.
| | 04:07 | You don't have to generate topics, you can just start working on the page.
| | 04:10 | But come down to the bottom of the palette here in Index.
| | 04:13 | We're going to create a new index entry by clicking the page icon.
| | 04:15 | And if you take a look, it's going to say okay,
we're going to generate a New Topic all together.
| | 04:20 | Now if you look in here, you've got something called Topic Levels.
| | 04:23 | Topic Levels are basically this: let's say that you're
creating a topic called drinks and that's going to be
| | 04:30 | under the D in your reference up here in your index.
| | 04:34 | So if I create "Drinks," what I can do is
create a topic level below that called "Coffee."
| | 04:38 | So if I wanted to do something like that, what
I would actually do is type in "Drinks" right here
| | 04:43 | and what that would be is - take a look at the numbers on the side here.
| | 04:46 | These are basically the index order.
| | 04:48 | So that's the order of the actual topic.
| | 04:50 | So this would be "Drinks," the main category, and then I could create
what you could call a sub-category under 2 here and let's say "Coffee."
| | 04:58 | Okay? What it's doing down here is it's just showing
you all the letters you guys have to work with.
| | 05:04 | Okay? So basically we've got that to work with.
| | 05:07 | So like I said, we can actually generate, you know,
larger topics, smaller topics, whatever we want to do.
| | 05:13 | Here's what we're going to do.
| | 05:13 | I want "Coffee" to be the main topic.
| | 05:17 | So I decide, you know what, coffee needs to be the main one.
| | 05:19 | If you look over here at these arrows, you can
basically sort these if you want, move them up and down.
| | 05:23 | Sort's the wrong word.
| | 05:25 | With my cursor over here, if I use the up arrow, I can actually
change the direction of these or change the order of them.
| | 05:31 | "Coffee" will now be under "C" in the topic list here.
| | 05:36 | Now, we're going to get rid of "Drinks" here.
| | 05:37 | We don't need this here.
| | 05:38 | I just want to have a generic topic called "Coffee."
| | 05:41 | So if I take a look, "Coffee" will be out there.
| | 05:43 | It will be under "C." And I've basically created myself a topic.
| | 05:47 | Now if I click Add right now - go ahead and
click Add - it's going to add it to the topic list.
| | 05:51 | There you go.
| | 05:52 | And you can also see it right down here.
| | 05:54 | Now, this is a way to be able to go through
and actually add topics as much as you want.
| | 05:59 | So we can go through and if you know the topics you want to
add right out of the gate, you can just go ahead and do it.
| | 06:04 | So for instance, we're going to do a "Tea" topic as well.
| | 06:06 | So let's do "Tea."
| | 06:07 | Oops, "Tea."
| | 06:09 | Go ahead and Add it.
| | 06:10 | And if you take a look, it puts it under "T"
and allows us to actually take a look at it.
| | 06:13 | So we've got some topics we're setting up here.
| | 06:15 | Okay? Let's go ahead and click Done.
| | 06:17 | Now I'm, you know, I'm going to be the first one to tell you that
indexing is a pretty manual process as you can see it already.
| | 06:26 | We've added two topics, okay, and these are going to be some big topics.
| | 06:31 | If you really want to, you can go through and do this
all by hand and actually get it to do really well
| | 06:36 | and there are people that do this for a living, this sort of thing.
| | 06:38 | And there's a reason for that; it's because it's a little tedious.
| | 06:41 | There's a lot of things you've got to do out here.
| | 06:43 | Okay? Now, once we've added topics, if we were to just Generate the index
right now, if I were to show you this, we would actually just see "C,"
| | 06:50 | "Coffee" and there would be no page numbers, there would be nothing.
| | 06:52 | It would just be a generic topic.
| | 06:53 | We need to create what's called in references right now.
| | 06:56 | Okay? So here's what I like to do.
| | 06:58 | I'm going to come to my reference button over here.
| | 07:00 | We're going to get out here and we're going to
start putting some markers on the page.
| | 07:03 | I'm going to say, okay, let's pick this up, this up, this up, et cetera.
| | 07:06 | So here's what we're going to do.
| | 07:07 | We're going to create an "Arabic" coffee reference.
| | 07:10 | So on the third page, I'll zoom in a bit so you can see what I'm
doing here, I'm going to double-click to get my cursor out there.
| | 07:16 | And what I want to do is we're going to make a reference here to "Arabic."
| | 07:19 | Now there's a couple of ways you can do this to make a reference.
| | 07:22 | You can not select anything and click on the page and type it in or
if you select text, I can actually create a new reference right here.
| | 07:29 | Take a look.
| | 07:30 | New index entry, what it's going to do is it's going to
generate what's called a New Page Reference.
| | 07:35 | It automatically puts the Topic Level out here.
| | 07:38 | Now, here's the thing.
| | 07:40 | This sort of confused me when I first started working with indexing; the
topic levels themselves, if we were just to click OK or Add right now,
| | 07:48 | what it would do is it would put "Arabic" as a topic out there.
| | 07:52 | It would create it under the letter "A" here and say "Arabic" and
what it would do is it would automatically put a page number next
| | 07:57 | to it for this one entry right here.
| | 08:00 | Now, what I'd like to do is this, I want "Arabic"
to be under "Coffee" instead.
| | 08:05 | So here's what I can do.
| | 08:06 | We've already created a topic for "Coffee."
| | 08:08 | So watch this.
| | 08:08 | I'm going to scroll up on my list here.
| | 08:10 | I can basically see that we have "C" down here.
| | 08:12 | I'm going to open that up.
| | 08:13 | I can see "Coffee."
| | 08:14 | Here's what we'll do.
| | 08:16 | Put your cursor in "Arabic."
| | 08:17 | I want the topic levels to be "Coffee, Arabic."
| | 08:21 | Okay? That way "Arabic" will go under "Coffee."
| | 08:23 | So you've got to kind of make it look the way you want it.
| | 08:25 | So I'm going to actually move "Arabic" down by
clicking on the down arrow here.
| | 08:29 | I'm going to put my cursor back up in 1 here and if you take
a look at "Coffee" down here, this is kind of interesting.
| | 08:34 | If you hover over it, it's going to say Double-
click to copy to Topic Levels boxes.
| | 08:39 | Now, just to kind of clear things up quickly, I know I'm reviewing
things, but if you create a topic, when you do them ahead of time,
| | 08:46 | if you just go through and start creating topics for your
self, you've got those there and you can start putting all
| | 08:51 | of these little references underneath
them, under the category that you want.
| | 08:55 | So we've already created "Coffee."
| | 08:56 | So put your cursor in 1, double-click on the word
"Coffee" down here and it should put it right up top.
| | 09:02 | Now, here's what's going to happen.
| | 09:03 | If you take a look, it's going to say under Type here, Current Page.
| | 09:08 | What it's going to do is it's going to actually
under "Coffee" right here, it's going to put "Arabic"
| | 09:12 | and put a page number only for this page, which is page 3.
| | 09:16 | Now if you decide if you come under Type here, you can
actually say, you know what, I don't want a page number there.
| | 09:22 | Okay? Now, you know, for an index that probably wouldn't be a great thing
for this specific page reference, but if I say Suppress Page Range,
| | 09:30 | it won't even put a number out there and
that'll kind of defeat the purpose.
| | 09:33 | So you also have the ability to say, you know what, let's if I have
"Arabic" displaying let's say, you know, six times over the next two pages,
| | 09:44 | I can say, let's actually say To the End of the Story.
| | 09:47 | What it'll do is it'll put "Arabic" underneath
"Coffee" and it'll say End of Story.
| | 09:52 | Let's say the story ended on page 4, it would put pages 3-4
in here and say there's "Arabic" throughout 3 and 4.
| | 10:00 | This is kind of a generic way to say where it is.
| | 10:03 | Here's what we're going to do.
| | 10:04 | I'm just going to say Current Page.
| | 10:05 | I want to put the page number it's on and if you
click Add right now it's just going to add this one.
| | 10:11 | Okay? What I'd like to do though is this
is kind of a nice little way to do this.
| | 10:15 | I want to add all of the "Arabic" occurrences throughout
the document and put it under the "Coffee" topic here.
| | 10:21 | So we've got them all set up so all I've got
to do is, if you look over here you'll see Add.
| | 10:24 | If I click Add it's going to do the one page.
| | 10:26 | If I click Add All, it's going to do all the pages.
| | 10:28 | We're going to do that.
| | 10:29 | Click Add All and if you take a look on the left-hand
side over here, you're going to see your Index palette.
| | 10:34 | Hopefully you can see that.
| | 10:36 | You've got "Coffee."
| | 10:37 | Underneath that you've got "Arabic" and I can basically see 3, 4.
| | 10:41 | So it's actually putting the page numbers into there.
| | 10:43 | So what we've done is we've actually got a topic
called "Coffee," we've nested "Arabic" underneath it
| | 10:48 | and told it to add all the page numbers
the associated page references to it.
| | 10:51 | So we're done.
| | 10:53 | I'm going to click Done and I basically have it out there.
| | 10:56 | Now, it's really kind of neat to be able to do something like this.
| | 10:58 | Once you start generating oops, once you start generating
a topic list and then start doing the references,
| | 11:03 | you know, there's a lot of things you can do out here.
| | 11:05 | All right, so here's what we're going to do.
| | 11:07 | Next thing I know want to do, I am on page 3.
| | 11:09 | I see "Thomas Sullivan" right here.
| | 11:11 | We're going to put him on the list.
| | 11:12 | Okay? Now what I want to do is we're going to
actually do it by "Sullivan" here.
| | 11:17 | So I am going to select "Sullivan" here.
| | 11:19 | Now once again, planning the index you've got
to kind of figure out what you want to do.
| | 11:23 | We're going to create a reference; I don't have a topic for "Sullivan."
| | 11:27 | We're just going to do "Sullivan" under the letter "S," okay?
| | 11:30 | So under Reference here, what I'm going to do is I just
I have a habit of just clicking on letters right here.
| | 11:35 | It doesn't really matter what you do.
| | 11:36 | I'm going to come down here and we're going to click on New index entry.
| | 11:40 | Make sure you're on Reference.
| | 11:42 | Take a look, it's going to put "Sullivan" in there.
| | 11:44 | Now, I don't want "Sullivan" to be under anything
and what basically we haven't chosen anything.
| | 11:50 | So "Sullivan" is the topic level here, the topic level 1.
| | 11:53 | What InDesign's going to do is InDesign's going to
take "Sullivan" and put it under the letter "S." Okay?
| | 11:59 | So if I want to add all the occurrences
of "Sullivan," I'm going to do that right now.
| | 12:03 | Okay? It just makes it easier if you do it right now.
| | 12:04 | So I'm going to click Add All.
| | 12:06 | And if I take a look over on my Reference over here on my Index palette,
I'm going to see "Sullivan" under "S" and all the page occurrences.
| | 12:14 | I'll click Done and I'm basically done.
| | 12:18 | Honestly, when you really think about an index, if you're going to do
this all by hand, like such as "New York" here, I can just go out
| | 12:24 | and select all the text, all the words that the key
words basically I guess you could call them, select them,
| | 12:30 | create new topics for them, and actually have it find them all.
| | 12:33 | So that way you can go through and try to get everything you need.
| | 12:35 | So go ahead and select "New York."
| | 12:37 | We're going to do that one.
| | 12:38 | So somebody wants to search on "New York" let's say.
| | 12:40 | I'll select "New York."
| | 12:41 | I'll create a brand New index entry.
| | 12:43 | I'm on Reference still.
| | 12:45 | Take a look.
| | 12:46 | There's "New York."
| | 12:47 | I'm going to tell it to be the Current Page right here.
| | 12:49 | That's fine.
| | 12:50 | Like I said, I could say To End of Document, et cetera.
| | 12:52 | Matter of fact, let's do that.
| | 12:54 | I'm going to say To End of Document.
| | 12:56 | I'm going to show you what this does.
| | 12:57 | If you have occurrences like "New York" that occurs
a ton of times like to the end of the story
| | 13:04 | or the end of this section basically, you could choose this option here.
| | 13:07 | And what it's going to do is, it's going to put like
a, you know, a 3 through 5 kind of thing.
| | 13:12 | Okay? So that way there's too many occurrences of "New York."
| | 13:14 | So I can do something like this.
| | 13:16 | If I click on Add All right now and I take a look
over here, what it's going to do is it's going to say, okay,
| | 13:21 | it's found on page 3-8 and it's found on page 5-8.
| | 13:25 | It's kind of interesting the way that it does that.
| | 13:27 | All right?
| | 13:28 | But that's actually doing something like To End of Document.
| | 13:31 | So you could pick To End of the Story, End of Section, et cetera.
| | 13:34 | It's almost always going to do something like a number through a number.
| | 13:38 | Okay? So I'm going to click Done right here.
| | 13:40 | And it basically did it for us.
| | 13:41 | Now, 3-8, 5-8 is kind of repetitive.
| | 13:44 | This is kind of a generic way to do something.
| | 13:46 | 3-8 isn't going to help anybody.
| | 13:48 | Do you know what I mean?
| | 13:49 | If I had 3 through page 400, you know,
people are going to get a little upset.
| | 13:53 | So, like I said, this is for things that occur a lot of times.
| | 13:58 | If you don't want to put a thousand occurrences
out there like for the word the sort of thing.
| | 14:01 | Okay? Now if you look here, 3-8 should be fine.
| | 14:04 | It went ahead and found page 5 and said 5-8 as well.
| | 14:08 | We don't need both of these.
| | 14:09 | So I am going to select 5-8 and I'm going to get rid of that one.
| | 14:11 | Okay? Delete selection?
| | 14:14 | Yes. And it only has "New York" found on pages three through eight.
| | 14:17 | Like I said, it's a very generic way to do it.
| | 14:19 | Okay? Now, we basically got that done.
| | 14:23 | What I want to do is we're going to zoom out a little bit here.
| | 14:25 | I'm going to kind of fit this back in my page.
| | 14:27 | So we're kind of creating references, we're creating topics.
| | 14:30 | There's a lot of ways to do this.
| | 14:31 | What we're going to do is we're going to create
a, what's called a cross-reference here.
| | 14:34 | Okay? I'm going to create a topic and create
a cross-reference for ourselves.
| | 14:38 | So to create a cross-reference, a cross-reference
is basically something like a "see also" or a "see."
| | 14:44 | We're going to create a generic category called "Author."
| | 14:47 | And when somebody gets to the author in the index,
let's say we've only got one author in this document,
| | 14:52 | what I want to do is I want to point them directly to "Thomas Sullivan"
which is who we actually referenced down towards the bottom down here.
| | 14:58 | I can see "Sullivan" right there.
| | 15:00 | So what we're going to do is we're going to create
another reference, but we're going to make it be a "see,"
| | 15:04 | okay, which is basically a pushing them off to "Thomas."
| | 15:07 | So I'm going to click on the page icon down here,
Creating a new index entry.
| | 15:11 | I know, I already had text selected on the page.
| | 15:13 | I always do that.
| | 15:14 | I forget to do it.
| | 15:14 | So get rid of the Topic Level there.
| | 15:16 | What we're going to do is we're actually
going to put a brand New Topic Level here.
| | 15:19 | I'm going to say "Author."
| | 15:20 | And if you take a look, we're not going to put anything else in here.
| | 15:24 | Okay? I just want to say any time if you're
looking for an author, let's go see "Sullivan".
| | 15:28 | Let's go see "Thomas Sullivan" and find a page number from there.
| | 15:32 | So if you take a look down here where it says Type, you're actually going
to be able to see that I don't have anything that I want to put
| | 15:37 | on a page necessarily |
|
|
